Bio Rad D-10 Hemoglobin Tester

Service Manual
™
Part Number 220-0318
D-10
Hemoglobin
Testing
System
L20015500
July 2003
D-10 Hemoglobin Testing System
Bio-Rad Laboratories
Diagnostic Group
4000 Alfred Nobel Drive
Hercules, California
94547
USA
Technical Assistance Contact Information:

CSD_techsupport@Bio-Rad.com
CAUTION
Please read through and familiarize yourself with the contents of the service manual.
All personnel using the D-10 should wear standard laboratory safety apparatus.
(e.g. safety glasses, laboratory coat and gloves)
All reference material (i.e. standards and controls) and patient samples should be considered as
biohazardous material and must be handled with caution.
Waste material contains sample waste plus reagents: treat and dispose of as directed by your laboratory
safety guidelines or by local ordinance.
TRADEMARKS AND REFERENCES
D-10 is a trademark of Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective companies.
ii Service Manual 200:155

Table of Contents
1 Introduction
1.1. General Description 1-1

1.2. High Performance Liquid Chromatography 1-2
1.2.1 Definition 1-2
1.2.2 General Principle 1-2
1.3. HPLC Applied to the D-10 1-2
1.3.1 General Principle 1-2
1.3.2 Stationary Phase: The Cartridge 1-3
1.3.3 Mobile Phase: The Buffers 1-4
1.3.4 Separation 1-4
1.3.5 Bio-Rad D-10 Hemoglobin A1c 1-4
1.3.6 Bio-Rad D-10 Dual Program 1-5
1.4. Operating Principles 1-6
1.4.1 Theory of Operation 1-6
1.4.1.1 Overview 1-6
1.4.1.2 Sample Preparation 1-6
1.4.1.2.1 Functions 1-6
1.4.1.2.2 Description of the Sample Fluid Pathway 1-7
1.4.1.2.3 Operation of the Sampling Components 1-8
1.4.1.3 Sample Analysis 1-9
1.4.1.3.1 Functions 1-9
1.4.1.3.2 Description of the Sample Analysis Components 1-9
1.4.1.3.3 Operation of the Sample Analysis Components 1-11
1.4.1.4 General Fluidic Diagram 1-15
1.4.1.5 Sample Arm 1-15
1.4.1.5.1 Functions 1-15
1.4.1.5.2 Components 1-17
1.4.1.5.3 Operation of the Sample Arm Components 1-19
1.4.1.6 Rack Handling Functions 1-20
1.4.1.6.1 Functions 1-20
1.4.1.6.2 Description of the Rack Handling Components 1-20
1.4.1.6.3 Operation of the Rack Handling System 1-22
1.4.1.7 User Interface 1-23
1.4.1.8 Device Control – Processor Architecture 1-23
1.4.1.9 Power Supplies 1-24
1.4.2 Physical Organization of the Device:
Mechanical, Electrical and Flow Architecture 1-25
1.4.2.1 Modular Architecture 1-25
1.4.2.2 List of Modules 1-25
1.4.2.3 Electrical Architecture 1-26
200:155 Service Manual iii

1.5 Safety Symbols 1-27
2 Specifications
2.1 Physical Specifications 2-1

2.1.1 Dimensions 2-1
2.1.2 Weight 2-1
2.2 Technical Specifications 2-1
2.2.1 General Specifications 2-1
2.2.2 Throughput 2-1
2.2.3 Buffer Bottle Volumes 2-1
2.2.4 Waste Bottle Volume 2-1
2.2.5 Sample Rack 2-2
2.2.6 Sample Preparation 2-2
2.2.7 Probe Movements 2-3
2.2.8 High-Pressure Pump/Proportioning Valve 2-4
2.2.9 Pressure Sensor 2-4
2.2.10 Injection Valve 2-4
2.2.11 Degasser Module 2-5
2.2.12 Cartridge Holder 2-5
2.2.13 Detector 2-5
2.2.14 Tubing and Material in Contact with the Liquid 2-6
2.2.15 Rack Door 2-6
2.2.16 Front Cover 2-7
2.2.17 Onboard PC 2-7
2.2.18 User Interface 2-7
2.2.19 Printer 2-7
2.2.20 Barcode Reader 2-7
2.2.21 Automation of the Microcontrollers 2-8
3 System Description
3.1. System Overview 3-1

3.2. Frame 3-2
3.3. Modules 3-2
3.3.1 Syringe Module 3-2
3.3.2 High-Pressure Module 3-6
3.3.3 High-Pressure Pump 3-10
3.3.4 Cartridge Holder 3-11
3.3.5 Detector Module 3-13
3.3.6 Sampling Arm Module 3-15
3.3.7 Electrical Module 3-20
3.3.8 Printer Module 3-27
3.3.9 Degasser Module 3-30
3.3.10 User Interface Module 3-33
3.3.11 Rack Management Module 3-36
iv Service Manual 200:155

3.3.12 Rack Door Module 3-40

3.3.13 Skin 3-43
3.4 Tubing List 3-45
3.5 Accessories 3-46
4 Installation Procedure
4.1 Installation Requirements 4-1

4.2 Installation 4-1
4.2.1 Unpacking and Inspection 4-1
4.2.2 Set Up 4-1
4.2.3 Barcode Labels 4-1
4.2.4 Performing Test Runs 4-1
4.3 De-installation 4-1
4.3.1 Decontamination 4-2
4.3.1.1 Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path 4-2
4.3.1.2 Clean the Dilution Well 4-2
4.3.1.3 Clean the Sample Probe 4-2
4.3.1.4 Clean the Internal Waste Bottle 4-2
4.3.1.5 Repeat Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path 4-2
4.3.2 Storage Fluid in the Instrument 4-2
4.3.3 Packing 4-2
4.3.3.1 Shutdown and Removal of the External Components 4-2
4.3.3.2 Accessories Packing 4-3
4.3.3.3 Waste Tank Packing 4-3
4.3.3.4 D-10 Packing 4-3
5 Software Overview
5.1 D-10 Application 5-1

5.2 User Software 5-1
5.3 *.INI Files 5-2
5.3.1 DIA.ini File 5-2
5.3.2 Instrument.ini File 5-2
5.3.2.1 High-Pressure Pump Parameters 5-2
5.3.2.1.1 Flow Rate Calibration Parameters 5-2
5.3.2.1.2 High-Pressure Sensor Calibration Parameters 5-3
5.3.2.1.3 High-Pressure Pump Parameters 5-3
5.3.2.2 Sampling Arm Parameters 5-3
5.3.2.3 Temperature Control Parameters 5-3
5.3.3 Profile.ini File 5-4
5.3.4 Profile2.ini File 5-4
5.4 Log Folder 5-4
5.5 Result Folder 5-4
5.6 Param Folder 5-5
5.7 Initialization Sequence 5-5
200:155 Service Manual v

5.8 Shutdown Sequence of the D-10 5-6

5.9 Service Software 5-7
5.9.1 Objective 5-7
5.9.2 Access 5-7
5.9.3 Exit 5-8
5.9.4 Parameters of the DIASER.EXE Tool 5-8
5.9.5 General Features in the Use of the Screens 5-8
5.9.6 Main Screens 5-11
5.9.7 “SYRINGE” Button 5-12
5.9.8 “DEGASSER” Button 5-18
5.9.9 “DETECTOR” Button 5-21
5.9.10 “RACK DOOR” Button 5-25
5.9.11 “RACK INTRODUCTION” Button 5-26
5.9.12 “FRONT COVER” Button 5-28
5.9.13 “ALL STATUS” Button 5-29
5.9.14 “LAUNCH INIT” Button 5-32
5.9.15 “SHUTDOWN” Button 5-32
5.9.16 “HP:PUMP+VALVE” Button 5-32
5.9.17 “HP:SENSOR CALIB” Button 5-46
5.9.18 “HP:FLOW CALIB.” Button 5-48
5.9.19 “THERMAL CONTROL” Button 5-54
5.9.20 “SAMPLE ARM” Button 5-60
5.9.20.1 “TH MOVE” 5-60
5.9.20.2 “Z MOVE” 5-64
5.9.20.3 “X MOVE” 5-67
5.9.20.4 “BARCODE” 5-70
5.9.20.5 “ALL STATUS” 5-70
5.9.20.6 “SAMPLE ARM STATUS” 5-70
5.9.20.7 “PROBE REPLACEMENT” 5-71
5.9.20.8 “DILUTION/WASH STATION ACCESS” 5-71
5.9.20.9 “SAMPLE ARM INITIALISATION” 5-72
5.9.20.10 “HALL SENSOR TEST” 5-72
5.9.20.11 “TUBE IDENTIFICATION” 5-73
5.9.21 “MISC” Button 5-75
5.9.21.1 “SETUP” Button 5-76
5.9.21.2 “COUNTERS” Button 5-76
5.9.22 “VERSIONS” Button 5-77
5.9.23 “ERRORS” Button 5-77
6 Replacement Procedures
6.1 List of Procedures 6-1

6.2 Front Cover Assembly 6-3
6.3 Thermal Printer 6-4
6.4 Buffer Bottles Support 6-4
6.5 Syringe Module 6-6
vi Service Manual 200:155

6.6 Electronic Module 6-8

6.7 Cartridge Module 6-12
6.8 Sample Probe 6-16
6.9 Dilution/Wash Station 6-16
6.10 Syringe 3 way Valve 6-18
6.11 1 mL Motorized Syringe 6-21
6.12 Thermal Fuse 6-23
6.13 Degasser Module 6-24
6.14 Vacuum Pump 6-28
6.15 Interface Board 6-30
6.16 Rack Door Module 6-32
6.17 Proportioning Valve 6-34
6.18 High-Pressure Pump 6-37
6.19 7 Port, 3 Position HP Valve + 23 µL Sample Loop 6-41
6.20 Pressure Sensor 6-45
6.21 Column Heater Coil 6-49
6.22 Z Position Sensor 6-53
6.23 CCFL Backlight 6-57
6.24 Power Supplies 1 & 2 6-58
6.25 Motherboard 6-61
6.26 LCD Interface Board 6-64
6.27 LCD Display 6-65
6.28 Waste Manifold 1 6-67
6.29 Waste Manifold 2 6-69
6.30 Hard Disk 6-71
6.31 Barcode Reader 6-74
6.32 Detector Module 6-80
6.33 Rack Door Module 6-82
6.34 Rack Input Sensor 6-84
6.35 Rack Output Sensor 6-90
6.36 User Interface Module 6-92
6.37 Arm 6-95
6.38 Rack Drive Module 6-106
6.39 HP Pump Head 6-111
6.40 HP Pump Piston 6-114
6.41 HP Pump Piston Seals 6-116
6.42 Tube Height Sensor 6-118
6.43 7-Port High-Pressure Valve Rotor Seal and Stator Face 6-127
6.44 Reference 6-130
7 Adjustments
7.1 List of Procedures 7-1

7.2 Detector Adjustment 7-1
7.2.1 Locations of the Adjustment Trimmers and Test Points 7-2
7.2.2 Procedure 7-3
200:155 Service Manual vii

7.3 WC/FC Verification 7-5

7.3.1 Preparation 7-6
7.3.2 Procedures 7-7
7.3.2.1 Static Absorption Measurement (18 minutes) 7-7
7.3.2.2 Dilamex Test (14 minutes) 7-8
7.3.2.3 Step Gradient Test 7-10
7.3.2.4 Continuous Gradient Test 7-12
7.3.2.5 Entering the WC and FC Values 7-13
7.4 WC/FC Measurements 7-14
7.4.2 Procedure 7-16
7.5 High-Pressure Sensor Verification 7-19
7.6 High-Pressure Sensor Calibration (Field Procedure) 7-20
7.6.3 Verification 7-22
7.7 Verification of the Pump Flow Rate 7-23
7.7.2 Volumetric Method 7-24
7.7.3 Gravimetric Method 7-26
7.8 High-Pressure Pump: Flow Rate Calibration 7-27
7.8.2 Volumetric Method Procedure 7-28
7.8.3 Gravimetric Method Procedure 7-31
7.9 Thermal Module Check 7-34
7.10 Thermal Module Calibration 7-35
7.10.2 Interface Board Gain and Offset Measurements 7-36
7.10.3 Sensor Offset Correction Measurement 7-38
7.10.4 Gradient Offset Measurement 7-39
7.10.5 Verification 7-40
7.11 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check 7-42
7.11.2 Results 7-43
7.12 Hall Effect Sensor Check 7-43
7.13 Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment 7-46
7.14 TH Offset Determination and Check 7-48
7.15 Tube Identification Check 7-50
7.16 Mobile Cartridge Support Adjustment 7-51
viii Service Manual 200:155

8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Error Messages 8-1

8.2 Troubleshooting Guide from Operations Manual 8-2
8.3 Diagnostics and Checks 8-7
8.4 Sensor Check 8-17
8.5 Other Diagnostics: Warning Messages 8-17
9 Maintenance
9.1 Materials 9-1

9.2 Maintenance Procedures 9-2
9.2.1 Safety 9-2
9.2.3 Dilution/Wash Station 9-3
9.2.4 Vertical Lead Screw Lubrication (TH and Z movements) 9-3
9.2.5 Flow Cell Cleaning 9-5
9.2.6 Inspection and Cleaning 9-7
9.2.6.1 HPLC Module 9-7
9.2.6.2 Cartridge Holder 9-7
9.2.6.3 Syringe Module 9-7
9.2.6.4 Wires 9-8
9.2.6.5 Barcode Reader 9-9
9.2.6.6 External Waste Tubing 9-9
9.2.6.7 Rear Panel Fan 9-9
9.2.6.8 Sample Rack Track 9-10
9.2.7 Liquid Waste Pump Cleaning and Inspection 9-10
9.2.8 Pinch Valve Tubing Replacement 9-11
9.2.9 7-port High-Pressure Valve Component Replacement 9-12
9.2.10 High-Pressure Pump 9-12
9.2.11 Firmware Verification 9-12
9.2.12 Replace the Sample Probe 9-13
9.3 Checks and Adjustment Procedures 9-13
9.3.1 Detector Flush and Internal Waste Check 9-13
9.3.2 High-Pressure Valve Check 9-13
9.3.3 Sample Rack Track Check 9-14
9.3.4 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check 9-14
9.3.5 Detector Adjustment 9-14
9.3.6 Temperature Adjustment 9-14
9.4 Post Maintenance 9-14
9.5 Performance Verification 9-14
9.6 D-10 Maintenance Report 9-14
10 Spare Parts 10-1
200:155 Service Manual ix

Appendix A: File Examples
DIA.ini A-1
Instrument.ini A-3
Profile.ini A-4
Profile2.ini A-6
Diaser.ini A-8
*.CSV (partial) from Service Software A-10
Appendix B: Diagrams
D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-1

D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in inject position) B-3
D-10: High-Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-5
General Fluidic Diagram B-7
D-10: Electrical Block Diagram, Sheet 1 B-9
Appendix C: Electronic Diagrams
Detector Board, Sheet 1 C-1

Detector Board: List of Components C-9
Sampling Arm Connection Board Z C-13
Sampling Arm Connection Board X C-15
High-Pressure Connection Board C-17
Syringe Connection Board C-19
Degasser Connection Board C-21
LCD Internal Board and LCD Interface Board C-23
Interface Board, Sheet 1 C-25
x Service Manual 200:155

List of Figures
Number Title Page
Section 1
Figure 1-1: Sample Elution in Cartridge 1-3
Figure 1-2: Cartridge Material 1-4
Figure 1-3: HbA1c Gradient 1-5
Figure 1-4: Dual Program Gradient 1-5
Figure 1-5: D-10 Detector Diagram 1-13
Figure 1-6: D-10 Detector Board Diagram 1-14
Figure 1-7: D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 1 (front view) 1-16
Figure 1-8: D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 2 (rear view) 1-17
Figure 1-9: D-10, Rack Door System (internal view) 1-21
Figure 1-10: D-10, Rack Insertion and Ejection System 1-22
Section 3
Figure 3-1: Exploded View of the Frame and All Modules 3-1
Figure 3-2: Frame, Drawing 1 3-2
Figure 3-3: Frame, Drawing 2 3-2
Figure 3-4: Syringe Module, Front 3-2
Figure 3-5: Syringe Module, Rear 3-2
Figure 3-6: Syringe Module, Location and Fastening 3-3
Figure 3-7: Syringe Module Board Electrical Connections 3-4
Figure 3-8: Syringe Module Fluidic Connections 3-5
Figure 3-9: High-Pressure Module 3-6
Figure 3-10: High-Pressure Module Location and Fastening 3-7
Figure 3-11: High-Pressure Module Board Electrical Connections 3-8
Figure 3-12: High-Pressure Module Fluidic Connections 3-9
Figure 3-13: High-Pressure Pump Fluidic Connections 3-10
Figure 3-14: High-Pressure Pump Electrical Parts 3-10
Figure 3-15: Cartridge Holder, front view 3-11
Figure 3-16: Cartridge Holder with Open Door 3-11
Figure 3-17: Cartridge Insert 3-12
Figure 3-18: Cartridge Module, rear view 3-12
Figure 3-19: Detector Module Fluidic Connections 3-13
Figure 3-20: Internal View 1 of Detector Module 3-13
Figure 3-21: Internal View 2 of Detector Module 3-13
Figure 3-22: Detector Board Connections, Adjustments and Test Points 3-14
Figure 3-23: Sampling Arm Module Drawings, front and rear 3-15
200:155 Service Manual xi

Figure 3-24: Sampling Arm Module Location and Fastening 3-16

Figure 3-25: Sampling Arm X Connection Board, Electrical Connections 3-17
Figure 3-26: Sampling Arm Z Connection Board, Electrical Connections 3-18
Figure 3-27: Sampling Arm Module Fluidic Connections 3-19
Figure 3-28: Electrical Module drawings; front face with and without
cover; rear face, inside 3-20
Figure 3-29: Electrical Module Location and Fastening 3-21
Figure 3-30: Electrical Module Connections 3-22
Figure 3-31: Interface Board Electrical Connections 3-23
Figure 3-32: PC Motherboard Electrical Connections 3-24
Figure 3-33: LCD/PC Mezzanine Board Electrical Connections 3-25
Figure 3-34: Interface Board: Test Point Locations 3-26
Figure 3-35: Printer Module Drawing 3-27
Figure 3-36: Printer Module Location and Fastening 3-28
Figure 3-37: Printer Module Electrical Connections, side 3-29
Figure 3-38: Printer Module Electrical Connections, rear 3-29
Figure 3-39: Degasser Module, front 3-30
Figure 3-40: Degasser Module, rear 3-30
Figure 3-41: Degasser Module Location and Fastening 3-31
Figure 3-42: Degasser Module Board Electrical Connections 3-31
Figure 3-43: Degasser Module Fluidic Connections 3-32
Figure 3-44: User Interface Module 3-33
Figure 3-45: User Interface Module Location and Fastening 3-34
Figure 3-46: User Interface Board Electrical Connections 3-35
Figure 3-47: Rack Management Module, front 3-36
Figure 3-48: Rack Management Module, rear 3-36
Figure 3-49: Rack Management Module Location and Fastening 3-37
Figure 3-50: X Connection Board Electrical Connections with the
Rack Management Module 3-38
Figure 3-51: Rack Management Module Fluidic Connections 3-39
Figure 3-52: Rack Door Module Inside 3-40
Figure 3-53: Rack Door Module Outside 3-40
Figure 3-54: Rack Door Module Location and Fastening 3-41
Figure 3-55: X Connection Board Electrical Connedtions with the
Rack Door Module 3-42
Figure 3-56: Drawing of the Skin, front cover, top cover and side doors 3-43
Figure 3-57: Drawing of the Skin, front cover 3-43
Figure 3-58: Skin Component Locations 3-43
Figure 3-59: Drawing of the Skin Parts on the Frame, with Open Front
Door 3-44
Figure 3-60: Front Cover Electrical Connections 3-44
Figure 3-61: Front Cover Interlock Connectors 3-44
xii Service Manual 200:155

Section 5
Figure 5-1: Numeric Keyboard 5-9

Figure 5-2: Alphanumeric Keyboard 5-9
Figure 5-3: Export 5-10
Figure 5-4: Import 5-10
Figure 5-5A: File Selection, Save 5-10
Figure 5-5B: File Selection, Open 5-10
Figure 5-6: Password Screen 5-11
Figure 5-7: Main Screen 1 5-11
Figure 5-8: Main Screen 2 5-11
Figure 5-9: D-10 Syringe module (1/6) 5-12
Figure 5-12: D-10 Syringe module (3A/6) 5-15
Figure 5-16: D-10 Degasser module (1/4) 5-18
Figure 5-20: D-10 Detector module (1/4) 5-21
Figure 5-24: D-10 Rack door module (1/2) 5-25
Figure 5-25: D-10 Rack door module (2/2) 5-26
Figure 5-26: D-10 Rack introduction module (1/1) 5-27
Figure 5-27: D-10 Front cover module (1/2) 5-28
Figure 5-28: D-10 Front cover module (2/2) 5-28
Figure 5-29: D-10 All status (1/2) 5-29
Figure 5-30: D-10 All status (2/2) 5-31
Figure 5-31: D-10 HP module: pump, valve (1/16) 5-33
200:155 Service Manual xiii


Figure 5-47: D-10 HP module: sensor calibration (1/2) 5-46
Figure 5-48: D-10 HP module: sensor calibration (2/2) 5-47
Figure 5-49: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (1/4) 5-48
Figure 5-50A: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (2/4) 5-49
Figure 5-50B: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (2/4) 5-50
Figure 5-51: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (3/4) 5-51
Figure 5-52A: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (4/4) 5-52
Figure 5-52B: D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (4/4) 5-53
Figure 5-53: D-10 Thermal module control (1/7) 5-54
Figure 5-60: D-10 Sample arm module 5-60
Figure 5-61: D-10 Sample arm module: TH (1/4) 5-61
Figure 5-65: D-10 Sample arm module: Z (1/4) 5-64
Figure 5-69: D-10 Sample arm module: X (1/4) 5-67
Figure 5-73: D-10 Sample arm module: status (1/2) 5-70
Figure 5-74: D-10 Sample arm module: status (2/2) 5-71
Figure 5-75: D-10 Sample arm module: Hall effect (1/1) 5-72
Figure 5-76: D-10 Sample arm module: Tube ident. (1/3) 5-73
Figure 5-79: D-10 Miscellaneous (1/1) 5-75
Figure 5-80: D-10 Setup 5-76
Figure 5-81: D-10 Counters (1/1) 5-76
Figure 5-82: D-10 Service software versions (1/1) 5-77
Figure 5-83: D-10 Last Errors (1/1) 5-77
xiv Service Manual 200:155

Section 7
Figure 7-1: Detector Board: trimmer and test point locations 7-2
Figure 7-2: Installation for WC/FC determination, drawing 1 7-15
Figure 7-3: Installation for WC/FC determination, drawing 2 7-16
Figure 7-4: High-Pressure Module Board with the CN4 Connection 7-37
Section 9
Figure 9-1: Z macro movement Parameters 9-4

Figure 9-2: Z elementary movement Parameters 9-4
Figure 9-3: Flex Cables on Z movement PCB 9-8
Figure 9-4: Flex Cables on X module 9-9
Figure 9-5: Liquid Waste Pump 9-10
Figure 9-6: Liquid Waste Pump Components 9-11
Figure 9-7 Pinch Valve Tubing Connections 9-12
200:155 Service Manual xv

xvi Service Manual 200:155

About this manual:

This manual is intended for service engineers and other appropriately trained
personnel. The following topics are included:
• Principles of Operation
• Technical Specifications
• Installation and De-installation
• Service Software
• Maintenance Procedures
• Parts Replacement Procedures
• Troubleshooting Guide
Also included are electrical and mechanical drawings along with the spare parts list.
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 General Description
The Bio-Rad D-10™ Hemoglobin Testing System is a fully automated mid-volume
analyzer that can accommodate 1-10 samples per run. It consists of a single module
that provides an integrated method for sample preparation along with separation and
determination of relative percent of specific hemoglobins in whole blood.
In addition to the determination of relative percent of specific hemoglobins, the system

also serves as an aid in the diagnosis of hemoglobinopathies. Using computer-
assisted comparison of the characteristic retention times of known hemoglobin
calibrators, unknown hemoglobins present in the sample can be identified. The
system must be used only with Bio-Rad reagent kits designed for the D-10
Hemoglobin Testing System.
The D-10 Hemoglobin Testing System utilizes the principles of high-performance liquid
chromatography (HPLC). Whole blood samples undergo an automatic two-step dilution
process and are then introduced to the analytical (high-pressure) flow path. Pre-diluted
samples are automatically detected, based upon use of a sample vial adapter in the
sample rack, and the dilution step is omitted. Between sample injections, the sample
probe is rinsed with wash solution to minimize sample carryover.
A single, dual-piston, low-pulsation, HPLC pump with a proportioning valve delivers the
buffer solution to the analytical cartridge and detector. A programmed buffer gradient
of increasing ionic strength delivers the sample to the analytical cartridge, where the
hemoglobins are separated, based upon their ionic interactions with the cartridge
material.
200:155 Service Manual 1-1

The separated hemoglobins then pass through the filter photometer flow cell where
changes in the absorbance are measured at 415 nm.
1.2 High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC)
1.2.1 Definition
Chemical separation can be accomplished using HPLC. This method uses the fact
that certain compounds have different migration rates, based on the stationary and
mobile phase in use. The extent or degree of separation is mainly determined by the
choice of stationary phase and mobile phase.
The stationary phase refers to the solid support contained within the cartridge over
which the mobile phase continuously flows.
The mobile phase refers to the buffer that is continuously applied to the cartridge,
acting as a carrier for the sample solution.
1.2.2 General Principle
As the sample solution flows, with the mobile phase, through the cartridge, the
components of the solution will migrate according to the non-covalent interactions of
the compounds with the stationary phase. The chemical interactions of the stationary
phase, and the sample, with the mobile phase, determine the degree of migration
and separation of the components contained in the sample. For example, samples,
which have stronger interactions with the stationary phase than with the mobile
phase, will elute from the cartridge less quickly, and have a longer retention time.
Samples having weaker interactions with the stationary phase will have a shorter
retention time.
1.3 HPLC Applied to the D-10

In the D-10, the separation of specific hemoglobins in whole blood is based on the
principles of ion-exchange HPLC.
1.3.1 General Principle
Ion-exchange HPLC operates on the basis of selective exchange of ions in the

sample with counter-ions in the stationary phase. It is performed with cartridges
containing charge-bearing functional groups attached to a polymer matrix. The
functional ions are permanently bonded to the cartridge and each has a counter-ion
attached. The sample is retained in the cartridge by the replacement of the counter-
ions of the stationary phase with the ions from the sample. The sample is eluted from
1-2 Service Manual 200:155

the cartridge by changing the properties of the mobile phase (gradient), so that the
mobile phase displaces the sample ions from the stationary phase. (Figure 1-1)
ION-EXCHANGE CHROMATOGRAPHY
Stationary Phase:
Resin With Negative
Charges
Mobile Phase
Hemoglobin
Figure 1-1: Sample Elution in Cartridge
In a gradient elution, different compounds are eluted by the increasing strength of the
salt solution. The sample is injected while a weaker mobile phase is being applied to
the system. The strength of the mobile phase is later increased, in increments, by
raising the salt content, which results in the elution of retained components.
1.3.2 Stationary Phase: The Cartridge
The separation cartridge is a straight, calibrated tube made of stainless steel. It has a
length of 30 mm and an internal diameter of 4 mm. The stationary phase is
maintained between two porous discs located at each end. The dead volumes are
minimal.
The cartridge is inserted into a cartridge holder, which has two Peltier elements
attached to it. This allows thermal regulation of both the cartridge and the mobile
phase.
The molecules of the stationary phase are methacrylate polymers which completely
fill the cartridge. They are nonporous spherical particles with diameters ranging
between 4 and 6 µm. (Figure 1-2)

Figure 1-2: Cartridge Material
1.3.3 Mobile Phase: The Buffers
The two buffers used in the D-10 consist of a combination of phosphoric acid
(H3PO4) and two other chemical compounds (NaH2PO4 and Na2HPO4).
The buffers have the following approximate pH:
Buffer 1 = 6.05
Buffer 2 = 6.70
1.3.4 Separation
The gradient between the two buffers is optimized to modify the pH of the mobile
phase. This modification of the pH, and the differences between the ionization
potential of the different hemoglobins, results in the desired separation.
1.3.5 Bio-Rad D-10 Hemoglobin A1c
The HbA1c test is used to separate and quantitate the A0 and A1c hemoglobins.
Analysis time is 3 minutes. Figure 1-3 shows the elution gradient for HbA1c.

Elution gradient: HbA1c
100
90
80
70
% buffer 2
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
time (s)
Figure 1-3: HbA1c Gradient
1.3.6 Bio-Rad D-10 Dual Program
In addition to the A0 and A1c hemoglobins, this kit allows the separation and
quantification of hemoglobins A2, F, S, D and C. Analysis time is 6 minutes. Figure
1-4 shows the elution gradient for the Dual Program.
Elution gradient: Dual
100
90
80
70
% buffer 2
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
time (s)
Figure 1-4: Dual Program Gradient

1.4 Operating Principles
1.4.1 Theory of Operation
1.4.1.1 Overview
From a functional viewpoint, the D-10 system is made up of two sub-systems. One
is responsible for sample preparation, while the other performs high-pressure liquid
chromatography. The two systems – sample preparation and chromatography –
have the sample loop in common.
There are two types of samples that can be processed on the D-10:
• whole blood tubes

• prediluted samples in sample vials
Whole blood tubes are placed directly into the sample rack. Prediluted samples
are first placed into a specific rack adapter before being placed into the sample
rack. The rack has 10 sample positions. Once introduced into the system, the
samples are automatically processed.
Sample preparation, and associated operations, use a sampling probe mounted on

a sample arm. The sample arm moves horizontally and vertically to position the
probe over the sample. Auxiliary functions of the sample arm include controlling
the rack insertion door, insertion and ejection of the rack containing the sample
tubes, and tube identification.
The system is controlled by an integrated personal computer, which is the interface

with the user (data entry and result output). It performs the calculations associated
with the measurements made by the chromatography section, and is the interface
with the other processors dedicated to the control of internal automation.
The entire system is organized into integrated modules that are built into a frame
with an external skin. The back of the system contains external ports for
connection to the reagent bottles. The front of the device includes a door that is
normally locked. This door, along with a door on the right side, provides access
for maintenance operations. The bottom door, at the front of the system, allows
access to the high-pressure chromatography components.
1.4.1.2 Sample Preparation
1.4.1.2.1 Functions
Sample preparation includes the following functions:
• sample aspiration

• sample dilution
• sample insertion into the sample loop
• washing of the sample pathway and evacuation of this waste to the
internal, and then external, waste
All the components that are used to perform these functions are represented in
the "D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position)" diagram
located in Appendix B.
Note: the diagram does not represent the movements made by the probe.
1.4.1.2.2 Description of the Sample Fluid Pathway
Refer to the "D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position)"
diagram located in Appendix B.
The main sampling circuit consists of a motorized syringe, a three-way valve, a

sample loop and a sampling probe. The outlet of the three-way valve is
connected to the syringe. The NC inlet is connected via the degassing circuit
(described in Section 1.4.1.3) to the wash/diluent bottle. The NO inlet is
connected to the sampling probe through the sample loop of the seven-port,
three-position, high-pressure valve when it is in the Load position (normal position
of the valve). The entire circuit is filled with wash solution.
The dilution/wash station is where whole blood samples are diluted and the
sample probe is washed.
The station consists of a well used for the two-step dilution of samples and a well
for washing the probe between samples.
The last subassembly of the sample preparation system consists of components

required for evacuation of waste from the system to the external waste bottle.
The components are:
• two pinch valves, one associated with the dilution well, the other
associated with the probe wash well. In the idle position both valves are
open.
• an internal waste bottle for temporary storage of liquid from the
dilution/wash station
• a liquid pump, associated with a check valve for evacuation of the internal
waste bottle
• a waste manifold #1 for connecting the two pinch valves to the internal
waste bottle.
• a waste manifold #2 placed just before the outlet and responsible for
collecting all waste from the system and directing it to the external waste
bottle
• a vacuum sensor connected to the internal waste bottle.

1.4.1.2.3 Operation of the Sampling Components
Refer to the "D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position)"
diagram located in Appendix B.
The syringe assembly consists of a calibrated syringe with the plunger connected
to the flange nut for the stepper motor lead screw. A slotted optical sensor is
used to signal that the syringe is in the position where the filling volume is zero
(home position). When the probe is placed into a sample tube, the sample is
aspirated by the syringe through the sample loop of the seven-port, three-position
valve. The sample is then diluted in the dilution well. The outlet of the well is
closed by means of the pinch valve associated with the well.
The two-step dilution is done in several stages. Refer to Section 2.2.6 for sample
and diluent volumes. After the first dilution, a portion of the dilution is aspirated
out of the well by the probe. The dilution well is drained by suctioning the liquid,
using the liquid pump, while the pinch valve associated with the dilution well is
open. The other pinch valve is closed during this time. The pinch valve closes
and the sample is diluted once again in the well. The diluted sample is aspirated,
using the syringe, into the probe and then through the sample loop.
The sample is now ready to be transferred to the high-pressure circuit. This is

achieved by turning the high-pressure valve to the Inject position. Refer to the "D-
10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in inject position)" diagram located in
Appendix B. As soon as the sample (pushed by the flow of liquid in the high-
pressure circuit) leaves the sample loop, the valve goes back to the normal Load
position.
The last step in sample processing consists of washing the sample probe, in
order to avoid carryover, before moving on to the next sample. The washing
sequence is as follows:
1. The dilution well is emptied, by suctioning from the liquid pump, through
the pinch valve associated with the dilution well.
2. The dilution well is flushed by dispensing wash solution into the well and
then draining it off.
3. The inside and outside of the probe are washed in the probe wash well by
dispensing the wash solution and then suctioning it off (using the liquid
pump) through the pinch valve associated with the probe wash well.
Note: During evacuation of liquid, one pinch valve is open at a time; the
other remains closed.

The sample preparation system is ready to process the next sample.
Note for Prediluted Samples: Sample vials are used for prediluted samples. In
this case, the sample is aspirated directly from the sample vial to fill the sample
loop. Only the probe is washed. Sample vials are identified based on height and
the presence of a magnet on the adapter.
1.4.1.3 Sample Analysis
1.4.1.3.1 Functions
Sample Analysis includes the following functions:
• circulation of reagents in the high-pressure circuit

• degassing of reagents
• formation of predetermined gradients of reagents specific to the separation
technique
• injection of the sample in the high-pressure circuit
• setting up the chromatography cartridge on the high-pressure circuit,
including warming up the cartridge and the reagents
• measurement by absorption at 415 nm of the hemoglobins present in the
sample
• removal of the liquid to the external waste bottle
All the components used for these functions are represented on the "D-10: High
Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position)” diagram located in Appendix B.
1.4.1.3.2 Description of the Sample Analysis Components
Refer to the "D-10: High Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position)” diagram
The main flow circuit of the high-pressure section consists of a degasser, a

proportioning valve, a high-pressure pump, a pressure sensor, the seven-port
three-position motorized high-pressure valve, an analytical cartridge, a detector
and a backpressure tubing.
The degasser is a sealed chamber through which three flow circuits pass:
• circuit associated with reagent 1

• circuit associated with reagent 2
• circuit associated with the wash solution
At the end of each circuit is an optical sensor, designed to detect bubbles at the
output of the circuit.

A vacuum is created in the chamber by means of a vacuum pump and is

monitored by a vacuum sensor.
The proportioning valve is a three-way valve with the inlets connected to reagents
1 and 2 and the outlet connected to the inlet of the high-pressure pump. The
normally open inlet is connected to reagent 1.
The high-pressure pump has pistons that are driven by a camshaft/reducer set in
motion by a DC motor. This pump is also used in the Bio-Rad DuoFlow system.
An optical encoder is fitted on the motor shaft and is used to regulate the speed.
An optical sensor and a slotted disk interrupter provide a rotation reference at the
shaft output (cam sensor). The flow section of the pump includes the following:
• an inlet connector divided in two, one to each piston. A check valve is fitted
on each piston inlet.
• an outlet connector that joins the outlets of each piston. A check valve is
fitted on each piston outlet as well.
• an inlet and outlet connector for filling the piston wetting circuit
A high-pressure sensor is fitted, in series, at the pump outlet.
The high-pressure circuit goes through the motorized seven-port, three-position

high-pressure valve. The Inject position is used to place the sample loop into the
high-pressure circuit. The valve is motorized by a stepper motor, associated with
optical sensors, which ensure that the valve is positioned correctly.
The next component of the high-pressure circuit is the analytical cartridge, which
is at the core of hemoglobin separation. A coil of stainless steel tubing provides
the connection to the cartridge. The cartridge and tubing coil are fitted in a
cartridge holder heated to 35°C by Peltier effect modules. The temperature is
measured by a Pt100 ohms temperature sensor. A thermal fuse keeps the
system protected against overheating.
The cartridge outlet circuit goes through the detector. The circuit includes:
• a high-pressure flow cell

• a light source consisting of a high-luminosity LED emitting in the blue
range
• a focusing lens
• photoelectric sensors for measuring the incident light, along with the light
absorbed through an interference filter centered on 415 nm
• a printed circuit board for processing the signals from the detector
At the detector outlet, the liquid flows to the external waste bottle through a back-
pressure coil.
1 - 10 Service Manual 200:155

1.4.1.3.3 Operation of the Sample Analysis Components
Refer to the "D-10: High Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position)" diagram
Reagent Flow and Mixing
The high-pressure pump is not self-priming, so it is necessary to ensure that

liquid flows by gravity to the pump and that there is sufficient hydraulic pressure.
This is achieved by placing bottles at a height above the pump.
The vacuum created in the degasser extracts a portion of the dissolved gas in the
reagents as they pass through.
The proportioning valve selects the flow of reagent 1 (normally open position) or
reagent 2 when the valve is active. The valve is synchronized with the high-
pressure pump. As the pump piston pulls back to allow reagent to fill the pump
head, the valve proportions reagents 1 and 2 for optimal hemoglobin separation.
The synchronization is achieved using signals supplied by the cam sensor and
the motor encoder. These signals are associated with two pump parameters:
• delay between the cam signal and the start of the suction phase, called
"Waiting count" (WC, parameter ECAMFILLSHIFT1)
• duration of the suction phase, called Filling count (FC, parameter
EFILLDURATION)
The high-pressure pump ensures that liquid flows through the cartridge-detector
chromatography circuit. Data, supplied by the motor encoder, the cam signal and
the signal sent by the high-pressure sensor, drives the pump to achieve a
constant flow. The front of the high-pressure pump has an inlet purge valve in
parallel with the pump inlet. The port connection has two functions:
• manually primes the inlet circuits, either for reagent 1 (proportioning valve
not active) or for reagent 2 (proportioning valve active)
• manually primes the pump by injecting liquid through the pump pistons to
remove any air bubbles that may be present in the pump
The pressure sensor is a strain gauge sensor, which is used to monitor the
pressure in the circuit. Pump flow is raised slightly based on the pressure signal
from the sensor.
200:155 Service Manual 1 - 11

Operation of the High-Pressure Valve
The main function of the seven-port, three-position, motorized, high-pressure

valve is to transfer the prepared sample, that has been fed into the sample loop to
the high-pressure circuit. This is achieved by switching the high-pressure valve
from the Load position (normal position) to the Inject position. In the load position,
diluted sample is pulled through the 23 µL sample loop by the 1mL syringe while
buffer flows through the other ports. In the Inject position, the flow path changes
so reagents flow through the sample loop, pushing the sample into the high-
pressure circuit. The valve then returns to the Load position and waits for the
next sample to be loaded. The valve also has two secondary functions:
• automatically fills the high-pressure pump piston flush circuit in two stages:
− fills the motorized syringe with wash solution
− in the Inject position, the syringe volume is delivered through the piston
flush circuit
• automatically fills the circuits of reagents 1 and 2 before the high-pressure

valve (degasser, proportioning valve, pump) in two stages:
− in the priming position, the syringe aspirates reagent 1 if the
proportioning valve is idle or reagent 2 if the proportioning valve is
active
− in the Inject position, the volume aspirated by the syringe is delivered to
the external waste bottle through the piston flush circuit
Operation of the Cartridge Holder Module
The cartridge holder is an aluminum unit that is heated to 35°C with two Peltier
effect modules fitted in series. A thermal fuse, also in series with the Peltier effect
modules, is used to open the Peltier effect module power circuit if there is any
overheating. A PT100 ohm temperature sensor, sunk into the aluminum unit
between the stainless steel tubing coil and the cartridge, measures the
temperature. The length of the coil is sufficient to raise the temperature of the
reagents close to the cartridge temperature.
The cartridge holder has a front door to access the high-pressure circuit and
easily remove or install the cartridge. An arrow on the cartridge support indicates
how the cartridge is to be installed. Arrows on both the support and the cartridge
face the direction of flow. The cartridge support fits securely in the cartridge
holder when the door is closed and maintains the fluid pathway. The outlet of the
cartridge holder is connected directly to the inlet of the detector flow cell.

Operation of the Detector
Refer to D-10 Detector Diagram, Figure 1-5.
Flow inlet Flow outlet
Blue High Brightness Silicon photodiode

LED source
415 nm interference filter
Silicon photodiode
Plano-convex lens
Figure 1-5: D-10 Detector Diagram
The optical bench, containing the detector and the flow cell, has a light-tight cover
to avoid interference from external light. The flow cell has two integrated PEEK
tubes directly connected to the fluid pathway for the liquid inlet (blue tube) and
outlet (orange tube). The inlet tube is connected to the cartridge holder and
enters the smaller side of the conical shaped flow cell. The outlet tube, from the
larger side of the conical flow cell, is connected to the external waste via a
backpressure coil. This coil maintains the backpressure in the flow cell to
suppress bubble formation.
The light source is a high-luminosity LED emitting in the blue range. The incident
light falls on the flow cell from the smaller side. This optical inlet side of the cell
has a plano-convex lens as the only geometrical optical component. It is
positioned in the axis of the flow cell.
On the side of the flow cell optical outlet, there is a 415 nm interference filter and
a silicon photodiode for measuring the absorption. The reference measurement
is taken by a silicon photodiode placed close to the optical axis between the
source and the flow cell.
The sensors and the light source are connected to a printed circuit board placed
outside the optical bench. A removable metal cover protects the detector PCB.

Operation of the Detector Board
For further details on the detector board, refer to diagram D-10 Detector Board
Diagram, Figure 1-6.
V out:
V in supply DC/DC converter Analog digital
supply potentiometer
LED source
analog power supply
LED source control
gain
Load adjustment
Resistance
Silicon
photodetector Data out
Sigma/delta 20 bits A/D
converter
Sample
sensor
offset
adjustment
to interface
3rd stage:A/D voltage reference
1st stage: I to V converter 2nd stage:amplifier board
conversion source
gain
Load adjustment
Resistance
Silicon
photodetector Sigma/delta 20 bits A/D Data out
converter
Reference
sensor digital
potentiometer offset
adjustment
Figure 1-6: D-10 Detector Board Diagram
The signal sent by each photoelectric sensor is processed in a similar fashion –

current/voltage conversion, amplification and analog/digital conversion. The
digital signal obtained on each sensor is transmitted to the processor of the
integrated PC that calculates the absorption measurement using the following
formula:
absorption = log10 (reference measurement/sample measurement)
The reference amplification circuit includes a digital potentiometer that enables

the software to adjust the value of the chromatogram baseline by measuring the
absorption before the start of the test (baseline adjustment).
The light source is also controlled by a digital potentiometer, which makes it

possible to adjust the level of incident light if there is any drift of the source.

The supply voltage and the reference voltage required for the converters are
produced on the detector board.
1.4.1.4 General Fluidic Diagram
Refer to the “General Fluidic Diagram” located in Appendix B.
1.4.1.5 Sample Arm
1.4.1.5.1 Functions
The sample arm is a functional module represented in the "D-10, Sample Arm
Module, Drawing 1 (front view)" (Figure 1-7) and in the "D-10, Sample Arm
Module, drawing 2 (rear view)" (Figure 1-8). The arm supports the sampling
probe, tube holder, barcode reader and magnetic sensor. The functions of the
sample arm are:
• lateral left/right movement (X-axis movement)

− positions the probe above each tube to be sampled when a rack is
present
− positions the probe above the dilution well
− positions the probe above the probe wash well
• vertical up/down movement (Z-axis movement)
− positions the probe in each tube to be sampled at the height defined for
the sample type detected
− positions the probe in the high (home) position to allow X-axis
movements
• vertical up/down movement of the tube holder system (TH-axis movement)
− measures the height of the tube to be sampled
− holds the tube when the probe is removed from the tube
− positions the tube holder system to enable X-axis movements
The barcode reader reads any barcode present on the samples once the rack is
introduced to the system.
The magnetic sensor detects the magnets present on any sample vial adapters in
the rack and indicates to the system that the sample is prediluted.

TH home sensor Z home

sensor
(not visible)
Tube height sensor
Sampling
Mobile subassembly probe
Fixed component
Rails
Z and TH
movement
TH lead screw Tube

holder
X movement
Z lead screw
Hall effect (magnetic) sensor Barcode reader
Figure 1-7: D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 1 (front view)

Z pulley TH pulley and belt X stepper motor

and belt
TH stepper
motor Slotted
Z stepper disk
motor
X axis sensor
Z axis Slotted
sensor disks
TH axis
sensor
device for
driving the X home sensor
X pulley sampling arm
(1 of2) X belt
Figure 1-8: D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 2 (rear view)
1.4.1.5.2 Components
Refer to figures "D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 1 (front view)" (Figure 1-7)
and "D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 2 (rear view)" (Figure 1-8). The sample
arm assembly contains a fixed component that is mounted on the frame. The
fixed component holds all of the parts needed for X-axis movements and a mobile
subassembly, which travels along the X-axis and includes all the components for
movement along axes Z and TH.
The mobile subassembly is moved along the X-axis by a stepper motor with a
pulley and toothed belt. A device for driving the sampling arm is fitted on the belt.
Two aluminum rails, containing metal glides with a plastic surface finish, are used
to guide the mobile subassembly along the X-axis. A slotted optical sensor
associated with a slotted disk fitted on the motor shaft (X-axis sensor) monitors

motor rotation. Another slotted optical sensor with a sliding flag is used to locate
the initialization position of the X-axis movement (X-axis initialization or home
sensor). The mobile subassembly contains components for both probe and tube
holder movement along the Z-axis.
The components responsible for probe movement are:
• a stepper motor with a pulley and toothed belt system for Z-axis movement
of the probe
• a slotted optical sensor associated with a slotted disk fitted on the motor
shaft (Z-axis sensor) to monitor motor rotation
• another slotted optical sensor, with a sliding flag attached to the sampling
arm, used to locate the initialization position of the Z-axis movement (Z
initialization or home sensor)
• a lead screw fixed to the drive pulley
• a flange nut that moves up and down the lead screw as it turns
• a sampling arm that is attached to a mounting block. The mounting block
is attached to the flange nut. The sample tubing is attached to the
sampling arm.
The components responsible for tube holder movement are:
• a stepper motor with a pulley and toothed belt system

• a slotted optical sensor associated with a slotted disk mounted on the
motor shaft (TH-axis sensor) to monitor motor rotation
• another slotted optical sensor, with a sliding flag attached to the tube
holder arm, used to locate the initialization position for the TH-axis
movement (TH-axis initialization sensor)
• a third slotted optical sensor used to measure the height of the sample
tube (TH tube height sensor). The system for tube height measurement is
tapered in design
• a lead screw fixed to the drive pulley
• a flange nut that moves up and down the lead screw as it turns
• a tube holder that is attached to a mounting block. The mounting block is
attached to the flange nut.
Two additional components are also located on the mobile subassembly:
• a Hall effect sensor designed to detect the presence of the magnet on a

sample vial adapter
• a barcode reader for sample identification

1.4.1.5.3 Operation of the Sample Arm Components
Refer to figures "D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 1 (front view)" (Figure 1-7)
and "D-10, Sample Arm Module, Drawing 2 (rear view)" (Figure 1-8).
Each X-axis probe position (dilution well, probe wash well, tube sample position)
corresponds to a motor position where the slot in the slotted disk is placed in front
of the sensor. The initialization position for the X-axis is the probe position above
the dilution well.
Counting the optical signals from the X-axis sensor controls the arm movements.
Frequent returns to the home position are placed in between the arm movements
for safety. If the arm is already initialized during the initialization movement, a
short movement is made to change the status of the X-axis movement sensors
and check if they are operating correctly.
For Z-axis movements, both the motor steps and the signals from the Z-axis
sensor are counted. For a given tube height, the sample position on the Z-axis is
determined and the movement takes place by counting steps and slots. The Z-
axis initialization position is reached when the slots of the slotted disk are
positioned in front of the Z-axis sensor and when the Z-axis initialization sensor is
covered. If the arm is already initialized during the initialization movement, a
short movement is made to change the status of the Z-axis movement sensors
and check if they are operating correctly.
For TH-axis movements, both the motor steps and the signals from the TH-axis
sensor are counted. When a tube stops the TH during downward movement, a
flag is engaged in the slot of the TH tube height sensor making it possible to stop
the motor. The number of steps completed by the motor is used to determine the
height of the tube. Using this method for measuring tube height determines if the
sample is a primary or prediluted tube. The probe depth is adjusted based on the
type of tube detected.
If a sample vial is detected using the tube height measurement, its presence is
confirmed using the Hall effect sensor. If the Hall effect sensor detects the
presence of a magnet, and confirms that the sample is a sample vial, then the
sample is processed. If confirmation does not occur, the tube is ignored.
The TH-axis initialization position is reached when the slots of the slotted disk are
positioned in front of the TH-axis sensor and when the TH-axis initialization
sensor is covered. If the arm is already initialized during TH-axis initialization, a
short movement is made to change the status of the TH-axis movement sensors
and check if they are operating correctly. The movements along the Z and TH
axes are simultaneous when possible.

The barcode reader is used to identify each sample. The identification process
occurs in two stages:
• the sample arm moves over the entire length of the rack once it is
introduced and the tube barcodes are scanned. The sample identifications
are then placed into the software to build the worklist.
• prior to sampling from the tube, the barcode for the sample is re-read, with
the exception of any sample identification manually entered by the user
into the worklist. If the information from the second read does not match
the first read, the tube is ignored.
1.4.1.6 Rack Handling Functions
1.4.1.6.1 Functions
The rack is handled semi-automatically for ease of introduction into the system.
This rack handling includes:
• rack door opening and closing

• rack insertion and ejection
1.4.1.6.2 Description of the Rack Handling Components
Rack Door System
Refer to diagram " D-10, Rack Door System (internal view)" (Figure 1-9). The
rack door system includes:
• a post attached to the sample arm subassembly for closing the rack
insertion door
• a locking solenoid
• an open door sensor
• a closed door sensor

Locking
Solenoid
Closed door
sensor
Open door sensor
Rack door
Rack door axis
Figure 1-9: D-10, Rack Door System (internal view)
Rack Insertion and Ejection System
Refer to diagram " D-10, Rack Insertion and Ejection System" (Figure 1-10).
The rack insertion and ejection system includes a bi-directional geared motor with
a rubber drive roller, the rack insertion sensor ("rack input sensor") and the rack
removal sensor ("rack output sensor").

Rack insertion sensor

("rack input sensor")
Rack removal sensor Rack bi-directional

("rack output sensor") (not visible) geared motor
Figure 1-10: D-10, Rack Insertion and Ejection System
1.4.1.6.3 Operation of the Rack Handling System
The rack door is open only when the system is in Standby state. The door opens
as a result of the action of two return springs. The door closes when the post on
the sample arm subassembly contacts the plate on the door latch mechanism.
The springs of the mechanism are compressed by this contact. The door swings
closed by means of a connecting rod. The locking solenoid is energized in order
to enable the door to swing freely. At the end of the movement, the solenoid is
released, locking the door in the closed position. The door closed opto-sensor is
then uncovered, indicating that the door is in the closed position.
The control of the locking solenoid and the action of the return springs opens the
door. The post on the sample arm subassembly is in contact with the plate on the
door latch mechanism during this time, to ensure smooth movement of the door.
The solenoid is released at the end of the process. The door open opto-sensor is
then uncovered, indicating that the door is open. Once open, a rack can be
inserted into the system. The user starts to introduce the rack manually. When
the rack goes past the reflective sensor that detects rack insertion, the rack
driving motor is started up in the rack insertion direction. A small additional
insertion movement by the user makes the motor carry the rack forward. After a
set time, the motor stops and the rack is in its final position. During the insertion
movement, the rack goes past the second sensor (the rack removal sensor). This
reflective sensor is activated during the rack insertion phase. Once the motor

stops, the rack is past the rack removal sensor. This is used to ensure that the
rack is in the right position.
Rack removal is only done when requested by the user. The motor starts up in
the rack removal direction. The rack moves past the removal sensor. Once the
rack passes the sensor, the motor stops. The rack insertion sensor detects when
the user completely removes the rack from the system.
1.4.1.7 User Interface
The user interface is a monochrome ¼ VGA LCD graphic display of the

transflective type. The back lighting uses cold cathode fluorescent lamps.
The touch screen panel allows the user to make selections and enter information.
The results are printed using a thermal printer on 112-mm wide paper. Printouts
include the chromatogram, the list of hemoglobin peaks, retention times, result
calculations and identification.
1.4.1.8 Device Control – Processor Architecture
Four processors manage the above components:
• PC type integrated processor

• 16-bit Motor Controller (MC) Processor
• 16-bit High Pressure Pump Controller (HPPC) Processor
• 12-bit Thermal Controller (TC) Processor
The integrated PC consists of a PC motherboard, a hard drive, a floppy disk drive,

a ¼ VGA touch screen/pad and a thermal printer. The installed operating system is
Windows NTe.
The motherboard is interfaced with the ¼ VGA touch screen through a piggyback
board on the PC board and a LCD and touch panel interface board located close to
the LCD display. The screen is connected to the LCD port of the board. An
RS232C serial port interfaces the touch panel. The motherboard is also interfaced
with the thermal printer through an RS232C serial port. All common terminals can
be connected to the PC board due to the presence of the following ports:
• keyboard port
• mouse port
• Ethernet port
• Serial RS232 port
• VGA port
Lastly, the PC board communicates with the MC processor via a serial RS422 link.

MC, HPPC and TC processors are installed on the interface board. The MC
processor is the master controller and is the processor responsible for automatic
device operations based on the commands from the PC board. These include:
• X, Z and TH axis motors and sensors

• motorized syringe
• high-pressure valve
• rack door
• rack introduction and ejection
• barcode reading
• detector reading and driving
• waste circuit (pinch valves, pump, vacuum sensor)
• degasser driving (vacuum pump, vacuum sensor, bubble detectors)
• front cover (solenoid and sensor)
• interface with HPPC and TC processors
The HPPC is the processor that controls the DC motor of the high-pressure pump
on the basis of the signals from the optical encoder, the cam signal and the signal
from the pressure sensor. It also drives the proportioning valve in synchronization
with the high-pressure pump. It works as a slave of the MC processor, which
communicates with it through a serial (SPI) link.
The TC is the processor that measures the temperature using the Pt100 ohm
sensor in the cartridge module. On the basis of the measured temperature and a
regulation algorithm, it controls heating to the programmed target temperature by
controlling the two Peltier elements connected in series in the PWM mode. A
thermal fuse in series with the Peltier modules prevents accidental overheating.
The processor works as a slave of the MC, which communicates with it through an
SPI link.
1.4.1.9 Power Supplies
Two standard power supplies furnish power to all of the electrical components.
Power supply # 1 supplies the following voltages:
• 5.15 VDC for all the logic circuits

• 12 VDC for the high-pressure pump motor, the proportioning valve and the
Peltier effect modules
• 26 VDC for the various actuators – liquid pump, vacuum pump, solenoid
valves, with the exception of the stepper motors. The voltage is also used
to produce the voltage that powers the analog circuits of the interface
board (5 VDC). In addition, it is used to produce a very short surge voltage
when the proportioning valve is powered.
• -12VDC: not used.

Power supply # 2 delivers 24VDC for the stepper motors and the thermal printer.
The 24VDC stepper motor supply is switched off when the front door is open. The
device is connected to the mains by means of an input module fitted with two
protective fuses and an anti-parasitic filter to ensure that it is EMC compatible. A
two-pole switch is used to switch the device on and off.
Important: when the device is switched on, it is crucial to follow the

instructions supplied by the Operating System before turning the switch to
the ON or OFF position.
1.4.2 Physical Organization of the Device: Mechanical, Electrical and Flow

Architecture
1.4.2.1 Modular Architecture
These components are grouped in the following manner:
• The basic principle has been to create integrated modules designed for
easy assembly and integration in the device, and optimize the connections
between modules in terms of their electrical, mechanical and flow aspects.
• For flow connections, the aim has been to minimize the number of
connections outside each module (flow in/outlets) – and therefore the risk
of leaks – and to reduce the length of connections. That also greatly
facilitates servicing.
• For electrical connections, the aim has been identical, i.e., to reduce the
number of connections. To that end, each module has a connection board
on which all the electrical elements of the module are connected. The
module is then connected to the electronic module by means of ribbon
cables.
• The mechanical architecture is designed to take account of the fluid and
electrical aspects and also functionality, assembly, fitting and adjustments.
1.4.2.2 List of Modules
The result is an assembly comprising the 11 modules listed below:
• syringe module
• high pressure module
• sampling arm module
• electronic module
• printer/hard drive/floppy module
• degasser module
• user interface module
• rack management module
• rack door module

• frame
• skin
The details about each module are provided in the Specifications section.
1.4.2.3 Electrical Architecture
The electrical architecture is described in diagrams "D-10: Electrical Block

Diagram, Sheet 1" and "D-10: Electrical Block Diagram, Sheet 2". These diagrams
can be found in Appendix B. These documents include all the identified elements
of the device that are related to the electrical system.
The first document (Sheet 1) shows the electronic module, which includes the
following:
• power supplies 1 and 2

• PC motherboard
• all the peripheral connectors
• interface board
• connection cables internal to the module
It also shows the connection of standard peripherals and power system voltage
supply.
The second document (Sheet 2) shows the interface board and all connections to
the connection boards present on the other modules. For each module, it details
the connection of all the electrical elements of the module.

1.5 Safety Symbols

The following alarm and information symbols can be found in several places on the
instrument.
These symbols are intended to draw your attention to particularly important information
and alert you to the presence of hazards as indicated.
NOTE: Only a qualified person aware of the safety procedures is allowed to repair
or perform service procedures on this instrument.
Direct current (DC)
Alternating current (AC)
Direct and alternating current
Earth terminal
Protective earth terminal
 Power On
Power Off
! Caution : see accompanying documents
Caution : electric shock hazard
Caution: biohazard risk.


2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Physical specifications
2.1.1 Dimensions
Width: 402mm (15.83 inches)

Depth: 534mm (21.0 inches)
Height: 476mm (18.75 inches)
2.1.2 Weight
Instrument alone: 35 kg (77 lbs.)
2.2 Technical specifications
2.2.1 General Specifications
Power Input Requirements: 100 - 240 VAC; 50 - 60 Hz

Power Consumption: 180 VA maximum
Fuses: 2.5 A/250V
Power Cord: CEI standard; US standard
Operating Environment
Temperature: 15 - 30°C
Humidity: 20 - 80% non-condensing
Storage Conditions
Temperature: 0 - 50°C
Humidity: 10 - 95%
2.2.2 Throughput
Hb A1c test : 3 min between injections

Hb A2/F/A1c test: 6.5 min between injections
2.2.3 Buffer Bottle Volumes
Buffer 1: 2000 mL
Buffer 2: 2000 mL
Wash/Diluent: 2000 mL
2.2.4 Waste Bottle Volume
Internal: 100 mL, Polyethylene

External: 10 L, Polyethylene

2.2.5 Sample Rack
Sample Rack: 10 positions

Number of Racks: 1 rack
Rack Model: Sysmex # 3
Rack Equipment: Rubber on the bottom
Sample Tubes
Primary Tubes
Maximum height: 106 mm
Minimum height: 69 mm
12 mm x 75 mm
13 mm x 100 mm
14 mm x 100 mm
16 mm x 100 mm
Micro Tubes Conical 1.5 mL sample vials
Sample Rack Adapters

Primary Tubes:
14 mm inserts (Sysmex #56)
13 mm inserts (Sysmex # 58)
12 mm inserts (Sysmex # 59)
Micro Tubes: specific adapter for sample vials
2.2.6 Sample Preparation
Syringe: Motorized syringe

Volume: 1 mL
Home position: Opto-sensor, blocked in the empty syringe
position
Step number
(nominal volume): 2400 half steps.
Speed: 2.5 to 13 mL/min
Accuracy Better than 1% at full stroke
Liquid selection: 3 way valve, normally open to the probe
side
Sample Volume:
Primary tubes: 20µLtypical
Sample vials: 250µL typical
Dilution Ratio for Primary Tubes

First Step: 20/500 µL typical
Second Step 20/700 µL typical
Dilution/Wash Station
2 Wells: One for the dilution,
One for the probe wash.

Valves: 2 pinch valves, one for each well. Normally

open.
Diluent/Wash Solution Consumption
Dilution Well: 1 mL
Probe Wash Well: 1 mL
Probe: VII German 2

Dimensions: 122 mm
Lifetime: > 10,000 piercings
Material: Stainless steel 304L
Sampling Position: Lateral
2.2.7 Probe Movements
Horizontal Movement: Left to right

Motor: Stepper motor, 400 steps/rotation
Drive: Gear and belt
Guide: Linear; plastic surface on aluminum
Resolution: 0.1 mm / step
Rotation Control: Opto-sensor associated with a rotary flag
Move between two slots: 5 mm
Home Position Control: Initialization with a slotted optical sensor
Vertical Movement: Top to bottom

Guide: Lead screw and flange nut
Resolution: 0.01 mm step
Rotation Control: Opto-sensor associated with a slot disk
Move between two slots: 0.5 mm
Home Position Control: Initialization with a slotted optical sensor
Tube holder movement: Top to bottom

Guide: Lead screw and flange nut
Resolution: 0.01 mm / step
Rotation Control: Opto-sensor associated with a rotary flag
Move between two slots: 0.5 mm
Home Position Control: Initialization with an opto-sensor
Tube Height Sensor: Opto-sensor and a flag

2.2.8 High Pressure Pump/Proportioning Valve
Type: Duo-Flow HP Pump (dual piston)

Flow Rate Range:
Minimum: 0.20 mL/min
Maximum: 2.00 mL/min
Steps: 0.1 mL/min
Maximum pressure: 2000 psi (138 bar)

Flow Accuracy: +/- 5%
Flow Precision: +/- 5%
Test Conditions: 1.0 - 2.0 mL/min; 0-1500 psi
Pulsation: < 10% for 1.5 mL/min; 500 psi
Piston Displacement: 38 µL
Internal Dead Volume: 23 µL
Reagent Mixing: The dead volume of the piston acts as a
mixing chamber
Seal Lifetime: 12 months for a 4 hours/day use
Gradient Accuracy: +/- 0.7% at 50% mixing
Gradient Precision: +/- 0.7% at 50% mixing
Piston Flush: Automatically done through the syringe and
the high-pressure pump
Proportioning Valve: 3 way valve; it apportions two reagents
before the liquid flows to the high-pressure
pump; the valve is synchronized with the
piston stroke
2.2.9 Pressure Sensor
Type: Strain gauge sensor

Maximum Measured Pressure: 2000 psi minimum
Absolute Maximum Pressure: 4500 psi
Accuracy: +/- 5% or 50 psi, whichever is greater
Precision: +/- 5% or 50 psi, whichever is greater
2.2.10 Injection Valve
Type: Rheodyne multiport valve, 7-port, 3

positions
Actuator Type: Stepper motor monitored by 3 opto-sensors
Sample Loop Volume: 23 µL
Method: Complete filling of the loop (injection volume
equal to the volume of the loop)

2.2.11 Degasser Module
Degasser Chamber: Vacuum chamber with 3 Teflon lines: buffer

1, buffer 2, and wash/diluent
Tubes
Material: Teflon
External Diameter: 2.1 mm
Internal Diameter: 1.5 mm
Length:
Buffer 1 and 2: 15 m
Wash/Diluent: 3m
Internal Volume:
Buffer 1 and 2: 26.5 mL
Wash/Diluent: 5.3 mL
Typical Vacuum Level: 0.5 bar, +/-0.05 bar ; can be modified.
Maximum Vacuum Level: 0.7 bar
Vacuum Sensor: Piezoelectric sensor
Accuracy: +/- 0.05 bar @ 0.5 bar
Full Scale: 1 bar
Vacuum Control: An external connection is provided to allow
connection of an external instrument
Vacuum regulation: 0.05 bar hysteresis; vacuum controlled by
microcontroller
2.2.12 Cartridge Holder
Cartridge installation/removal: Open door, cartridge insert with cartridge

inside
Cartridge dimensions: 40 mm, OD: 6.35 mm; without prefilter
Cartridge calibration: 2 point
Heating module: Aluminum block
Heating device: 2 Peltier effect modules, in series
Temperature:
Temperature sensor: Pt100 sensor
Test target temperature: 35°C
Temperature accuracy: +/- 0.5°C
Temperature stability: +/- 0.3°C
Overheating protection: Thermal fuse, 72°C
Fluid pre-heating: With stainless steel coil, before the cartridge
Length of the tubing: 650 mm
2.2.13 Detector
Wavelength
Sample: 415 nm
Zero Absorption Reference: 415 nm, measured at the beginning of the
cycle

Filter: Interference filter, centered on 415 nm,

bandwidth 10 nm.
Flow Cell: Hellma high-pressure cell; conical optical

shape; inlet and outlet tubings integrated.
Flow Cell Maximum Pressure: 30 bar
Flow Cell Chamber Volume: 20 µL
Optical Path: 10 mm
Input Optical Diameter: 1 mm
Output Optical Diameter: 2 mm
Optical System: Plano-Convex Lens; 4 mm diameter; 8 mm
focal length.
Light Source
Type: LED, 430 nm peak wavelength
Direct Current: 15 mA typical
Current Control: Numeric potentiometer, 255 points, 0.1
mA/point
Lifetime: 50,000 h
Sensors: Silicon Photodiodes
Reference Signal: Made before the optical path, near the
optical axis
Analog to Digital Conversion: Delta Sigma, 24 bit
Baseline adjustment: By software, at 20 mAU typically, before the
beginning of the analysis.
Linearity: +/- 1% of the theoretical absorption at 1.0
AU
Baseline Noise: < 200 µ AU peak to peak
Baseline Drift: < 1 m AU during the analysis.
2.2.14 Tubing and Material in Contact With the Liquid
Sample preparation: PEEK, SS316, PTFE, BOM, silicone

Waste circuit PTFE, silicon, BOM
High pressure: PEEK, SS316,
High pressure piston flush: PTFE, silicone
2.2.15 Rack Door
Door Movement: Made by the sampling arm (X movement)

Door Locking: In the closed position, by solenoid (normally
off)
Control: Opto-sensor to detect the closed door
position
Opto-sensor to detect the open door
position

2.2.16 Front Cover
Front Door Movement: Manually, with help of a gas spring

Front Door Locking: In the closed position, by solenoid (normally
off)
Control: Optical sensor to detect the closed door
position
Power control: An electrical switch is open when the front
door is open and the power to the stepper
motors is switched off.
2.2.17 Onboard PC
Motherboard: EBX form factor

Microprocessor: AMD K6-2E, 350Mhz
Memory: 64MB of PC100 SDRAM
Hard Disk: 40GB; 1 partition of 4GB with the system
and applications
Operating System: Windows NT4.0 Embedded (NTe)
Floppy Disk: 3.5 inches, 1.44MB
Adapter/Ports: Ethernet on RJ45 port
RS232 on DB9 port
Keyboard connection
Mouse Connection
External VGA screen connection
Rack feeder connection (future use)
2.2.18 User Interface
Display: Graphic LCD, ¼ VGA, monochrome, CCFL

backlight
Lifetime of the CCFL Backlight: 50% contrast after 15,000 hours typically
Data entry: Resistive Touch Screen, 4 wires
2.2.19 Printer
Type: Thermal
Paper: Roll, width: 112 mm
2.2.20 Barcode Reader
Type: CCD sensor, LED source, vertical reading

Barcodes: UPC, EAN8, EAN13, Code39, Codabar,
Industrial 2 of 5, Interleaved 2 of 5, S Code,
IATA, Code 93, Code 128, MSI/Plessey,
Telepen, UK/Plessey, Laetus
Barcode label height: 60 mm maximum

Number of digits: 20 digits maximum

Barcode label position: higher than 18 mm from the bottom of the
rack and lower than 80 mm from the bottom
of the rack
Resolution: 0.2mm min for a bar width
2.2.21 Automation of the Microcontrollers
MC and HPPC: 16 bit MC68HC812 Motorola

Program memory: 4 MB 8 bit, flash EPROM
Data memory: 32 KB 8 bit, SRAM
Programmable logic: Altera 7128S ; 1 chip for MC and 1 chip for
HPPC
TC: PIC 16F876 Microchip

3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Only a qualified person aware of the safety procedures is allowed to repair or perform
service procedures on this instrument.
3.1 System Overview
SKIN PRINTER
MODULE STAINLESS
STEEL FRAME
DEGASSER
ELECTRONIC MODULE
MODULE
SYRINGE
MODULE
SAMPLING
ARM
USER MODULE
INTERFACE
MODULE
HIGH RACK
PRESSURE MANAGEMENT
MODULE MODULE
Figure 3-1: Exploded View of the Frame and All Modules
200:155 Service Manual 3- 1

3.2 Frame
Figure 3-2: Frame, Drawing 1 Figure 3-3: Frame, Drawing 2
.
3.3 Modules
3.3.1 Syringe Module
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 10
Figure 3-4: Syringe Module, Front Figure 3-5: Syringe Module, Rear
3- 2 Service Manual 200:155

The syringe module includes:
1-Pinch Valve attached to the Probe Wash Well
2-Manifold 2
3-Pinch Valve attached to the Dilution Well
4-Manifold 1
5-Internal Waste Bottle
6-Motorized Syringe
7-3-Way Valve
8-Syringe Connection Board
9-Vacuum Sensor
10-Liquid Pump
Screws
Screws
Figure 3-6: Syringe Module, Location and Fastening

Connection to the
internal waste bottle
9 (vacuum sensing)
Liquid Pump
Probe Wash Well Pinch

Valve
Not used 3-Way Valve
Dilution Well Pinch Valve
Syringe Not used

Home
Sensor
Connection (26 conductor
ribbon cable) to the
Interface Board (A13)
Syringe
Motor
Figure 3-7: Syringe Module Board Electrical Connections

S5 Tube
to the probe
wash well T6 Tube
to the
S4 Tube Degasser
to the dilution
well
T11 Tube
to the HP Valve
T14 Tube
Backpressure
Loop
S18 Tube S12 Tube

to the HP to the External
Pump Waste Bottle
Figure 3-8: Syringe Module Fluidic Connections

3.3.2 High-Pressure Module
2 4 5
3 6
Figure 3-9: High-Pressure Module
The module includes:
1-High-Pressure Pump
2-7-Port, 3 Position, Motorized High Pressure Valve
3-High Pressure Sensor
4-Proportioning Valve
5-Cartridge Holder and Heating System
6-High-Pressure Module Connection Board
7-Detector

Rail Guide
Captive screws
Figure 3-10: High-Pressure Module Location and Fastening

(* These devices are not identified by a wire number and are interchangeable.)
High-Pressure
Pump
Encoder Peltier Effect
High-Pressure Module 2*
Pt100 ohm Sensor
Sensor Thermal Peltier Effect
Cam Flag Module 1*
Not used Fuse*
Sensor
Connection (24
Front Cover conductor ribbon
Sensor cable) to the
HP Valve
Interface Board
Sensors
(A10) Motorized
High Pressure
Front Cover
Proportioning Valve
Locking Solenoid Connection of the High Pressure
Valve
34 wire ribbon Pump Motor
cable to the
Interface Board
(A9)
Figure 3-11: High-Pressure Module Board Electrical Connections

T4 Tube T11 Tube T3 Tube T9 Tube P4 + T14 (back

S17 Tube to
to Buffer 2 to manifold #2 and the to Buffer 1 to probe pressure loop)
check valve
Line on the 3-Way Valve Line on the to manifold #2
(fitting not visible)
Degasser (Syringe Module) Degasser
Figure 3-12: High-Pressure Module Fluidic Connections

3.3.3 High-Pressure Pump
Inlet of the Piston

Flush Circuit, to 7-port
High-Pressure Valve,
port 6
Pump Outlet, to
High-Pressure
Sensor Pump Inlet,
from the Proportioning
Valve outlet
Outlet of the
Piston Flush
Pump Inlet for Circuit,
manual priming to Check Valve
with the syringe
Figure 3-13: High-Pressure Pump Fluidic Connections
DC Motor
Cam Flag
Sensor
Incremental
Encoder
Figure 3-14: High-Pressure Pump Electrical Parts

3.3.4 Cartridge Holder
Fluidic connections Cartridge

Holder Outlet
To Detector
Module
Cartridge
Holder Inlet
From 7-port
High-Pressure
Valve, port 3
Figure 3-15: Cartridge Holder, front view
Preheating Cartridge Cartridge

Coil Insert
Figure 3-16: Cartridge Holder with open door

Cartridge Insert
Figure 3-17: Cartridge Insert
Electrical Parts
Peltier Effect Components
Thermal Fuse
location Pt100 Ohm Thermal
Sensor location
Figure 3-18: Cartridge Module, rear view

3.3.5 Detector Module
Electronic
Board Cover
Inlet fluidic connection

(from the cartridge
holder outlet)
Optical Bench
Cover
Electronic board
Outlet fluidic connection (to the

backpressure loop)
Figure 3-19: Detector Module Fluidic Connections
Electronic board
Reference Sample photodetector with LED Source Flow cell with lens
photodetector 415 nm filter (not visible)
Figure 3-20: Internal View 1 Figure 3-21: Internal View 2 of

of the Detector Module the Detector Module

J Test point N Test point
Sample Gain Sample Zero Reference Gain Reference

Trimmer Trimmer Trimmer Zero Trimmer
Sample Light Reference LED Source ribbon cable) to the
Measurement Measurement Interface Board (A12)
Photodetector Photodetector
Figure 3-22: Detector Board Connections, Adjustments and Test Points

3.3.6 Sampling Arm Module
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 3-23: Sampling Arm Module Drawings, front and rear
1- TH Movement Home Sensor
2- Tube Height Sensor
3- Tube Holder
4- Sample vial Adapter sensor
5- Barcode Reader
6- Z Axis Motor Sensor
7- Tube Holder Axis Sensor
8- X Movement Connection Board
9- X Movement Home Sensor

10- X Motor
11- X Axis Motor Sensor
12- Tube Holder Motor
13- Tube Holder Movement Pulley and Belt
14- Z Movement Pulley and Belt
15- Z Motor
16- X Movement Pulley and Belt
17- Z Movement Home Sensor (not visible)
18- Z Movement Connection Board
Screws
Screws
Figure 3-24: Sampling Arm Module Location and Fastening


ribbon cable) to Interface
Board (A15)
Rack Door
Locking Closed Rack
Solenoid Door Sensor
(see Rack Door (see Rack Door
Module) Module)
X Axis Sensor
X Home Sensor
Rack
Positioning
Motor
(See Rack
Management
Module)
Open Rack Door

Sensor
(see Rack Door
X Motor Module)
Connection to the Z Connection to the Z Rack Output Sensor

Connection Board Connection Board (See Rack Rack Input Sensor
(CN10) (CN14) Management Module) (See Rack
Management Module)
Figure 3-25: Sampling Arm X Connection Board, Electrical Connections

Bar-Code
Sample vial Reader
Adapter
Sensor
Tube Height
Sensor
Z Home Sensor Tube Holder

Home Sensor
Not Used
Not Used
Connection to the
X Connection
Board (CN6)
Connection to
Z Axis
the X
Sensor
Connection
Board (CN5)
TH Axis Sensor TH Motor Z Motor
Figure 3-26: Sampling Arm Z Connection Board, Electrical Connections

T9 Tube, to the HP Valve, port 5
Sampling Probe
Figure 3-27: Sampling Arm Module Fluidic Connections

3.3.7 Electrical Module
3
2
1
4 5
Figure 3-28: Electrical Module drawings; front face with and without cover; rear face, inside
The Module includes:
1- Power Supply cover
2- Power Supply # 1
3- Power Supply # 2
4- Interface Board
5- PC Motherboard

Screws Screws
Figure 3-29: Electrical Module Location and Fastening

Main supply input

(power supply #1)
DC supply output
(power supply #1)
DC supply outputs
(power supply #2)
Main supply input

(power supply #2)
Fuse for power supply #2: (F1 location): F4A/250V
Figure 3-30: Electrical Module Connections
Power Supply Fuses
Power Supply #1
• Location: FS1
• Type: F5A/250V
• Dimensions: 5 mm x 20 mm
Power Supply #2
• Location: F1
• Type: F4A/250V
• Dimensions: 5 mm x 20 mm

RS422 connection to PC
HPPC Flash Motherboard (COM2) MC Flash
Main Fan EPROM (part of CN16) EPROM
A16
Not Used A8
A7
Connection to
Sampling arm X
Connection Board
U23
CD Reader A6
Power Supply A15
(optional) U7
A5
U25 MC
Floppy Disk
Power A4 U12 HPPC
Supply
DE7
HPPC MC Activity LED
Activity DE6
LED
A3
Hard Disk
Power Supply A14 Connection to
Rack Feeder
A2
Port
U36 TC
PC Board DE8 TC Activity LED

Power
Supply
A1 A13
Connection to
A11 Syringe Module
Connection
Power Supply Board (CN4)
Input A9 A10 A12
Connection to
Connections to High-Pressure Module Connection to Degasser Detector Board
Connection Board (CN12,CN5) Module Connection Board (CN4)
(CN4)
Figure 3-31: Interface Board Electrical Connections

Processor
Fan
LCD/PC
Mezzanine
Board
Not Used connection
Power
Supply
Hard Disk and
CD-ROM
Not Used
Not Used
Ethernet/LAN
Mouse and
Keyboard VGA
Floppy Disk Audio

Serial Port Connections:
COM1 to the Touch Screen,
COM2 to the Interface Board,
COM3 to the Printer,
COM4 to the external connection
Figure 3-32: PC Motherboard Electrical Connections

Connection to Connection
the PC to the LCD
Motherboard Interface
Board
Board Power Connection to COM1 port

Supply on the PC Motherboard
(part of CN16)
Figure 3-33: LCD/PC Mezzanine Board Electrical Connections

A16
A8
A7
U23
A6
A15
U7
A5
U25 MC
GND A4 U12 HPPC
DE7
DE6
GNDA
A3
+12V
A14
A2
U36 TC
+5V
DE8
-12V
A1 A13
+26V A11
+24V
A9 A10 A12
HP V1 LV
High-pressure signal Degasser vacuum signal Liquid pump vacuum
signal
Figure 3-34: Interface Board: Test Point Locations

3.3.8 Printer Module
Figure 3-35: Printer Module drawing
This module includes:
1- Thermal Printer Unit
2- Hard Disk
3- Floppy Disk Unit

Screws
Figure 3-36: Printer Module Location and Fastening

Connection of the
Hard Disk to the
PC Board by Hard Disk
ribbon cable Power
(CN5 connector) Supply
Connection of the
Floppy Disk to Floppy Disk
the PC Board by Power
ribbon cable Supply
(CN17 connector)
(behind the other
cable, not visible)
Connection to
COM3 Port on
the PC Board
(part of CN16)
Thermal Printer
power supply
Figures 3-37 and 3-38: Printer Module Electrical Connections, side and rear

3.3.9 Degasser Module
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figures 3-39 and 3-40: Degasser Module, front and rear
1- Degasser Module Connection Board
2- Vacuum Sensor
3- Bubble Detectors (Opto-sensors)
4- Degasser lid
5- Vacuum Pump
6- Degasser body

Screws (4)
Captive screw
Figure 3-41: Degasser Module Location and Fastening
To the degasser chamber
Fig.2-41 – Degasser Connection Board with is connections
Not Used
Not Used
Bubble Detector Bubble Detector Connection (14 Bubble Detector for Vacuum Pump
for Buffer 1 for Buffer 2 conductor ribbon Wash Solution
cable) to the Interface
Board (connector A11)
Figure 3-42: Degasser Module Board Electrical Connections

T1 Tube to the Buffer 1

Bottle
T2 Tube to the Buffer 2

Bottle
T5 Tube to the
Wash/Diluent Bottle
T3 Tube to the Proportioning T4 Tube to the Proportioning T6 Tube to the 3 way

Valve (N.O. side) Valve (N.C. side) Valve (Syringe Module)
(HPPC Module) (HPPC Module)
Figure 3-43: Degasser Module Fluidic Connections

3.3.10 User Interface Module
1 2
Figure 3-44: User Interface Module
This Module includes:
1- Touch Screen/LCD Interface Board
2- Touch Screen ¼ VGA LCD Display

Screws
Screws
Contrast
Adjustment Knob
Figure 3-45: User Interface Module Location and Fastening

CCFL Backlight
Touch Screen
LCD
Connection to the Contrast Adjustment Knob

Power Supply
Mezzanine Board on the (location: in the right panel of the instrument)
(Not used)
PC Motherboard
(26 conductor ribbon cable)
Figure 3-46: User Interface Board Electrical Connections

3.3.11 Rack Management Module
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figures 3-47 and 3-48: Rack Management Module drawings, front and rear
This Module includes:
1- Wash Station (Dilution Well and Probe Wash Well)
2- Rack
3- Rack Guide Rail
4- Rack Input Sensor
5- Rack Output Sensor (not visible)
6- Rack Driving Motor

Screws
Screws
Figure 3-49: Rack Management Module Location and Fastening

Rack Input
Sensor
Rack
Positioning
Motor
Rack Output
Sensor
Figure 3-50: X Connection Board Electrical Connections with the Rack

Management Module

S4 Tube to the Dilution Well Pinch Valve
S5 Tube to the Probe

Wash Pinch Valve
Figure 3-51: Rack Management Module Fluidic Connections

3.3.12 Rack Door Module
1 2 3 4
Figures 3-52 and 3-53: Rack Door Module Inside and Outside
The Module includes:
1- Closed Door Sensor
2- Open Door Sensor
3- Door Locking Solenoid
4- Rack Door

Screws
Figure 3-54: Rack Door Module Location and Fastening

Closed Rack
Door Sensor
Door Locking
Solenoid
Open Rack
Door Sensor
Figure 3-55: X Connection Board Electrical Connections with the Rack Door Module

3.3.13 Skin
Figure 3-56 and 3-57: Drawing of the Skin; front cover, top cover and side doors
Figure 3-58: Skin Component Locations

Figure 3-59: Drawing of the Skin Parts on the Frame, with Open Front Door
Front cover locking ON/OFF switch

solenoid (stepper motor supply)
Front cover sensor 4-pin connection 6-pin connection

(Front cover switch) (Front cover solenoid and sensor)
Figure 3-60: Front Cover Electrical Figure 3-61: Front Cover Interlock
Connections Connectors

3.4 Tubing List

The tube identification refers to the "D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in inject
position)" diagram and the "D-10: High-Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position)"
diagram. Refer to Appendix B for the diagrams.
No. Type Dimensions P/N
DT1 Teflon 2.1 mm x 1.5 mm x 3000 mm 2200296
DT2, Teflon 2.1 mm x 1.5 mm x 15000 mm 2200295
DT3
T1 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 700 mm (green) 2200314 *
T2 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 700 mm (white) 2200314 *
T3 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 570 mm (green) 2200315 *
T4 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 650 mm (white) 2200315 *
T5 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 700 mm (blue) 2200314 *
T6 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm x 530 mm 2200315 *
T7 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm x 115 mm 2200315 *
T9 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm x 1250 mm 2200315 *
T10 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm x 210 mm 2200315 *
T11 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm x 530 mm 2200315 *
T12 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm x 150 mm 2200315 *
T13 Teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm x 110 mm 2200315 *
T14 Teflon 1/16" x 0.25 mm x 1200 mm (blue) 2200315 *
2200330
T15 Teflon 1/8" x 1/16" x 205 mm 2200314 *
P1 PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm x 170 mm 2200316 *
P2 PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm x 120 mm 2200316 *
P3 PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm x 190 mm (blue) 2200266 **
P4 PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm x 190 mm (orange) 2200266 **
S1 mixed polyamide 4 mm x 2 mm x 250 mm, silicon 6 mm x 3 mm x 2200329 *
20 mm
S2 mixed polyamide 4 mm x 2 mm x 250 mm, silicon 6 mm x 3 mm x 2200329 *
20 mm
S3 silicon 6 mm x 3 mm x 220 mm 2200329 *
S4 silicon 6 mm x 3 mm x 550 mm (green) 2200317 *
S5 silicon 6 mm x 3 mm x 550 mm (yellow) 2200317 *
S6 silicon 3.2 mm x 2 mm x 27 mm, 6 mm x 3 mm x 23 mm (on each 2200317 *
side)
S7 silicon 3.2 mm x 2 mm x 27 mm, 6 mm x 3 mm x 23 mm (on each 2200317 *
side)

No. Type Dimensions P/N

S13 silicon 6 mm x 3 mm x 2500 mm (red) 2200314 *
2200321
SS1 stainless 23 µL calibrated loop 2200273
steel
SS2 stainless 1/16" x 0.5 mm x 650 mm 2200332
steel
* all tubing with this part number included in package (with fittings)
** tubing included and attached to flow cell
3.5 Accessories
Rack
Type: Sysmex # 3, with anti-rotation rubber
Number: 2
Sysmex adapters: 14 mm Sysmex # 56

13 mm Sysmex # 58
12 mm Sysmex # 59
Sample vial adapters

Type: specific adapter equipped with a magnet
Number: 10
Power cords
Spares fuses
Bottle closures with tubes (3)
Buffer 1 tubing
Buffer 2 tubing
Wash tubing
Waste tank tubing
50 ml syringe
Barcode labels (CAL1, CAL2, CTRH, CTRL, PRIM)
Dummy cartridge
10 L Waste tank

4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Only an authorized Bio-Rad representative can perform installation of the D-10.
Installation by any other person will invalidate the system warranty.
4.1 Installation Requirements
• Choose a location for the system that is away from direct sunlight and
relatively dust-free.
• Room temperature should be between 15 and 30 °C.
• The bench or table should have a flat, level surface that is free from vibrations
and is capable of supporting a weight of more than 35 kg (77 lb).
• The system requires the minimum benchtop space of 100 cm (W) x 48 cm (H)
x 65 cm (D) [39 in (W) x 19 in (H) x 26 in (D) ] to allow for the system plus
proper clearances.
• Maintain a minimum clearance of 20 cm (8 in.) on the left side and 40 cm (16
in.) on the right side. Maintain clearance of 10 cm (4 in.) from the back side to
ensure that the power cord input is readily available to the operator.
• A grounded electrical receptacle should be within 1.8 meters (6 feet) of the
system. Input power requirements for the system are between 100 VAC and
240 VAC. The maximum power consumption is 250 Watts.
• The use of a circuit breaker before the main electrical receptacle is required.
The electrical installation must comply with locally applicable standards and
requirements.
4.2 Installation
4.2.1 Unpacking and Inspection

See D-10 Operation Manual, Section 3
4.2.2 Set Up
4.2.3 Barcode Labels

4.2.4 Performing Test Runs

4.3 De-installation
To de-install a D-10, the following steps must be performed in the order listed below
before shipment.

Warning: Use caution when de-installing the unit and follow local regulations
regarding the treatment of spills and the disposal of biohazardous materials.
4.3.1 Decontamination
4.3.1.1 Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path

4.3.1.2 Clean the Dilution Well

4.3.1.3 Clean the Sample Probe

Wipe the outside of the sample probe with a cloth dampened with 5% hypochlorite.
4.3.1.4 Clean the Internal Waste Bottle

4.3.1.5 Repeat Clean/Decontaminate Sampling Fluid Path
4.3.2 Storage Fluid in the Instrument
1. Remove the analytical cartridge and replace it with the plastic PEEK
dummy cartridge. Place the green end caps onto the cartridge and store it
for reuse.
2. Allow the HP Pump to run for 5 minutes setting the flow rate at 2 mL/min
and the percentage of buffer 2 to 0% (use the Maintain screen).
3. Stop the HP Pump.
4. Remove the Buffer 1, Buffer 2 and Wash fluidic connections on the rear
panel of the D-10 and replace the port plugs.
5. Empty and dry the external tubing from buffers and wash solution before
placing in the accessories bag.
6. Remove the external Waste tube. Empty and wipe dry. Store it in a
separate plastic bag.
The instrument is ready for packing.
4.3.3 Packing
Caution: Before packing, be sure that the system is well cleaned,

decontaminated and has storage fluid in the fluid pathway.
4.3.3.1 Shutdown and Removal of the External Components
1. Shut down the instrument using the standard shutdown procedure.

2. Remove the paper roll from the printer unit and place it in the accessories
box.
3. Remove all the electrical connections on the rear panel.

4. Remove all the bottles from the reagent tray and remove the reagent tray.
4.3.3.2 Accessories Packing
1. Collect all the accessories listed below and pack in the accessories box:
- sample racks
- sample vial adapters
- power cord(s)
- spares fuses
- bottle closures with tubes
- buffer 1 tubing
- buffer 2 tubing
- wash tubing
- waste tank tubing
- 50 mL syringe
- barcode labels (CAL1, CAL2, CTRH, CTRL, PRIM)
2. Close the accessories box.
4.3.3.3 Waste Tank Packing
1. Empty the waste bottle according to local regulations for the disposal of
biohazardous waste.
2. Rinse the bottle with bleach solution.
3. Rinse the bottle with water.
4. Use the small box to pack the 10 L waste tank.
5. Close the box.
4.3.3.4 D-10 Packing
1. Place the bottom section of the box, with packing foam, on the floor.
Determine the position of the instrument in the form of the foam.
2. Two people should lift the D-10. Grasp the unit from the bench top and
place it carefully in the bottom, in the appropriate position.
3. Turn the reagent tray upside down and replace it in its original position.
4. Place the accessories box on the reagent tray.
5. Enclose the D-10 with the plastic bag.
6. Place the Top Packing foam on the top of the instrument.
7. Place the Top section of the box.
8. Place the 4 plastic latches in order to secure upper and lower part of the
main packing.
9. Place the Waste tank box on top of the main box.
10. Install the bands to secure the two boxes together.


5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
5.1 D-10 Application
The D-10 Hemoglobin Testing System uses Windows NTe as the operating system. A
folder named DIA, found on the hard drive, contains all the files used and linked to the
D-10. Primary files in this folder are:
• DIA.EXE, the user software

• DIANSR.exe, used to run the same samples in a rack continuously
• DIASER.exe, used by service personnel
• *.dll files, used by the executable files
• *.ini files, used by the executable files
• *.hpl files, used for gradient production
Subfolders in the DIA folder include:
• HbA1C: contains the parameters for the HbA1c test

• Bthal: contains the parameters for the HbA2/F/A1c test
• Decont: contains the parameters for the Decontamination procedure
• Log: contains error messages generated during a run
• Service: contains files used by the service software application DIASER, and
a subfolder "Log" contains the files generated by the service software.
The HbA1c, BThal and Decont folders have the same structure and contain
subfolders, that include:
• Calib folder, containing the calibration files

• Param folder, containing the parameter files
• Results folder, containing the results files
• Extra folder, currently not used.
5.2 User Software

The DIA.exe application corresponds to the user software. This executable file is
launched when the instrument is switched on. Refer to the Operation Manual for
information on using this application

5.3 *.INI Files
Warning: All the *.INI files are "text files". They should not be modified unless
directed to by written procedures.
Note: Some *.ini files may be updated during the lifetime of the instrument.
Some *.ini files are used to initialize some functional parameters of the instrument.
Information about some files is given below. All the parameters are not described, but
the main or the most important parameters are given below.
5.3.1 DIA.ini File
An example of a DIA.ini file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains the following information and parameters:
• the software version

• the current state of the instrument: injection number, current day, piston
flush day, waste volume count
• LIS parameters (for future use)
• Print, Data, Assay parameters
• High-Pressure pump parameters
• Barcode label parameters
5.3.2 Instrument.ini File
An example of an Instrument.ini file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains the following information and parameters:
• the software version

• the serial number of the instrument
• the High-Pressure Pump parameters
• the Sampling Arm parameters
• the Bubble detector parameters (not used)
• the Temperature Module parameters
5.3.2.1 High-Pressure Pump Parameters
5.3.2.1.1 Flow Rate Calibration Parameters
The "Rule1","Rule2" and "Rule3" parameters are used for the calculation of the
pump speed in order to have a target flow rate. The values are obtained by a flow
rate calibration of the pump.

Examples:
• "Rule1=0,1,2400,0": for a flow rate between 0 and 1 mL/min, the slope and
the intercept for the calculation of the speed of the motor are 2400 and 0.
• "Rule2=1,1.5,2401,-12": for a flow rate between 1 and 1.5 mL/min, the
slope and the intercept for the calculation of the speed of the motor are
2401 and –12.
5.3.2.1.2 High-Pressure Sensor Calibration Parameters
The "HPSensor_Offset" and the "HPSensor_Gain" parameters are the intercept

and the slope of the High-Pressure Sensor. The values are obtained by the
Sensor Calibration and are associated with the sensor.
5.3.2.1.3 High-Pressure Pump Parameters
The "ECAMFILLSHIFT1" and THE "EFILLDURATION" parameters are

associated with the High-Pressure Pump. They correspond, respectively, to the
phase shift between the Cam Flag signal and the beginning of the aspiration
phase (called "waiting count" or "WC"), and to the duration of the filling phase of
the pump (called "filling count" or "FC").
5.3.2.2 Sampling Arm Parameters
The "THOffset" and the "ZOffset" parameters are parameters associated

respectively to the TH and the Z movements. The "THOffset" is used to
compensate for the difference between the theoretical and the practical position of
the tube holder in order to precisely measure the height of the tube during the run.
The "ZOffset" corresponds to a Z position compensation, but is not used.
5.3.2.3 Temperature Control Parameters
The "TCCal_Gain" and the "TCCal_Offset" parameters correspond to the slope and
the intercept of the temperature measurement circuit on the Interface Board." They
are associated with the Interface Board.
The "TCCal_SensorOffset" is associated with the sensor and corresponds to the
sensor-offset correction.
The "TCCal_GradientOffset" is associated with the cartridge holder and
corresponds to the gradient correction between the position of the sensor and the
position of the cartridge.

5.3.3 Profile.ini File
An example of a Profile.ini file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains the majority of the information and parameters for running the D-10.
These parameters are dependent on the test used (A1c or Bthal). The following
parameters are grouped according to their use.
• status and general information

• initialization movements
• syringe circuit priming
• high pressure circuit priming
• piston flush priming
• system information
• pump parameters
5.3.4 Profile2.ini File
An example of a Profile2.ini file is given in Appendix A.
This file contains information and parameters that are test specific. For A1c, a
profile2.ini file is found in the "Param" folder of the HbA1c folder. For A2/F/A1c, a
profile2.ini file is found in the "Param"folder of the BTHal folder. The following
parameters are grouped according to their use.
• status section
• kit section, containing information associated with the kit
• inject section, containing information associated with sample preparation
• chroma section, containing information associated with the chromatogram
• pump parameters
5.4 Log Folder

The Log folder contains several text files such as:
• dialog.txt, which contains the list of errors, warnings or information during

the run
• chromalog.txt, which contains information about the detector, the pressure
and the temperature for each test
• *.log files: one file for each test. Each file contains all the information linked
to the analysis of the results for a sample.
5.5 Result Folder
For each test (A1c, A2/F/A1c, Decont), there is a Result folder. This folder contains:

• results files: *.csv, *.raw and *.dam

• *.csv files contain the absorption measurements and the LED reference
measurement for the sample
• *.raw files contain the absorption measurement of the sample. The data
analysis module processes this file.
• *.dam files contain the results of the data processing. This file is used to
generate result printouts. These files are listed in a datalist.txt file.
• Datalist.txt file
5.6 Param Folder

For each test (A1c, A2/F/A1c, Decont), there is a Param folder. This folder contains:
• *.hpl files: each file corresponds to a gradient used during the test process
• *.ini files: these files contain the parameters of the test for the instrument
• *.mdb file: this file contains the information for the data processing
• *.tsv files: these files contain data from and for the data analysis module
• *.dam files: listed in a datalist.txt file.
The update kit disk, contained in the reorder pack, will update the information in the
corresponding Param folder.
5.7 Initialization Sequence

All motors, valves and pumps are in standby at power up and only receive power at a
specified time in the initialization sequence. If power is supplied to these components
before the initialization sequence starts, it indicates a problem with the component or
any component associated with it. The power up sequence is as follows:
• The PC boots:
− A short beep indicates the PC has booted after the internal self test
− CPU identification
− Memory test
− IDE detection
− Hardware check
• At the same time, the low-level processors MC, HPPC and TC boot. The
associated red LEDs are blinking, indicating that the boot is OK (frequency
between 1 and 2 Hz). (For the location of these LEDs, see Figure 2-31:
MC Activity LED, HPPC Activity LED and TC Activity LED) The degasser
pump is switched on until the default degasser vacuum level is reached. If
the level is not reached after a time out, the pump is stopped.
• Windows NTe operating system is launched
• "BIO-RAD" and the D-10 icon are displayed.

Warning: do not click on the D-10 icon !!!
• The application DIA.exe is launched

− the *.ini files are loaded
dia.ini for the preparation of the user interface
profile2.ini for loading test names and kit parameters
instrument.ini for loading instrument parameters
diadam.ini for loading data analysis parameters
• data files are loaded (500 last samples of the selected test)
• the instrument parameters are transmitted to the low level processors
(interface board)
• the internal devices under control of the low level processors are initialized
(see hardware initialization below) .
The Run screen is displayed when the power up sequence is complete. If any
hardware component does not initialize, an error message is displayed.
Hardware Initialization of the Instrument
The sequence is as follows:
• Z motor to home position (upper position of the probe)

• Tube Holder motor to home position (upper position of the tube holder)
• X motor to home position (sample arm on the left position, corresponding
to the dilution well position for the probe)
• Z motor moves to a lower position: the probe goes into the dilution well.
• The High-Pressure Valve is moved to load position.
• The Syringe motor is moved to its home position.
• At the same time, the liquid pump and the pinch valves are started to
remove the liquid (eventually delivered by the syringe) from the dilution
well.
• After a delay, the Z motor returns to the home position and the liquid pump
and pinch valves are switched off.
• If an error appears during the sequence, an error message is displayed. In
this case, the error must be resolved in order to continue.
5.8 Shutdown Sequence of the D-10
• If a test is running, wait until the complete rack is processed or select the
Stop button to discontinue processing after the current sample is finished.
• Eject the rack from the system after the sample is complete.
• Select Sleep in order to return to the Sleep state. Wait until the end
gradient is finished.
• Once the system is in Sleep state, select the Shutdown button.

• A message appears, "Please wait while the system writes unsaved data to
the disk". This message is not seen in its entirety if there is no external
monitor. After several seconds, a new message is displayed: "It is now
safe to turn off your computer". The ON/OFF switch can now be switched
to the OFF position.
5.9 Service Software

This description refers to the DIASER 1.13 service software version.
5.9.1 Objective
The objective of the service software:
• To give service personnel a tool to test each device on the instrument:

sensors, motors, valves, pumps, etc. This is useful to troubleshoot
hardware components that may have failed, or to perform maintenance
procedures.
• To supply the manufacturing, quality control and service departments with
some tools to check global functionalities.
• To supply all departments (manufacturing, QC, service) the tools to
replace a part and update some information linked to the replaced part.
5.9.2 Access
The service software is an executable program DIASER.EXE. It can be launched

from the D-10 touchscreen by selecting the “MAINTAIN” screen, then the “SERVICE”
screen. Select the button “Exit to Service Software”. It can also be launched from
the desktop, when a VGA screen and a keyboard and/or a mouse are available, by a
double click on the DIASER icon. Access to the service software is password
protected. Two levels of password exist:
• The low level password (level 1) allows the user to access all the functions
with the exception of the modification of instrument parameters.
• The high level password (level 2) accesses all functions of level 1 and also
allows the service engineer to change some parameters of the instrument,
for test issues only or for spare parts replacement issues.
WARNING: Except for parameter modifications for spare part replacement or

specific request, the parameters do not have to be modified. If a modification
is done for test issues, the initial value of the parameter must be restored.
• A third password (level 3) is defined for installation process (SETUP) from

the floppy. If this password is entered, the system goes directly to the
SETUP process defined on the floppy disk.

Passwords:
Level 1: D-10QC
Level 2: DIA904
Level 3: D-10SETUP
5.9.3 Exit
By selecting the “EXIT” button in one of the DIASER main screens, you can quit the
service software and return to the DIA.exe program.
Warning: When the Exit button is pushed, DIASER.exe is closed and DIA.EXE
is started automatically. During the boot sequence, the DIA icon is displayed
on the screen. DO NOT select this icon !!! If selected, DIA.exe is started again,
and an error message is displayed.
Comment: The executable software program started by selecting the “EXIT”

button is given in the DIASER.INI file: it is the name associated with the
“UserSoftware” parameter, in the “Maintain” section. The default value is
“DIA.EXE”.
5.9.4 Parameters of the DIASER.EXE Tool
The DIASER.EXE software uses the DIASER.INI file containing some initialization
values. A view of the file is given in the Appendix A.
5.9.5 General Features in the Use of the Screens
Note: Depending on the software version and level selected, some options
indicated on the service screen cannot be accessed. These options will be
greyed out.
On the screens, the user can find the following:
• Option buttons. Selecting a button will start the function indicated.

• A field with a white background displays data that can be modified. When
selecting any of these fields, the user has access to a numeric keyboard,
an alphanumeric keyboard, or other window for making a selection. Some
fields allow the user to modify the data directly. When a new value is
edited, it can be marked by an "N" (like New) indication, which is removed
when this new value is saved.
• A field with a grey background displays data that can not be modified.
Areas with low contrast correspond to options that are not accessible in
the context or that are not implemented.
• When an action is ongoing, the user should wait until it is finished before
starting the next action. If an action is started before the end of the current

action, a message is displayed with the option of waiting for the current
action to finish or to stop the current action.
On the top of each screen, the following buttons are available:
• "NEXT", used to go to the next screen of the current level

• "PREVIOUS", used to go to the previous screen of the current level
• "CLOSE", used to go to the higher maintenance level
• "EXIT", used to quit the DIASER service tool
On the bottom of each screen, the current level in the service software is given
(module identification), with the current screen number and the total number of
screens for the same level. Date and time are also displayed. The question mark can
be used to obtain additional help regarding use of the service software. Information
on all screens may not always be available. A "GRAPHIC" button may be available. If
the corresponding option is implemented, it can be used to display the variation of
the selected electrical signal with time.
The current process must be completed before starting the next process. If a new
process is started before the end of the current process, a message is displayed,
and the user has the option of either stopping the current process or waiting until the
current process is complete.
Numeric and Alphanumeric Keyboards
One of the two following screens is open when the user has to enter new data. If the
data is a numerical value, the numeric keyboard is open. When the data is a
password or a file name, the alphanumeric keyboard is open.
Figure 5-1: Numeric Keyboard Figure 5-2: Alphanumeric Keyboard

EXPORT and IMPORT Screens
One of the two following screens is open during the file export to the floppy, or
during the file import from a floppy.
Figure 5-3: Export Figure 5-4: Import
File Selection Screen
One of the following screens is displayed when selecting a file.
Figure 5-5 A: File Selection, Save Figure 5-5 B: File Selection, Open
On these screens, the directory, the files, and the file type can be selected.
• "DONE": performs the desired action on the selected file

• "CANCEL": cancels the operation
• "DELETE": deletes the selected *.csv file. Only a *.csv file can de deleted.
A confirmation screen is open to confirm the deletion.
• "EDIT": allows for editing of the file name. The alphanumeric keyboard
screen is displayed.

Note: In the following section, some parts of the software contain multiple
screens for the component selected. The screen number is indicated along
with the total number of screens for that component. For example Main
Screen 1/2 indicates this is screen one of 2 screens.
5.9.6 Main Screens
When the DIASER.EXE software is started, the Service software access screen is
displayed. A level 1, level 2 or level 3 password can be entered by selecting the field
next to the word "password".
Figure 5-6:
Password Screen
An alphanumeric keypad will appear. Once the password of level 1 or level 2 is

entered, the first of the 2 main screens is displayed. If a level 3 password is entered,
the system goes directly to the SETUP procedure.
Figures 5-7 and 5-8 show the 2 main screens:
Figure 5-7: Main Screen 1 Figure 5-8: Main Screen 2
These 2 main screens allow access to some modules of the D-10.

• "SYRINGE": access to the Syringe Module

• "DEGASSER": access to the Degasser Module
• "DETECTOR": access to the Detector Module
• "RACK DOOR": access to the Rack Door Module
• "RACK INTRO.": access to the Rack Introduction Module
• "FRONT COVER": access to the Front Cover Module
• "HP: PUMP + VALVE": access to the High-Pressure Module: High
Pressure Pump and Valve
• "HP: SENSOR CALIB.": access to the High-Pressure Module: High
Pressure Sensor Calibration
• "HP: FLOW RATE CALIB.": access to the High-Pressure Module: Flow
Rate Calibration
• "THERMAL CONTROL": access to the High-Pressure Module, Thermal
control
• "SAMPLE ARM": access to the Sampling Arm Module
In addition, the following buttons are available:
• "ALL STATUS": status of all components of the instrument

• "LAUNCH INIT": initialization of all the stepper motors
• "SHUTDOWN": proper shutdown of the instrument
• "VERSIONS": display of the current software versions
• "ERRORS": display of the error list
• "MISC": access to miscellaneous functions
5.9.7 "SYRINGE" Button
Selecting the "SYRINGE" button, in the main screen 1/2, opens a set of 6 screens for
testing the Syringe Module.
Syringe Module 1/6: Manual Control of the Valves of the Syringe Module
Figure 5-9:
D-10 Syringe module (1/6)
• "START LIQUID PUMP": start/stop of the liquid pump

• "START DILUTION VALVE": start/stop of the dilution well pinch valve

• "START WASH VALVE": start/stop of the probe wash well pinch valve
• "START 3 WAY VALVE": start/stop of the 3 way valve associated with the
syringe
• "Valve status": indicates the status for each pinch valve (dilution and wash)
and for the 3 way syringe valve (open or closed). For the 3-way valve, the
"open" status corresponds to the "normally open" side (probe side).
• "sense" values: indication of the electrical current intensity that is sensed
through the different devices. This function is currently not available.
• "GRAPHIC": currently not in use.
Syringe Module: 2/6: Syringe manual control
Figure 5-10:
• "3 way valve position": selection of the 3-way valve position

- "needle": the syringe is connected to the probe (standby position)
- "wash": the syringe is connected to the wash solution bottle
• "Direction": selection of the direction of the fluid
- "Aspiration": filling movement of the syringe
- "Delivery": dispense movement of the syringe
• "Amplitude": selection of the amplitude of the movement, in motor steps or
volume (uL)
• "steps": selection of the unit of the amplitude, steps or microliters (uL).
2400 motor steps correspond to 1 mL.
• “Speed Index”: speed of syringe movement.
• "Sensor status": status of the sensor for the syringe control
- "obstructed": indicates the home position (syringe empty). The home
flag is in the slot of the optical sensor.
- "free": indicates that the optical slot sensor is "on" (light is coming from
the emitter to the receiver).
• "START THE SELECTED MOVEMENT": moves the syringe using the
parameters shown on the screen.
• "GO TO HOME POSITION": moves the syringe to home position. The
liquid is delivered to the selected 3-way valve position.
• " 1 ML ASPIRATION": starts the aspiration movement (2400 steps on the
motor). The liquid is aspirated from the selected 3-way valve position.

Warning: the syringe movement cannot be stopped once it is launched.
Syringe Module 3/6
Figure 5-11:
• "Sample preparation sequence": step by step control of whole blood tube

preparation from aspiration through the double dilution in the dilution well.
The tube # can be edited. The test is also selected as all the parameters
for sample preparation are from the corresponding test parameters. This
"Sample preparation sequence" functionality is currently not available.
• "SYRINGE PRIMING": starts the syringe priming sequence. It primes only
the syringe and assumes that the wash line in the degasser is already
primed.
• "DIL WELL WASH": starts the sequence of washing the dilution well. This
functionality is currently not available.
• "PROBE WASH": starts the sequence of washing the probe. This
• "INT. WASTE BOTTLE CHECK": starts the sequence for the test of the
internal waste bottle. A new screen is open: "Waste bottle check". (Figure
5-12)

Syringe module 3A/6: Waste bottle check
Figure 5-12:
D-10 Syringe module (3A/6)
This screen shows the result of the current waste bottle check and indicates the
waste bottle check parameters.
• "Waste Vacuum": current value of the vacuum measured by the vacuum

sensor on the internal waste circuit. The unit of the value appears in the
box next to the value.
• "points": unit of vacuum. Options are: kPa, psi, Volts (voltage delivered by
the sensor) and points (8 bit Analog to Digital converter result).
• "Time": corresponds to the time the system needs to reach the Vacuum
level defined in the parameters. Unit: s = seconds.
• “Result of the check”: indicates the waste check has passed ("OK") or
failed ("FAILED").
• "Vacuum level": level defined as the limit for a good internal vacuum circuit.
Unit: kPa, psi, Volts, points.
• "Time Out": maximum time allowed to obtain the Vacuum level when the
pump is started. Unit: s.
• "RESTART": starts a waste bottle check again
• "CLOSE": closes the waste bottle check window.

Syringe module 4/6 and 5/6: sample preparation parameters
Figure 5-13: D-10 Syringe module (4/6) Figure 5-14: D-10 Syringe module (5/6)
These two screens show, for the selected test, the values of the most important
parameters of sample preparation. These values are found in the corresponding *.ini
files. These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding files only if the
user has entered the level 2 password.
• "Test": selection of the test. The displayed parameters correspond to the

selected test.
• "1st dilution Sample volume (ul)": sample volume aspirated from the
primary tube for the first dilution. Unit: uL.
• "1st dilution Diluent volume (ul)": diluent volume for the first dilution
• "2nd dilution Sample volume (ul)": sample volume aspirated from dilution
well for the second dilution. Unit; uL.
• "2nd dilution Diluent volume (ul)": diluent volume for the second dilution.
Unit: uL.
• "Z sample pos. for tube (strips)": Z sampling position of the probe for
primary tubes. Unit: number of motor steps.
• "Z sample pos. for microvial (strips)": Z sampling position of the probe for
microvial tubes. Unit: number of motor steps.
• "From Dil. Well to Valve vol. (ul)": volume aspirated by the syringe from the
dilution well into the sample loop. Unit: uL.
• "Microvial Sample Vol. (ul)": volume of sample aspirated by the syringe
from the microvial. Unit: uL.
• "Microvial add. Vol. to Valve (ul)": additional air volume aspirated by the
syringe, after aspiration of the sample from the microvial. Unit: uL.
• "Injection delay": amount of time the sample remains in the sample loop
before it is injected. Unit: 0.1s.
• "Injection valve speed index": speed of the rotation of the high pressure 7
port valve. Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).

• "DONE": saves the modified parameters. A verification message is

displayed to confirm the modification. The "DONE" button is usable only if
a modification is made and if the password level 2 was entered.
• "CANCEL": cancels the modifications. A verification screen is displayed to
confirm the cancellation. The "CANCEL" button is usable only if a
modification is made and if the password level 2 was entered.
Syringe Module 6/6: Internal Waste Bottle Check Parameters
Figure 5-15:
This screen shows the values of the internal waste parameters. These values are in
the profile.ini file. These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding files
only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• "Vacuum level": level defined as the limit for a good internal vacuum circuit.
Unit: converter points.
• "Time Out": maximum time allowed to obtain the Vacuum level if the pump
is started. Unit:s.

5.9.8 "DEGASSER" Button
Selecting the "DEGASSER" button, in the main screen 1/2, opens a set of 4 screens
for testing the Degasser module.
Degasser Module 1/4
Figure 5-16:
D-10 Degasser module (1/4)
• "START PUMP": can start the degasser vacuum pump. The real time clock
of the MC processor continuously checks the vacuum. If the target value of
the vacuum ("high vacuum", see Degasser module 3/4) is reached, the
pump is automatically switched off.
• "STOP PUMP": can stop the degasser vacuum pump. The real time clock
of the MC processor continuously checks the vacuum. If the target value of
the vacuum ("low vacuum", see Degasser module 3/4) is not reached, the
pump is automatically switched on.
• " Vacuum": current vacuum level of the degasser measured by the vacuum
sensor of the degasser. The unit of measure appears in the box next to the
value.
• "points": unit of vacuum. Options are: kPa, psi, Volts (voltage delivered by
the sensor) and points (8 bit Analog to Digital converter result).
• "sense": indication of the electrical current intensity that is sensed through
the vacuum pump. This function is currently not available.
• "VACUUM CONTROL ENABLE (FOR TEST)": field to be selected. When
selected, the automatic switch off/on is disengaged. In this case, the
threshold levels indicated on the screen are used for this test. This
• "Thresholds for test use","low" and "high": thresholds for the vacuum pump
control if the "VACUUM CONTROL ENABLE (FOR TEST) is activated.
This functionality is currently not available.

Degasser Module 2/4: System Flush
Figure 5-17:
• "BUFFER 1": starts the automatic priming of the buffer 1 line through the
degasser. Approximate duration: 10 minutes.
• "BUFFER 2": starts the automatic priming of the buffer 2 line through the
• "WASH": starts the automatic priming of the wash line through the
• "ALL": starts the automatic priming of all the lines through the degasser.
Approximate duration: 23 minutes."
• "STOP": can be used to interrupt any of the priming sequences described
above.
• "Bubble detector signal" for "Buffer1", "Buffer2", "Wash": this functionality
is currently not available.
• "GRAPHIC": currently not in use
Degasser Module 3/4: Threshold Values of the System
Figure 5-18:
This screen shows the values of the parameters of the degasser control and the
bubble detection. These values are found in the *.ini files. These values can be
modified and saved in the corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2
password.

• "Low Vacuum": when the degasser vacuum is less than this value the
degasser pump is switched on. The unit of measure appears in the box
next to the value. The parameter is saved in "points" unit.
• "points": unit of the "low vacuum" value. Options are: kPa, psi, Volts
(voltage delivered by the sensor) and points (8 bit Analog to Digital
converter result)
• "High Vacuum": when the degasser vacuum is greater than this value, the
degasser pump is switched off. The unit of measure appears in the box
next to the "low vacuum" value. The parameter is saved in "points" unit.
• "Time Out": maximum time allowed to obtain the Vacuum level when the
pump is started. Unit: s.
• "Wash bubble det.", Buf. 1 bubble det.", "Buf.2 bubble det.": threshold
levels for the bubble detection. This functionality is currently not available.
Degasser Module 4/4: Flush Parameters in the System
Figure 5-19:
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the flush of the system.
These values are found in the *.ini files. These values can be modified and saved in
the corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• "Buf 1/2, Wash Syr. Asp. Speed”: index to define the speed of the
aspiration of buffer by the syringe. No unit.
• "Buf 1/2, Wash Syr. Deli. Speed”: index to define the speed of the delivery
of buffer by the syringe. No unit.
• "Number of strokes, Buffer1/2": number of syringe movements for the
priming of the buffer 1 and buffer 2 line.

• "Number of strokes, Wash": number of syringe movements for the priming

of the Wash line.
5.9.9 "DETECTOR" Button
Selecting the "DETECTOR" button, in the main screen 1/2, opens a set of screens
for testing the Detector module.
Detector Module 1/4: Control and Adjustment of the Detector
Figure 5-20:
D-10 Detector module (1/4)
• "Load gradient file": selection of the file (*.hpl) for a gradient, if the user
wants to run a gradient.
• "Selected log file": selection of the file (*.csv) for the logging of the results
of the detector when the logging is started.
• "Set Light": the light intensity parameter, from 0 to 255. The default value is
150 and corresponds to a direct current in the LED of 15 mA. When this
value is set to 0, the LED is switched off.
• "Set Gain": numerical gain in the reference channel of the detector, from 0-
255. The default value is 64. This gain is automatically adjusted, before
each sample, in order to adjust the baseline of the chromatogram to a
given level which is typically 0.020 AU (absorption units).
• "Pump speed: manual": flow rate (mL/min) or speed of the pump (rpm),
used for the manual control of the pump.
• "ml/min": unit of the "Pump speed". The options are: ml/min or rpm
(revolutions/minute).
• "Pump speed: gradient": flow rate (ml/min unit) or speed of the pump (unit:
rpm), in the selected gradient file. Unit: mL/min or rpm.

• "START GRAD. + LOG": start/stop of the gradient selected into the "Load
gradient file" area (*.hpl files) and start/stop of the recording of the detector
values into the log file selected in the "Selected log file" area. The flow rate
used in the gradient file (*.hpl file) is displayed in the "pump speed
gradient" field.
• "START LOG": start/stop of the recording of the detector values into the
log file selected in the "Selected log file" field. The file is a *.csv file and
can be exported (see detector 2/4) for analysis.
• "START PUMP": manual start/stop of the high pressure pump for a flow
rate chosen in the "Pump speed" "manual" field.
• "START PROP. VALVE": manual start/stop of the proportioning valve.
• "Abs. Meas.": light measurement in the sample channel of the detector.
The result is given in 24 bit converter points (from 0 to 16,777,215).
• "Ref. Meas.": light reference measurement in the reference channel of the
detector. The result is given in 24 bit converter points (from 0 to
16,777,215).
• "Log": relative absorption. It is equal to LOG10 (Reference measurement/
Sample measurement). The result is given in Absorption Unit (AU).
• "Pressure": current pressure in the high pressure circuit. The unit of
measure appears in the box next to the value.
• "psi": pressure unit. The options are psi or kg/cm2.
Detector Module 2/4: Export gradient result file
Figure 5-21:
• " EXPORT RESULT FILE": export a result file to a floppy disk. The
explorer screen is shown for the selection of the file to export.
16,777,215).
Sample measurement). The result is given in Absorption Unit (AU).

• "Pressure": current pressure in the high pressure circuit. . The unit of

• "psi": pressure unit. Options are psi or kg/cm2.
• "Baseline adjustment sequence": currently not in use
Note: The baseline adjustment process consists of a software adjustment of

the gain on the reference measurement channel (numeric potentiometer) in
order to obtain an absorption defined by the calculated value log10
(1+BaseLinePercent). This adjustment is automatically done before each
sample. The values obtained for the light and the gain adjustment are stored in
the chromalog.txt file.
Detector Module 3/4: Detector parameters in the system (1/2)
Figure 5-22:
This screen shows the values of some parameters used for the detector, based on
the selected test. These values are found in the *.ini files. These values can be
password.
• "test": selection of the test: HbA1C or Hb A2/F/A1c.

• "Sample rate index": index to define the measurement rate.
• "Reference adjustment": flag for the selection of the automatic baseline
adjustment during the run. If the value is "1", the adjustment will be done
during the run.
• "Light source intensity": default value of the light source intensity.
• "Reference gain value": default value of the gain adjustment in the
reference channel.

• “Chromalog.txt values”: reference gain and light level parameter values,

reference and absorption last values, obtained during the last run and
stored in the chromalog.txt file.
Detector Module 4/4: Detector parameters in the system (2/2)
Figure 5-23:
This screen shows the values of some other parameters used for the detector based
on the selected test. These values are found in the *.ini files. These values can be
password.
• "test": selection of the test: Hb A1C or Hb A2/F/A1c.

• "Maximum absorption": maximum authorized for the absorption
measurement. When this value is reached during the baseline adjustment,
the intensity of the LED source is reduced.
• "Minimum absorption": minimum level for the absorption measurement.
When this value is reached, the intensity of the LED source is increased
until the value is higher than the "Typical Absorption" value.
• "Typical Absorption": value described above.
• "Maximum Light source intensity", maximum value for the LED electrical
current. When this value is reached, an alarm is given for the replacement
of the LED source.
• "Baseline percentage": baseline adjustment value. Unit: 10E-4.The
baseline value is given by the expression log10 (1+BaseLinePercent). For
a value of 470, the baseline is 0.02 AU.

5.9.10 "RACK DOOR" Button
Selecting the "RACK DOOR" button, in the main screen 1/2, opens a set of 2
screens for testing the Rack Door Module.
Rack Door module 1/2
Figure 5-24:
D-10 Rack door module (1/2)
• "START RACK DOOR SOLENOID": switch the rack door locking solenoid
on or off. When the solenoid is powered, it will be switched off
automatically after 10 seconds, to avoid overheating.
• "Solenoid sense": indication of the electrical current intensity that is sensed
through the rack door solenoid. This function is currently not available.
• "Closed door sensor": status of the closed door detection sensor
- "obstructed": the door is in an intermediate position: the home flag is in
the slot of the optical sensor
- "free", the optical slot sensor is "on" (light is coming from the emitter to
the receiver). The door is completely closed.
• "Open door sensor": status of the open door detection sensor
- "obstructed", the door is in an intermediate position: the home flag is in
- "free", it indicates that the optical slot sensor is "on" (light is coming
from the emitter to the receiver). The door is completely open.
• "OPEN THE DOOR": launches the sequence to open the rack door.
• "CLOSE THE DOOR": launches the sequence to close the rack door.

Rack Door Module 2/2: parameters
Figure 5-25:
D-10 Rack Door Module (2/2)
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the control of the rack door.
These values are found in the profile.ini file. These values can be modified and
saved in the corresponding file only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• "Run with rack door": for R&D or manufacturing use only. It indicates if the
system considers that a rack door is mounted and runs well in the
instrument ("yes") or not ("no"). The "no" option allows a run without rack
door (the door is always in the open position).
• "Rack door monitor": indicates if the system continuously checks the rack
door during the run ("yes") or not ("no"). If the rack door is monitored ("yes"
option), the run is stopped when the rack door is open accidentally.
5.9.11 "RACK INTRODUCTION" Button
Selecting the "RACK INTRODUCTION" button, in the main screen 1/2, opens a
screen for testing the rack introduction module.

Figure 5-26:
D-10 Rack introduction module (1/1)
• "Rack input sensor status": status of the rack input detection sensor
(reflective sensor)
- "reflection", a rack is in front of the sensor and reflects the infra-red light
source of the sensor to its receiver
- "no reflection", no rack in front of the sensor
• "Rack output sensor status": status of the rack output detection sensor
(reflective sensor)
- "reflection", a rack is on the front of the sensor and reflects the infra-red
light source of the sensor to its receiver
- "no reflection", no rack in front of the sensor
• "Rack motor sense": indication of the electrical current intensity that is
sensed through the rack motor. This function is currently not available.
• "RACK MOTOR: IN, START": switch the rack motor on or off in the
direction ''rack introduction"
• "RACK MOTOR: OUT, START": switch the rack motor on or off in the
direction ''rack ejection"
• "LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION": starts a rack introduction sequence
• "LAUNCH RACK EJECTION": starts a rack ejection sequence
• "GRAPHIC", currently not in use.

5.9.12 "FRONT COVER" Button
Selecting the "FRONT COVER" button, in the main screen 1/2, opens a set of 2
screens for testing the front cover module.
Front Cover Module 1/2: Start Front Cover Solenoid
Figure 5-27:
D-10 Front cover module (1/2)
• " START FRONT COVER SOLENOID ": switch the front cover solenoid on
or off to lock or unlock the front cover. The front cover is locked when the
solenoid is in the standby mode. When the solenoid is powered, it will be
switched off automatically after 10 seconds to avoid overheating.
• "Solenoid sense": indication of the electrical current intensity that is sensed
through the front cover solenoid. This function is currently not available.
• "Front cover sensor status": status of the front cover position sensor
(reflective sensor)
- "reflection", a metal flag for closed door detection is in front of the
sensor and reflects the infra-red light source of the sensor to its
receiver. The front cover is closed.
- no reflection", the front cover is open
Front Cover Module 2/2: Front Door Parameters in the System
Figure 5-28:
D-10 Front cover module (2/2)

This screen shows the value of the parameter used for the control of the front cover.
This value is found in the profile.ini file. It can be modified and saved in the file only if
the user has entered the level 2 password.
• "Front door monitor": indicates if the system continuously checks the front
door during the run ("yes") or not ("no"). If the front door is monitored, the
run is stopped when the front door is open.
Comment: when the front door is open, the power supply of the sample
arm motors is switched off. If a run is in progress, it will be stopped by a
motor error.

5.9.13 "ALL STATUS" Button
Selecting the "ALL STATUS" button, in the main screen 1/2, opens a set of 2 screens
that show the following:
• operational status of subassemblies

• sensor status
• status of devices (valve, solenoids, …)
The displayed values are refreshed approximately twice per second.
All Status 1/2:
Figure 5-29:
D-10 All status (1/2)

• "X axis busy", "Z axis busy", "TH axis busy", "Syr. Axis busy": status of the
X , Z , TH and Syringe movement
- "busy", motor running
- "free", motor in the standby mode
• "X axis sensor", "Z axis sensor", "TH axis sensor": status of the axis sensor
of the X, Z, and TH motors
- "obstructed": the optical sensor is "off": infrared light from the emitter
cannot arrive at the receiver because of the position of the slotted disk
(full part)
- "free": the optical sensor is "on. Infrared light from the emitter arrives at
the receiver because of the slot on the disk.
• "X home sensor", "Z home sensor", "TH home sensor": the status of the
home sensor of the X, Z, and TH motors
- "obstructed": the optical sensor is "off": infrared light from the emitter
cannot arrive at the receiver because of the home flag in the slot of the
optical sensor (home position area)
- "free": the optical slot sensor is "on". Infrared light from the emitter
arrives at the receiver.
• "Hall effect sensor": detection of a magnet in front of the sensor
- "magnet"
- "no magnet"
• "Tube height sensor": status of the tube height sensor
- "obstructed": the optical sensor is "off". Infrared light from the emitter
optical sensor.
- "free": the optical sensor is "on Infrared light from the emitter arrives at
the receiver.
• "Syr. home": status of the sensor for the syringe control
- "obstructed": the syringe is empty; the home flag is in the slot of the
optical sensor of the syringe (home position).
- "free": the optical slot sensor is "on" (light from the emitter reaches the
receiver)
• "HP valve”: status of the high pressure valve
- "load": valve in the load position (home position)
- "inject": valve in the inject position
- "prime": valve in the prime position
- " not defined": valve in an intermediate, not controlled position
• "Open door sensor": status of the open door detection sensor
- "obstructed”: the door is in an intermediate position; the metal flag is in
the slot of the optical sensor.
- "free": the optical slot sensor is "on" (light from the emitter reaches the
receiver). The door is completely open.
• "Closed door sensor": status of the closed door detection sensor
- "obstructed": the door is in an intermediate position; the metal flag is in

- "free": the optical sensor is "on" (light from the emitter reaches the
receiver). The door is completely closed.
All Status 2/2:
Figure 5-30:
D-10 All Status (2/2)
• "Rack input": status of the rack input detection sensor (reflective sensor)
- "reflection": a rack is in front of the sensor and reflects the infra-red light
- "no reflection": no rack in front of the sensor
• "Rack output": status of the rack output detection sensor (reflective sensor)
- "reflection": a rack is in front of the sensor and reflects the infra-red light
- "no reflection": no rack in front of the sensor
• "Rack motor": status of the rack introduction motor
- "started": motor running
- "stopped": motor in the standby mode
• "Front cover": status of the front cover sensor (reflective sensor)
− "reflection": a metal flag for closed door detection is in front of the
sensor and reflects the infra-red light source of the sensor to its
receiver. The front door is closed.
− no reflection": the front door is open
• "Front solenoid": status of the front cover solenoid
- "started": powered solenoid
- "stopped": solenoid in the standby mode
• "Liquid pump": status of the liquid pump
- "started": pump running
- "stopped": pump in the standby mode
• "Dilution valve": status of the dilution well pinch valve
- "started": powered valve
- "stopped": valve in the standby mode
• "Wash valve": status of the probe wash well pinch valve

• "Syr. 3 way valve": the status of the 3-way valve associated with the
syringe
5.9.14 "LAUNCH INIT" Button
Selecting this button, from the Main1/2 screen, initializes all the stepper motors.
• HP valve stepper motor (home position = load position)

• Z motor (probe in home position)
• Tube Holder (home position)
• X motor (arm in the home position)
• Syringe motor (home position)
For the initialization of the syringe motor, the liquid pump is also switched on in order
to remove the liquid from the dilution well.
5.9.15 "SHUTDOWN" Button
Selecting this button, in the Main1/2 screen, initializes the process for a shutdown.
• A message box opens for confirmation.

• If the user selects "no", the shutdown process is aborted; if the user selects
"yes", the shutdown process is started.
• A message appears "Please wait while the system writes unsaved data to
the disk". If there is no external monitor, this message is not seen in its
entirety.
• After several seconds a new message is displayed: "It is now safe to turn
off your computer". The ON/OFF switch can now be switched to the OFF
(O) position.
5.9.16 "HP: PUMP + VALVE" Button
Selecting the "HP: PUMP + VALVE" button, in the main screen 2/2, opens a set of 16
screens for testing the High-Pressure Pump and Valves.

HP Module: Pump, Valve: 1/16: Control of the Pump and Valve
Figure 5-31:
D-10 HP module: pump, valve (1/16)
• "Flow rate/pump speed": flow rate (ml/min) or its translation in pump

speed (rpm). The value can be modified.
• "ml/min": unit of "Flow rate/Pump speed". The options are ml/min or rpm
• "START PUMP ": switch the high-pressure pump on or off, for the selected
flow rate.
• "START PROP. VALVE": switch the proportioning valve on or off.
16,777,215).
Sample measurement). Unit (AU).
• "HP Pump sense": indication of the electrical current intensity that is
sensed through the high pressure pump. This function is currently not
available.
• "Prop. Valve sense": indication of the electrical current intensity that is
sensed through the proportioning valve. This function is currently not
available.
• "% Buffer 2": percentage of buffer 2 being pumped through the system.
The user defines the percent before selecting Start Pump and Mixing.
• "START PUMP AND MIXING": switch the high-pressure pump on or off for
the selected flow rate and for a mixing of the selected buffer 2 percentage.

HP Module: Pump, Valve: 2/16: Gradient Running.
Figure 5-32:
• "Load gradient file": selection of the file (*.hpl) for a gradient

• "Selected log file", selection of the file (*.csv) for the logging of the results
of the detector
• "START GRADIENT": start/stop of the selected gradient and the logging of
the results into the selected file
• "GRADIENT FILE IMPORT": import a *.hpl file from the floppy disk to the
hard disk
• "RESULT FILE EXPORT": export a *.csv file to the floppy disk
• "Ref. Meas.": light reference measure in the reference channel of the
16,777,215).
Sample measurement). Unit (AU).
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 3/16: HPPC Status
Figure 5-33:

This screen shows the HPPC status and gives low level information. For R&D use
only.
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 4/16: 7 Port, 3 Position HP Valve Control
Figure 5-34:
• "HOME MVT (RESET)": rotates the valve from any position to the home
(load) position.
• "TO LOAD POSITION": positions the valve in the LOAD position, when it is
in one of the two other working positions (INJECT or PRIME).
• "TO INJECT POSITION": positions the valve in the INJECT position, when
it is in the LOAD position.
• "TO PRIME POSITION": positions the valve in the PRIME position, when it
is in the LOAD position
• "sensors status": status of the 3 sensors of the 7 port, 3 position High-
Pressure Valve. There are 3 types of indications shown:
- decoded information, "load", "inject", "prime" or "not defined"
- decimal code 5, 6, 4 or other value
- binary code, for each sensor: 0 or 1
• "7 port, 3 pos. Valve Speed Index": speed of the rotation of the high-
pressure 7-port valve. Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
NOTE: In order to go from PRIME to INJECT, the user MUST return to LOAD
position first.

HP Module: Pump, Valve: 5/16: 7 position, 3 port HP valve, parameters in the

system
Figure 5-35:
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the 7 port, 3 pos. HP valve
control based on the selected test. These values are found in the profile2.ini files.
These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding files only if the user
has entered the level 2 password.
• "7 port, 3 pos. Valve Speed Index", speed of the rotation of the high-
pressure 7-port valve. Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 6/16: High Pressure piston flush
Figure 5-36:
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the piston flush. These
values are found in the profile.ini file. These values can be modified and saved in the
corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• "START PISTON FLUSH": start the piston flush sequence

• "Syringe Aspiration Speed": speed of the syringe aspiration movement.
Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).

• "Syringe Delivery Speed": speed of the syringe delivery movement.

Index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
• "Number of strokes": number of syringe aspiration/delivery movements
for the piston flush
displayed to confirm the modification. The "DONE" button is usable only
if a modification is made and if the password level 2 was entered.
• "CANCEL": cancels the modifications. A verification screen is displayed
to confirm the cancellation. The "CANCEL" button is usable only if a
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 7/16: Aging of the proportioning valve
This screen is used for manufacturing only.
Figure 5-37:
• "% of Buffer 2": percentage of Buffer 2 during the valve aging process
• "Duration of the test": time in minutes
• "Flow rate": working flow rate for the test.
• "START PROPORTIONING VALVE AGING": start/stop the proportioning
valve aging process (start of the HP pump for the displayed flow rate and
launch the gradient for the selected buffer 2 percentage)
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 8/16: High-Pressure Pump and Valve Parameters
Figure 5-38:

This screen shows the values of the parameters of the high-pressure pump. These
values are found in the instrument.ini file. These values can be modified and saved
in the corresponding files only if the user has entered the level 2 password.
• "WC (waiting Count)": phase shift between the cam flag signal and the
filling phase start. Unit: °.
• "FC (Filling Count)": filling phase angle. Unit: °.
• "Test selection": selection of the test: A1C, A2/F/A1c. The following
parameters correspond to the selected test.
• "Safety High Pressure limit": limit for the HPPC pump controller. If the
instantaneous pressure is higher than this limit, the pump is stopped.
• "Run High Pressure limit": high limit of the pressure during the run. If the
mean value of the pressure is higher than this limit, the run is stopped.
• "Meas. Number for High limit average": defines the number of values of the
pressure for the calculation of the mean value used for the comparison to
the Run High Pressure limit. The sample rate is approximately 2 Hz.
• "Run Low Pressure limit": low limit of the pressure during the run. If the
mean value of the pressure is lower than this limit, the run is stopped.
• "Meas. Number for Low limit average": defines the number of values of the
pressure for the calculation of the mean value used for the comparison to
the Run Low Pressure limit. The sample rate is approximately 2 Hz.
HP Module: pump, valve: 9/16: High Pressure Pump parameter determination
Figure 5-39:
• "Load gradient file": selection of the file (*.hpl) for a gradient. The selected
file is loaded into the HPPC controller.
• "START TEST": start/stop of the test by running of the selected gradient
• "START PUMP": start/stop of the high pressure pump, for the displayed
flow rate
• "START PROP. VALVE": manual start/stop of the proportioning valve
• "WC (Waiting Count)": value used for the determination. Unit: °.
• "FC (Filling Count)": value used for the determination. Unit: °.

NOTE: When these WC/FC values are modified, they will be taken into
account by the system only after a load gradient file selection. Even if
the gradient file is the same as during the previous test, a modification
of the WC and /or FC values is applied only after a new selection of the
gradient file (and therefore a new loading into the HPPC controller).
• "Flow rate ": flow rate (unit in ml/min) or its translation in pump speed (unit
in rpm). The value is found in the gradient file.
• "ml/min", unit of flow rate. The options are ml/min or pump speed (rpm).
• "Pressure": current pressure in the high-pressure circuit. The unit of
• "psi", pressure unit. The options are psi or kg/cm2.
16,777,215).
• "Log", absorption measured by the detector. Unit: AU.
• GRAPHIC", currently not in use.
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 10/16: High-Pressure Pump parameter verification,

Absorption in static conditions.
Figure 5-40:
of the detector
• "START TEST": start/stop the test by running the selected gradient
• "START PUMP": start/stop the high-pressure pump, for the displayed flow
rate
• "START CALCULATION": starts the calculation of the buffer 1 and buffer 2
absorption, and of the relative absorption of buffer 2. The calculation is
done on the selected *.csv file.
• "buffer 1": mean value for buffer 1 absorption

• "Rel.”: relative absorption of buffer 2 versus buffer 1

• "Test remaining time", remaining time before the end of the complete test.
Unit: minute, second.
• "ml/min": unit of the flow rate. The options are ml/min or pump speed
(rpm).
16,777,215).
• "Log": absorption measured by the detector. Unit: AU.
• GRAPHIC": currently not in use
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 11/16: High-Pressure Pump parameter verification:

Dilamex test
Figure 5-41:
of the detector
• "START TEST": start/stop of the test by running of the selected gradient
• "WC (waiting Count)": value used for the test. Unit: °.
• "FC (Filling Count)": value used for the test. Unit: °.

• "START or STOP PUMP": start/stop the high pressure pump, for the
displayed flow rate
• "Test remaining time": remaining time before the end of the complete test.
• "ml/min": unit of the "Flow rate ". The options are ml/min or rpm
• "Pressure", current pressure in the high-pressure circuit. The unit of
16,777,215).
• GRAPHIC": currently not in use.
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 12/16: High-Pressure Pump parameters verification:

Calculation of the Dilamex test results.
Figure 5-42:
• "Selected log file": selection of the file (*.csv) for the calculation of the
results
• "START CALCULATION": starts the calculation of the buffer 1, 50% buffer
2 and 100% buffer 2 absorption. The calculation is done on the selected
*.csv file.
• "50% buffer 2": mean value for the 50% buffer 2 absorption
• "Relatives values": relative absorption and relative percentage of buffer 1,
50% buffer 2 and 100% buffer 2. The relative value (in AU) of the 100%
buffer 2 absorption is compared to the 100 % buffer 2 relative value

obtained under static conditions (see screen 10/16, fig 4-40). The result of
the comparison is given near to the 100% buffer 2 relative value field.
indicates that the difference is within the tolerances
indicates that the difference is out of range
? indicates that the static value is not available
• The relative value (in %) of the 50% of buffer 2 absorption is compared to
the theoretical 50% value. The result of the comparison is given near to
the 50% buffer 2 relative value (in %) field.
HP Module: Pump, Valve: 13/16: High-Pressure Pump parameters verification: Step

gradient test
Figure 5-43:
• "Selected log file": selection of the file (*.csv) for logging the results of the
detector
• "WC (waiting Count)": value used for the test. Unit: °.
• "FC (Filling Count)": value used for the test. Unit: °.
• "START PUMP": start/stop of the high pressure pump, for the displayed
flow rate

• "ml/min": unit of flow rate. The options are: ml/min or pump speed (rpm).
16,777,215).
• "Log": absorption measured by the detector. Unit: AU

calculation of the step gradient test results
Figure 5-44:
results
• "START CALCULATION": starts the calculation of the step gradient
results. The calculation is done on the selected *.csv file.
• "100% buffer 2": mean value for the 100% buffer 2 absorption. The
relative value (in AU) of the 100% buffer 2 absorption is compared to the
100 % buffer 2 relative value obtained under static conditions (see screen
10/16, fig 4-40). The result of the comparison is given near to the 100%
buffer 2 relative value field.
? indicates that the static value is not available
• "Calc. %": calculated relative % for each step. The relative value (in %)
of each step is compared to the tolerance window. The result of the
comparison is given near to each % value.


HP Module: Pump, Valve: 15/16: High-Pressure pump parameters verification:

Continuous gradient test
Figure 5-45:
• "Selected log file": selection of the file (*.csv) for logging the results of the
detector
• "WC (waiting Count)", value used for the test. Unit: °.
• "FC (Filling Count)", value used for the test. Unit: °.
• "START PUMP": start/stop the high-pressure pump, for the displayed flow
rate
• "ml/min”: unit of the flow rate. The options are ml/min or pump speed
(rpm).
• "psi”,: pressure unit. The options are psi or kg/cm2.


16,777,215).

Continuous Gradient test result
Figure 5-46:
results
• "START CALCULATION": starts the display of the step gradient results.
The calculation is done on the selected *.csv file.
• "visualization of the continuous gradient test": display of the continuous
gradient result

5.9.17 "HP: SENSOR CALIB" Button
Selecting the "HP: SENSOR CALIB" button, in the main screen 2/2, opens a set of 2
screens for the calibration of the high-pressure sensor.
HP Module: sensor calibration: 1/2: High-Pressure sensor calibration parameters:

Visualization and modification
Figure 5-47:
D-10 HP module: sensor calibration (1/2)
This screen shows the values of the parameters of the high-pressure sensor. These
• "High Pressure Sensor Offset": current value of the HP sensor offset

• "High Pressure Sensor Gain": current value of the HP sensor Gain

HP Module: Sensor Calibration: 2/2: High-Pressure sensor calibration, New

calibration
Figure 5-48:
D-10 HP module: sensor calibration (2/2)

• "Pressure: low value": corresponds to the low value point used for the
calibration.
• "Pressure: high value": corresponds to the high value point used for the
calibration.
• "Internal meas.": displays the values of the system for the low value point
and for the high value point, after memorization.
• "External ref.": edited values. They are the pressures measured by an
externally calibrated reference instrument, corresponding to the low value
point and the high value point for the calibration.
• "MEMORIZE": stores the internal current measurement and associates it to
the external reference pressure
• "CALCULATION OF THE OFFSET AND THE GAIN": launch the
calculation of the new calibration offset and gain, based on the internal
measurements (low and high values, memorized before) and on the
external reference measurements edited in the system.
• "HP Sensor Offset": current value (from instrument.ini file) and new
calculated value of the sensor offset
• "HP Sensor Gain": current value (from instrument.ini file) and new
calculated value of the sensor gain
• "SAVE RESULTS”: stores the results of the calibration in the system
(instrument.ini file), and replaces the previous values. This button is
available only if a new calibration is done and if the password level 2 was
entered.

5.9.18 "HP: FLOW CALIB." Button
Selecting the "HP: FLOW CALIB" button, in the main screen 2/2, opens a set of 4
screens for the calibration of the flow rate.
HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration: 1/4: flow rate parameters: visualization and
modification
Figure 5-49:
D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. (1/4)
This screen shows the flow rate calibration values. These values are found in the
instrument.ini file. These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding files
• "rule 1", "rule 2", "rule 3": correspond to 3 linear segments used for the
calibration of the flow rate
• "Limit 1 (ml/min)": low limit of each linear segment. Unit: ml/min.
• "Limit 2 (ml/min)": high limit of each linear segment. Unit: ml/min.
• "Slope (rpm/ml/min)": slope of each linear segment. Unit: rpm/ml/min.
• "Intercept (rpm/ml/min)”: intercept for each linear segment. Unit:
rpm/ml/min.

HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration: 2/4: New flow rate calibration - Control and
measurement sheet.
Figure 5-50 A:
• "Method selection": selects the method used for the calibration: "volume"
or "weight". The information displayed on the flow rate calibration 2/4
screen is dependent on the choice of the method.
- "volume" for the measurement of the volume of the liquid delivered by
the pump
- "weight" for the measurement of the weight of the liquid delivered by
the pump
Method Selection "Volume" (Figure 5-50A):
• "Flow rate": selects the theoretical flow rate: 1 ml/min, 1.5 ml/min or 2
ml/min. The corresponding theoretical speed of the high pressure pump
motor is indicated in rpm.
• "Duration": selects the test duration. When the test is launched, the high-
pressure pump is started and is stopped automatically after the selected
duration.
• "START PUMP": manual start/stop of the high-pressure pump, for the
displayed flow rate.
• "START TEST": start/stop the test. When the test is started, the high
pressure pump is switched on, runs for the theoretical selected flow rate,
and the timer starts. When the test is stopped, the high-pressure pump is
switched off and the timer is frozen.
• "Pressure": current pressure in the circuit. Unit: psi or kg/cm2.
• "psi": pressure unit. Options are: psi or kg/cm2.
• "remaining time": indicated the remaining time before the end of the test.
This counter is initialized with the "duration" value.
• "TIMER RESET": set the timer ("remaining time") to the duration value.
• "data entry for calc.": these fields are used to enter the data for the flow
rate calculation:

• "Time": when the test is stopped, this field indicates the delivery time since
the test start. This value can be edited. If it is edited, the time should be
indicated in seconds.
• "Volume": the measured volume of the delivery should be entered here.
The unit is ml.
• "LAUNCH CALC.": launches the calculation of the flow rate. The
calculation is based on the "time" and the "volume" values.
• "data calculation results": these 3 fields indicate the calculated flow rates
for each theoretical flow rate. Unit: ml/min.
• "1.0": indicates the calculated flow rate for the theoretical 1.0 ml/min.
Method Selection "Weight":
Figure 5-50 B:
• "Density": indicates the density of the liquid used for the test. This value
can be edited.
• "Flow rate": selects the theoretical flow rate: 1 ml/min, 1.5 ml/min or 2
ml/min. The corresponding theoretical speed of the high pressure pump
motor is indicated (rpm).
• "Duration": selects the test duration. When the test is launched, the high
pressure pump is started and is stopped automatically after the selected
duration.
• "START TEST": start/stop of the test. When the test is started, the high-
and the timer starts. When the test is stopped, the high pressure pump is
• "remaining time": indicates the remaining time before the end of the test.

rate calculation:
• "Time": when the test is stopped, this field indicates the delivery time since
the test start. This value can be edited. If it is edited, the time should be
indicated in seconds.
• "Weight": the measured weight of the delivered liquid should be entered
here. The unit is g.
• "data calculation results": these 3 fields indicate the calculated flow rates
for each theoretical flow rate. Unit: ml/min.
• "1.0": indicates the calculated flow rate for the theoretical 1.0 ml/min
• "LAUNCH CALC.": launches the calculation of the flow rate. The
HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration: 3/4: New flow rate calibration: Results entry
Figure 5-51:
This screen summarizes the measurements done with the previous (2/4) screen and
calculates the slope and intercept. All the flow rate values can be edited. After
changing of a value, the calculation is automatically done and the new results are
displayed.
• "rule 1", "rule 2", "rule 3": correspond to 3 linear segments used for the
calibration of the flow rate
• "Theor. flow rate": indicates the theoretical flow rate. Can be modified by
entering a new value.
• "Meas. Flow rate": indicates the measured flow rate. Can be modified by
entering a new value.
The other information displayed concerns the results of the calculation.
• "Limit 1 (ml/min)": low limit of each linear segment. Unit: ml/min.

• "Limit 2 (ml/min)": high limit of each linear segment. Unit: ml/min.

• "Slope (rpm/ml/min)": slope of each linear segment. Unit: rpm/ml/min.

• "Intercept (rpm)”: intercept for each linear segment. Unit: rpm.
• "SAVE RESULTS": stores the results of the calibration in the system
available only if a calculation is done and if the password level 2 was
entered.
HP Module: Flow Rate Calibration: 4/4: New flow rate calibration - Verification
Figure 5-52 A:
• "Method selection": selects the method used for the calibration "volume" or
"weight". The information displayed on the flow rate calibration 4/4 screen
is dependent on the choice of the method.
- "volume" for the measurement of the volume of the liquid delivered by
the pump
- "weight" for the measurement of the weight of the liquid delivered by
the pump
Method Selection: :Volume (Figure 5-52A)
• "Flow rate": selects the target flow rate. Unit: ml/min. The corresponding
speed of the high pressure pump motor is indicated (rpm).
pressure pump is started and then stopped automatically after the selected
duration.
• "START TEST": start/stop of the test. When the test is started, the high
and the timer starts. When the test is stopped, the high pressure pump is
• "remaining time", indicates the time remaining before the end of the test.


rate calculation:
− "Time": this field indicates the delivery time since the test was started.
This value can be edited. If it is edited, the time will be indicated in
seconds.
− "Volume": the measured volume of the delivery should be entered here.
The unit is ml.
• "data calculation results", "calculated": this field indicates the calculated
flow rate. Unit: ml/min. Near to the calculated flow rate, there is an
indication of the status of the measured flow rate in comparison to the
theoretical flow rate.
indicates that the measured flow is within the tolerances.
indicates that the measured flow rate is out of range.
• "LAUNCH CALCULATION": launches the calculation of the flow rate. The
Method Selection: Weight
Figure 5-52 B:
• "Density": indicates the density of the liquid used for the test. This value
can be edited.
• "Flow rate”: selects the target flow rate. Unit: ml/min. The corresponding
speed of the high-pressure pump motor is indicated (rpm).
pressure pump is started and then stopped automatically after the selected
duration.
• "START TEST": start/stop of the test. When the test is started, the high-
and the timer starts. When the test is stopped, the high-pressure pump is


• "Remaining time": indicates the time remaining before the end of the test.
• "Data entry for calc.": these fields are used to enter the data for the flow
rate calculation:
− "Time": this field indicates the delivery time since the test was started.
This value can be edited. If it is edited, the time should be indicated in
seconds.
− "Weight": the measured weight of the delivered liquid is entered here.
The unit is g.
• "Data calculation results", "calculated": this field indicates the calculated
flow rate. Unit: ml/min. Near the calculated flow rate, there is an indication
of the status of the measured flow rate in comparison to the theoretical
flow rate.
indicates that the measured flow is within the tolerances.
indicates that the measured flow rate is out of range.
• "LAUNCH CALCULATION": launches the calculation of the flow rate. The
calculation is based on the "time" and the "weight" values.
5.9.19 "THERMAL CONTROL" Button
Selecting the "THERMAL CONTROL" button, in the main screen 2/2, opens a set of
7 screens for testing of the thermal module.
Thermal Module control: 1/7: Current values
Figure 5-53:
D-10 Thermal module control (1/7)
• "Thermal regulation status": indicates if the thermal regulation is on or off.

• "Calculated temperature": result of the calculation of the temperature,
based on the Pt100 ohm sensor, the A/D converter result and the thermal
parameters.

• "Measured temp. (A/D 12 bit)": result of the Analog to Digital conversion of

the Pt100 ohm signal. Unit: converter points (0 to 4095).
• "PWM total value": pulse width modulation value, applied to the Peltier
effect module. Unit: %. This function is currently not available.
• "PWM dyn. part value": pulse width modulation dynamic part value. Unit:
%. This function is currently not available.
• "Peltier module sense": indication of the electrical current intensity that is
sensed through the Peltier effect modules. Unit: converter points. This
function is currently not available.
Thermal Module control: 2/7: automatic control, target value selection
Figure 5-54:
• "STOP THERMAL REGULATION": start/stop the thermal regulation. The

current PWM value is frozen when the regulation is stopped.
• "Calculated temperature": current value. Unit: °C.
• "Target temperature": selection of the target temperature. Unit: °C. For
test use only.
sensed through the Peltier modules. Unit: converter points. This function is
currently not available.

Thermal Module control: 3/7: manual control
Figure 5-55:
• "STOP THERMAL REGULATION": start/stop of thermal regulation. The

current PWM value is frozen when the regulation is stopped.
• "Calculated temperature": current value. Unit: °C.
• "PWM value": selection of the PWM value to apply to the Peltier modules.
• "SET PELTIER 100% PWM": applies a 100% PWM to the Peltier modules.
• "RESET PELTIER 0% PWM": applies a 0% PWM to the Peltier modules
(modules off).
sensed through the Peltier effect modules. Unit: converter points. This
function is currently not available.
Thermal Module control: 4/7: Thermal Parameters, Visualization and modification
Figure 5-56:
This screen shows the values of the parameters of the thermal module. These
• "System gain": gain of the interface board hardware. No unit.

• "System offset": offset of the interface board hardware. Unit: °C.
• "Sensor offset": sensor correction. Unit: °C.

• "Gradient offset": cartridge holder gradient correction. Unit: °C.

Thermal Module control: 5/7: Temperature calibration - System parameters
Figure 5-57:
• "Current calc. temp.": current calculated temperature, based on the current

set of parameters. When the calibration is started, the current calculated
temperature is based on the default set of parameters: System gain = 1.0;
System offset = 0.0; Sensor offset = 0.0; Gradient offset = 0.0.
• "START CALIBRATION": start/stop of the calibration process. After start of
the calibration process, the displayed temperature is calculated on the
default set of the thermal parameters.
• "Temp.: low value": corresponds to the low value used for the calibration.
• "Temp.: high value": corresponds to the high value used for the calibration.
• "Internal meas.": displays the values of the system for the low value and for
the high value, after memorization.
• "External ref.": Edited values. They are the temperatures measured by an
externally calibrated reference instrument, corresponding to the low value
and the high value for the calibration.
• "MEMORISE": stores the internal current measurement and associates it
with the external reference temperature.
• "CALCULATION OF THE OFFSET AND THE GAIN": launches the
calculation of the new calibration offset and gain, based on the internal
measurements (low and high values, memorized before) and on the
external reference measurements edited in the system.
• "System Offset": current value (from instrument.ini file) and new calculated
value of the system offset. Unit: °C.
• "System Gain": current value (from instrument.ini file) and new calculated
value of the system gain. No unit.

• "SAVE RESULTS": stores the results of the calibration in the system

entered.
Thermal Module control: 6/7: Temperature calibration - Sensor offset corrections
Figure 5-58:

temperature is based on the current System gain and System offset, and
on a Sensor offset = 0.0 and a Gradient offset = 0.0.
• "START CALIBRATION:, start/stop of the calibration process. After starting
the calibration process, the displayed temperature is calculated with a
Sensor offset = 0.0 and a Gradient offset = 0.0.
• "Temperature": corresponds to the point used for the calibration.
• "Internal meas.": displays the value of the system for the calibration point
after memorization.
• "External ref.": Edited value. It is the temperature measured by an external
calibrated reference instrument
• "CALCULATION OF THE SENSOR OFFSET": launch the calculation of
the new calibration sensor offset, based on the internal measurement
(memorized before) and on the external reference measurement edited in
the system.
• "Sensor Offset": current value (from instrument.ini file) and new calculated
value of the sensor offset. Unit: °C.
• "SAVE RESULTS": stores the result of the calibration in the system
(instrument.ini file), and replaces the previous value. This button is
entered.

Thermal Module control: 7/7: Temperature calibration - Gradient offset correction
Figure 5-59:

temperature is based on the current System gain and System offset, the
current Sensor offset, and a Gradient offset = 0.0.
• "START CALIBRATION": start/stop of the calibration process. After starting
the calibration process, the displayed temperature is calculated with a
Gradient offset = 0.0.
• "Temperature": corresponds to the point used for the calibration.
• "Internal meas.": displays the value of the system for the calibration point
after memorization.
• "External ref.": Edited value. It is the temperature measured by an external
calibrated reference instrument
• "CALCULATION OF THE GRADIENT OFFSET": launches the calculation
of the new calibration gradient offset, based on the internal measurement
(memorized before) and on the external reference measurement edited in
the system.
• "Gradient Offset": current value (from instrument.ini file) and new
calculated value of the gradient offset. Unit: °C.
• "SAVE RESULTS": stores the result of the calibration in the system
entered.

5.9.20 "SAMPLE ARM" Button
Selecting the "SAMPLE ARM" button, in the main screen 2/2, opens a screen for
testing the sample arm module:
Figure 5-60:
D-10 Sample arm module
This screen allows access to different functions of the sample arm module.
• "TH MOVE": testing of the tube holder movement

• "Z MOVE": testing of the Z movement
• "X MOVE": testing of the X movement
• "BARCODE": testing of the Barcode reader
• "ALL STATUS": visualization of the status of all the components
• "ARM STATUS": visualization of the status of al the components of the
sample arm module
• "PROBE REPLACEMENT": sample probe replacement
• "DILUT/WASH STAT. REPLA.": dilution/wash station replacement
• "SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION": sample arm to the home position.
• "HALL SENSOR TEST": testing of the Hall sensor.
• "TUBE IDENTIFICATION": testing of the tube height sensing.
5.9.20.1 "TH MOVE"
Selecting the "TH MOVE" button, in the "SAMPLE ARM" screen, opens a set of 4
screens for testing the Tube Holder movement of sample arm module.

Sample arm module TH 1/4: Tube holder macro movement
Figure 5-61:
D-10 Sample arm module: TH (1/4)
• "Home movement": if checked, TH will move to its home position.

• "Tube height measurement": if checked, the tube height measurement will
be done for the selected tube number.
• "START": starts the selected movement.
• "Tube height measured value": result of the tube height measurement
movement. Unit: motor steps.
• "TH step counter": TH step counter. Reset when a home movement is
done.
• "Home sensor": status of the home sensor of the TH motor
- "free": the sensor is "on". Infrared light from the emitter arrives at the
receiver.
• "Axis sensor": status of the axis sensor of the TH motor
(full part)
- "free": the optical sensor is "on". Infrared light from the emitter arrives at
• "Tube height sensor": status of the tube height sensor
optical sensor
the receiver.

Sample arm module TH 2/4: Tube holder elementary movement
Figure 5-62:
• "Direction": selection of the direction of the movement: "from up to down"

or "from down to up".
• "Movement select.": selection of the kind of movement
- "steps": the movement will be done for the selected number of steps
- "strips": the movement will be done for the selected number of strips
- "sensors": the movement will be done until the sensor configuration
defined on the screen is reached.
• "selection", when the "sensors" movement is selected, it defines the
sensor(s) to be used as the final position.
• "target": when the "sensors" movement is selected, it defines the final
status for each selected sensor:
• "Current": shows the current status of each sensor:
• The 3 sensors of the TH movement:
- Home sensor
- Axis sensor
- Tube height sensor
• "Power on motor": selection of the supply of the motor: run (full power),
hold (low power), free (no supply).
• "APPLY": applies the selected power to the motor (only if the motor is
standby state).

Sample arm module TH 3/4: Tube holder speed selection, mechanical parameter
Figure 5-63:
This screen shows the value of the parameter of the TH movement. This value is
found in the instrument.ini file. It can be modified and saved in the instrument.ini file
• "All movements speed index": selection of the speed for service movement
on the TH axis. From 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
• "TH adjustment offset": mechanical offset for the TH movement. Unit:
steps.
Sample arm module TH 4/4: Tube holder speed parameters
Figure 5-64:
This screen shows the value of the speed parameter of the TH movement for several
sequences in the DIA software. These values are found in different *.ini files. They
can be modified and saved in the corresponding *.ini file only if the user has entered
the level 2 password.

The speed is defined by an index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
• "Init. Movement": used in the home movement

• "Test selection": selection of the test for two additional parameters
depending on the test.
• " Run": used during the run (sample preparation)
• "Tube holding": used during the tube holding sequence.
5.9.20.2 "Z MOVE"
Selecting the "Z MOVE" button, in the "SAMPLE ARM" screen, opens a set of 4
screens for testing the Z movement of the sample arm module.
Sample arm module: Z 1/4: Z macro movement
Figure 5-65:
D-10 Sample arm module: Z (1/4)
• "Home movement": if it is checked, Z will move to its home position.

• "To sample aspiration position (tube)": if it is checked, Z will move to the
sampling position for a primary tube, for the selected test and to the
selected position.
• "To sample aspiration position (microvial)": if it is checked, Z will move to
the sampling position for a microvial, for the selected test and to the
selected position.
• "Test selection": HbA1C or HbA2/F/A1c. This selection defines the
parameters for the selected movement.
• "Tube position": 1 to 10. It defines the position of the selected movement.
• "Z step counter": Z step counter. Reset when a home movement is done.
• "Home sensor": status of the home sensor of the Z motor:
• "Axis sensor": status of the axis sensor of the Z motor:

(full part)
Sample arm module: Z 2/4: Z elementary movement
Figure 5-66:
• "Direction": selection of the direction of the movement: "from up to down"

or "from down to up".
• "Movement select.": selection of the kind of movement:
defined on the screen is reached.
• "selection": when the "sensors" movement is selected, it defines the
sensor(s) to be used as the final position
• "Current": shows the current status of each sensor:
• The 2 sensors of the Z movement.
- Home sensor
- Axis sensor

standby state).
Sample arm module: Z 3/4: Z speed selection, mechanical parameter
Figure 5-67:
This screen shows the value of the parameter of the Z movement. This value is
found in the instrument.ini file. It can be modified and saved in the instrument.ini file
• "All movements speed index": selection of the speed for service movement
on the Z axis. From 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
• "Z adjustment offset": mechanical offset for the Z movement. Unit: steps.
In the current design, the "Z adjustment offset" is always set to 0.
• "DONE": saves the modfied parameters. A verification message is
Sample arm module: Z 4/4: Z speed parameters
Figure 5-68:

This screen shows the value of the speed parameter of the Z movement for several
the level 2 password. The speed is defined by an index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high
speed).

• "Test selection": selection of the test for two additional parameters
depending on the test.
• " Run": used during the run (sample preparation)
• "Tube piercing": used during the tube piercing sequence.
5.9.20.3 "X MOVE"
Selecting the "X MOVE" button, in the "SAMPLE ARM" screen, opens a set of 4
screens for testing the X movement of the sample arm module.
Sample arm module: X 1/4: X macro movement
Figure 5-69:
D-10 Sample arm module: X (1/4)
• "Home movement": if checked, X will move to its home position.

• "To probe wash position": if checked, X will move to the probe wash
position.
• "To tube": if checked, X will move to the position of the selected tube.
• "To rack door opening position": if checked, X will move to the position
used to open the rack door.
• "X step counter": X step counter. Reset when a home movement is done.
• "Home sensor": status of the home sensor of the X motor
arrives at the receiver
• "Axis sensor": status of the axis sensor of the X motor:

-"obstructed": the optical sensor is "off". Infrared light from the emitter
(full part)
the receiver because of the slot on the disk
- "magnet"
- "no magnet"
Sample arm module: X 2/4: X elementary movement
Figure 5-70:
• "Direction": selection of the direction of the movement: "from left to right" or

"from right to left".
• "Movement select.”: selection of the kind of movement
defined on the screen is reached
• "selection": when the "sensors" movement is selected, it defines the
sensor(s) to be used as the final position
• "Current": shows the current status of each sensor

• The 2 sensors of the X movement

- Home sensor
- Axis sensor
• "Hall effect sensor": detection of a magnet in front of the sensor, current
status
- "magnet"
- "no magnet"
standby state).
Sample arm module: X 3/4: X speed selection
Figure 5-71:
• "All movements speed index": selection of the speed for service

movement on the X axis. From 0 (low speed) to 9 (high speed).
Sample arm module: X 4/4: X speed parameters
Figure 5-72:
This screen shows the value of the speed parameter of the X movement for several

the level 2 password. The speed is defined by an index from 0 (low speed) to 9 (high
speed).

• "Test selection": selection of the test parameters to be used.
• " Run": used during the run (sample preparation of defined tube position).
5.9.20.4 "BARCODE"
Currently not available.
5.9.20.5 "ALL STATUS"
See "ALL STATUS", Section 5.9.13.
5.9.20.6 "SAMPLE ARM STATUS"
Selecting the "SAMPLE ARM STATUS" button, in the "SAMPLE ARM" screen,
opens a set of 2 screens for showing the sample arm status.
Sample arm module: status 1/2: Sample arm status sensors
Figure 5-73:
D-10 Sample arm module: status (1/2)
In addition to the sensor status, the screen indicates the logical level at the input of
the MC.
• "X axis sensor", "Z axis sensor", "TH axis sensor": status of the axis sensor
of the X, Z, and TH motors
(full part)
- "free”: the optical sensor is "on". Infrared light from the emitter arrives at
• "X home sensor", "Z home sensor", "TH home sensor": the status of the
home sensor of the X, Z, and TH motors

-"obstructed": the optical sensor is "off". Infrared light from the emitter
• "TH Height sensor": status of the tube height sensor
optical sensor
the receiver.
- "magnet"
- "no magnet"
Sample arm module: status 2/2:
Figure 5-74:
D-10 Sample arm module: status (2/2)
• "TH step counter", "Z step counter", "X step counter", TH step counter":
last values of the step counters. Reset when a home movement is done.
steps.
• "Z adjustment offset": mechanical offset for the Z movement. Unit: steps.
5.9.20.7 "PROBE REPLACEMENT"
Selecting the "PROBE REPLACMENT" button, in the "SAMPLE ARM" screen,

starts the probe replacement sequence. Refer to Section 6.3 in the D-10 Operation
Manual.
5.9.20.8 "DILUTION/WASH STATION ACCESS"
Selecting the "DILUTION/WASH STATION ACCESS" button, in the "SAMPLE

ARM" screen, starts the dilution/wash station replacement sequence. Refer to
Section 5.2 in the D-10 Operation Manual.

5.9.20.9 "SAMPLE ARM INITIALISATION"
Selecting the "SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION" button, in the "SAMPLE ARM"

screen, starts the home movements for Z, TH and X.
5.9.20.10 "HALL SENSOR TEST"
Selecting the "HALL SENSOR TEST" button, in the "SAMPLE ARM" screen, opens
a screen for testing the Hall effect sensor.
Figure 5-75:
D-10 Sample arm module, Hall effect (1/1)
• "First tube": selects the position of the first tube on the rack for testing (1 to
9).
• "Last tube": selects the position of the last tube on the rack for testing (1 to
9).
• "START": starts the Hall sensor test. The arm moves to the slot just before
the slot of the first tube (position "-50" in the first (left) column), checks the
Hall sensor and displays the result of the test. It then moves 10 steps to
the right ("-40" position in the first (left) column), checks again and displays
the result. This sequence is repeated until 40 steps after the slot
corresponding to the first tube ("+40" position in the second column). The
arm then moves to the slot just before the slot of the last tube (position "-
50" in the third column), checks the Hall sensor and displays the result of
the test. It then moves 10 steps to the right ("-40" position in the third
column), checks again and displays the result. This sequence is repeated
until 40 steps after the slot corresponding to the last tube ("+40" position in
the fourth (right) column). The arm then goes to the home position.
• For each position, the Hall sensor is checked, and the result is displayed
on the screen
- "no" no magnet is detected.
- "yes" a magnet is detected.

5.9.20.11 "TUBE IDENTIFICATION"
Selecting the "TUBE IDENTIFICATION" button,in the "SAMPLE ARM" screen, opens
a set of 3 screens for testing the tube identification.
Sample arm module: tube identification 1/3
Figure 5-76:
D-10 Sample arm module: Tube Ident. (1/3)
This screen shows the values of the parameters used for the tube identification.
Some parameters are based on the selected test. These values are found in the *.ini
files. These values can be modified and saved in the corresponding files only if the
user has entered the level 2 password.

steps.
• "Test selection": selection of the test for the two other parameters.
• '"Limits for normal tubes (steps)": TH measurement limits for a primary
tube. Unit: steps.
• '"Limits for microvial (steps)": TH measurement limits for a microvial. Unit:
steps.

Sample arm module: tube identification 2/3: Measurement of the TH adjustment

offset
Figure 5-77:
• "START": starts the TH adjustment offset measurement process. The arm

moves from the home position to tube #1 position and senses the tube
height for an empty rack. The results are displayed when the arm comes
back to the home position. The same sequence is repeated for tubes #5
and #10.
• "TH result position x": result of the TH sensing for tube 1, 5 and 10. Unit:
steps.
• "Calculated mean value": mean value of the 3 height measurements. Unit:
steps.
• "Theoretical TH result": theoretical value of the TH sensing for an empty
rack.
• "TH Offset": current value of the adjustment parameter and new calculated
value.
• "SAVE RESULTS": stores the result of the measurement in the system
available only if a new determination is made and if the password level 2
was entered.
Sample arm module: Tube Identification 3/3 - tube identification test
Figure 5-78:

• "tube list": each tube position can be selected for the test by checking the
corresponding field.
• "TH result": indicates the result of the tube height sensing. Unit: steps.
• "corrected result": indicates the result of the tube height sensing corrected
by the TH offset.
• "magnet": indicates if a magnet is detected on the tube position ("yes") or
not ("no").
• "tube": indicates the final result of the tube identification
- "no tube"
- "microvial"
- "primary tube"
• "START": starts the tube identification test. The arm moves from the home
position to each selected tube position and senses the tube height. The
results of each tube are displayed when the arm comes back to the home
position.
5.9.21 "MISC" Button
Selecting the "MISC" button, in the main screen 2/2, opens a screen for additional
functions.
Figure 5-79:
D-10 Miscellaneous (1/1)
• "FILE IMPORT": opens an IMPORT screen in order to import files from the
floppy disk. The file import is only possible if the user has entered the level
2 password.
• "FILE EXPORT": opens an EXPORT screen in order to export files to the
floppy disk.
• "SETUP": is used for setup from floppy disk (e.g. firmware upload,
parameter update, etc) It is only possible if the level2 password was
entered.
• "COUNTERS": opens a screen with counter indications.
• "NON-STOP RUN LAUNCH": starts a non-stop run DIA application. A
confirmation screen is open to confirm the option. This Non stop Run
application is the same as the DIA application, but after the rack
introduction, the rack analysis will be repeated 24 times (standard value).

The tube identification editing is not necessary: an automatic identification

is done for each tube.
• "PRINTER TEST": currently not available.
• "RS232 TEST": currently not available.
• "Fan sense": indication of the electrical current intensity that is sensed
through the fan. Unit: converter points. This function is not available.
5.9.21.1 "SETUP" Button
Selecting the "SETUP" button, in the "MISC" screen, opens a new screen for
installation process (setup).
Figure 5-80:
D-10 Setup
• "SETUP": starts the setup process

• "CANCEL": abort the process and returns to the "MISC" screen.
5.9.21.2 "COUNTERS" Button
Selecting the "COUNTERS" button, in the "MISC" screen, opens a new screen with
counter information.
Figure 5-81:
D-10 Counters (1/1)

• "Injection counter": indicates the injection number since the start of the life
of the instrument. This value cannot be changed.
5.9.22 "VERSIONS" Button
Selecting the "VERSIONS" button, in the main screen 2/2, opens a screen showing
the current versions of software and firmware, if available.
Figure 5-82:
D-10 Service software versions (1/1)
5.9.23 "ERRORS" Button
Selecting the "ERRORS" button, in the main screen 2/2 opens, a screen showing the
last errors on the instrument. The information is found in the dialog.txt file.
Figure 5-83:
D-10 Last Errors (1/1)


6 Replacement Procedures
6.1 List of Procedures

Section Part Description Part Number Page Number
6.2 Front Cover Assembly 220-0298 6-3
6.3 Thermal Printer 220-0225 6-4
6.4 Buffer Bottles Support N/A 6-4
6.5 Syringe Module 220-0248 6-6
6.6 Electronic Module 220-0274 6-8
6.7 Cartridge Module 220-0267 6-12
6.8 Sample Probe 220-0247 6-16
6.9 Dilution/Wash Station 220-0288 6-16
6.10 Syringe 3 way Valve 220-0253 6-18
6.11 1 mL Motorized Syringe 220-0250 6-21
6.12 Thermal Fuse 220-0270 6-23
6.13 Degasser Module 220-0289 6-24
6.14 Vacuum Pump 220-0294 6-28
6.15 Interface Board 220-0281 6-30
6.16 Rack Door Module 220-0307 6-32
6.17 Proportioning Valve 220-0258 6-34
6.18 High-Pressure Pump 220-0272 6-37
6.19 7 Port, 3 Position HP Valve + 23 µL 220-0257 6-41
Sample Loop
6.20 Pressure Sensor 220-0259 6-45
6.21 Column Heater Coil 220-0332 6-49
6.22 Z Position Sensor (axis sensor) 220-0310 6-53
6.23 CCFL Backlight 220-0376 6-57
6.24 Power Supplies 1&2 220-0257 6-58
220-0276
6.25 Motherboard 220-0278 6-61
6.26 LCD Interface Board 220-0312 6-64
6.27 LCD Display 220-0221 6-65
6.28 Waste Manifold 1 220-0325 6-67
6.29 Waste Manifold 2 220-0326 6-69
6.30 Hard Disk 220-0223 6-71
6.31 Barcode Reader 220-0246 6-74
6.32 Detector Module 220-0261 6-80
6.33 Rack Door Module 220-0307 6-82
6.34 Rack Input Sensor 220-0286 6-84
6.35 Rack Output Sensor 220-0287 6-90
6.36 User Interface Module N/A 6-92
6.37 Arm 220-0231 6-95

6.38 Rack Drive Module 220-0283 6-106

6.39 HP Pump Head N/A 6-111
6.40 HP Pump Piston 220-0378 6-114
6.41 HP Pump Piston Seals 220-0377 6-116
6.42 Tube Height Sensor 220-0238 6-118
6.43 7-Port High-Pressure Valve Rotor Seal 270-2170 6-127
and Stator Face

6.2 Front Cover Assembly
1) Shut down the D-10, turn off the power and unplug the external power cord.
2) Unscrew the 2 1⁄4 turn fasteners that lock the left door and open
it.
3) Open the right door.
4) Remove the 4 screws and 4 nylon

washers that fasten the front cover.
5) Slightly pull the front cover forward.
6) Disconnect the 2 security strands and completely remove the old front cover.
7) Connect the 2 security strands coming from the new front cover.
8) Put the front cover in place and secure it using the 4 screws and 4 nylon washers.
9) Close the side doors and tighten the 2 ¼ turn fasteners that lock the left door.

6.3 Thermal Printer
2) Pull out the thermal printer.
3) Disconnect the mini-jack plug and the 6-pin DIN

plug.
4) Connect the 2 plugs to the new printer.
5) Put the new printer in the plastic holder.
6) Replace the power cord and turn on the D-10.
6.4 Buffer Bottles Support
1) Remove the 3 reagent bottles. It is not necessary to disconnect the lines.
2) Remove the plastic reagent tray.

3) Unlock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners located at the top, rear of

the D-10.
4) Slide the metal top cover back.
5) Unlock the ¼ turn fastener located near the thermal

printer.
6) Remove metal bottle support.
7) Replace the metal bottle support.

8) Lock the ¼ turn fastener, which is located near the thermal printer.
9) Slide the metal top cover back on.
10) Lock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners located on the top, rear of the D-10.
11) Put the plastic reagent tray back in place.
12) Put the 3 reagent bottles back in place on the reagent tray. The correct positioning order for
the bottles is indicated on the top metal cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2
• W = wash/diluent
6.5 Syringe Module
2) Move the Wash/Diluent bottle down to the countertop and open the right door.
3) Disconnect the silicon tubing, located on the frame, which

goes from the waste manifold to the frame-mounted LUER
fitting (bottom right corner of the syringe module).
4) Unscrew the blue knurled fitting on the 3 way valve

(tube coming from the degasser – top right corner of the
syringe module). Wipe off any drops.

5) Unscrew the green and yellow LUER fittings (tubes coming from
the dilution/wash station – top left corner of the syringe module).
6) On the waste manifold (bottom left corner of the syringe module):

• unscrew the blue knurled fitting (tube coming from the
HP valve – port 7)
• unscrew the black knurled fitting corresponding to the
back pressure tubing
• unscrew the LUER fitting (tube coming from the piston
flush circuit)
7) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers that fasten the syringe module.
8) Pull out the syringe module slightly. On the rear side,

disconnect the flat cable.
9) Take the new syringe module and connect the flat cable to the module board.
10) Put the syringe module in place and secure it using the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
11) On the waste manifold (bottom left corner of the syringe module):
• secure the LUER fitting (tube coming from the piston flush circuit)
• connect the back pressure tubing (black knurled fitting)
• secure the blue knurled fitting (tube coming from the HP valve – port 7)

12) Secure the green and yellow LUER fittings (top left corner of the syringe module – tubes
coming from the dilution/wash station).
13) Secure the blue knurled fitting on the 3 way valve (top right corner of the syringe module –
tube coming from the degasser).
14) Connect the silicon tubing coming from the waste manifold to the frame-mounted LUER fitting
(bottom right corner of the syringe module).
15) Close the right door and move the Wash/Diluent bottle back up onto the D-10.
16) Perform a syringe priming:

• turn on the D-10
• go to the MAINTAIN screen
• click on the Service button
• click on Syringe Priming
6.6 Electronic Module
2) Remove the buffer bottle support. (Section 6.3)
3) Unscrew the 2 1⁄4 turn fasteners which lock the left door and open
the door.

4) Disconnect the following cables and flat cables from the

interface board:
• 3 flat cables on the right side
• 4 flat cables on the bottom side
• 6 strands on the left side
5) If present, disconnect the external keyboard, mouse and VGA display.
6) If present, disconnect the LAN, RS232 and rack feeder cables.
7) Take out the entire syringe module. (Section 6.4)
8) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat

washers that secure the protective grid. Remove the
grid.
9) Disconnect the following on power

supply 2 at the top:
• the 115 / 230 V power
supply strand (5-pin plugs)
located in the top left
corner
• the 2 plugs located in the
top right corner

10) Disconnect the 2 plugs, located in

the bottom right corner on power
supply 1.
11) Disconnect all cables from the thermal printer. Remove the printer.
12) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the hard disk.
13) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the floppy drive.

14) Hold the electronic module with one hand and remove the 4
screws and 4 spring lock washers that secure the module on the
rear side of the D-10.
15) Remove the old electronic module from the left side of the instrument.
Each interface board has a sticker on it, giving the board's specific parameters. Note these
values; they must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the replacement is done.
16) Put the new electronic module in place and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock
washers.
Connect the 2 ribbon cables between the PC motherboard, the floppy drive and the hard
17)
disk.
18) Replace the printer and re-install all cables.
19) Connect all plugs to the power supplies.
20) Put the protective grid back in place and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers
and 2 flat washers.
21) Replace the syringe module.
22) Connect all cables and ribbon cables to the interface board. Note that there is only one
possible connection for each cable and ribbon cable.
23) Close the left door and tighten the 2 1⁄4 turn fasteners.
24) Replace the buffer bottle support.

25) Switch on the D-10 and launch the Service software:

• click on Exit to Service software
Go to the “D-10 Thermal module control (4/7)” screen.

26) Enter the following parameters from the new interface
board:
• System gain value
• System offset value
• click on DONE
6.7 Cartridge Module
1) Remove the front cover. (Section 6.2)
2) Unlock the 2 captive screws and completely pull

out the HPLC drawer.

3) Disconnect the PEEK fingertight fitting (tube coming from

the pressure sensor – top of the pump head) on the HP
pump head. Replace it with a plug. If there is a leak, wipe
off the drops.
4) Unscrew the stainless steel nut connected to port 3 on the

HP valve. If there is a leak, wipe off the drops.
5) Open the cartridge module by pulling the black

metal cover all the way to the left.
6) Pull out the cartridge holder and close the

cartridge module. If there is a leak, wipe off the
drops.

7) Unscrew the beige fingertight fitting (tube coming from the

detector module) on the right side of the cartridge module.
8) Disconnect the following cables on the HPLC

module board (rear of the drawer):
• the 2 Peltier modules (unlabelled)
• the thermal fuse (unlabelled)
• the thermal sensor (CN4)
9) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers at

the rear of the module. Remove the cartridge module.
Each spare cartridge module has a sticker on it, giving the module's specific parameter.
Note this value; it must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the replacement is done.
10) Install the new cartridge module and secure it using the 4
screws and 4 spring lock washers. Make sure the ground
connection is in place.

11) On the rear side of the HPLC drawer:

• connect the thermal sensor (labelled '4') to the HPLC module board (CN4)
• connect the 2 Peltier modules and the thermal fuse to the HPLC module. Note that
these 3 plugs are fully interchangeable.
12) Secure the tube coming from the detector (beige fingertight fitting) to the right side of the
cartridge module.
13) Install the cartridge holder and close the door.
14) On the HP valve, connect the stainless steel nut to port 3.
15) On the HP pump head, remove the plug and re-connect the beige PEEK fingertight fitting
(tube coming from the pressure sensor).
16) Push the HPLC drawer back in and tighten the 2 captive screws.
17) Replace the front cover.

19) Go to the “D-10 Thermal module control (4/7)” screen.

Update the following parameter from the new module:
• Gradient offset value
• click on DONE

20) Go to the “D-10 HP module pump, valve (1/16)” screen:

• set the Flow rate to 1,5 ml/min
• click on START PUMP
21) Check for leaks while the pump is running. After approximately 5 minutes, click on STOP
PUMP.
6.8 Sample Probe
1) Replace the probe according to the procedure in Section 5 of the Operation Manual. Make
sure the old probe is decontaminated prior to removal.

6.9 Dilution/Wash Station
1) Verify that the system is in Sleep state. If the system is in StandBy, place it in Sleep state
using the RUN screen.

2) With the system in Sleep state:

• click on Access Wash st.
3) Open the upper front door. If the door is not opened within 10 seconds, it will automatically
lock again.
4) Push on the lever located on the left side of the

dilution/wash station.
5) With the lever still depressed, lift the dilution/wash station a

few mm and unscrew the 2 LUER fittings (yellow and green).
6) Remove the old dilution/wash station.
7) Connect the 2 silicon tubings to the new dilution/wash station, matching the colors.
8) Pull the new dilution/wash station down until you hear a 'click' coming from the lever.
9) Close the upper front door. The sample arm will automatically return to its home position.

6.10 Syringe 3 way Valve
1) Remove the syringe module. (Section 6.5)
2) Disconnect the following from the syringe module

board (rear side of the module):
• 3 way valve power supply strand (CN5)
• 2 strands coming from the motorized
syringe (CN2 and CN3)
3) Open the metal cable holder, also located on the rear side
of the syringe module.
4) Remove the following fittings from the 3 way valve (front

side of the syringe module):
• black fingertight nut (bottom side of the valve)
• blue fingertight nut (left side of the valve)

5) Cut and remove the plastic cable tie.
6) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers

securing the syringe support.
7) CAREFULLY remove the syringe support. Be mindful of the cables.
8) Remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers from the

3 way valve. Remove the valve.
9) Install the new 3 way valve and secure it using the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers.

10) Pass the 3 cables through the holes in the support and
through the grommet.
11) Put the syringe support back in place and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock
washers.
12) Secure the motorized syringe to the support with a new

cable tie. The tie-wrap should pass underneath the
grommet. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
13) Re-connect the tube coming from the waste manifold to the left side of the 3 way valve (blue
fingertight nut).
14) Re-connect the tube coming from the motorized syringe to the bottom side of the 3 way valve
(black fingertight nut).
15) On the rear side of the syringe module:

• connect the 3 way valve power supply strand (labelled '5') to the syringe module
board (CN5)
• connect the 2 strands coming from the motorized syringe (unlabelled) to the
syringe module board (CN2 and CN3)
16) Put the 3 cables in the metal cable holder and close it.


• turn on the D-10
6.11 1 mL Motorized Syringe
2) Disconnect the 2 strands coming from the

motorized syringe (CN2 and CN3) on the syringe
module board (rear side of the module).
3) Open the metal cable holder, also located on the rear side
of the syringe module.

4) Unscrew the black fingertight nut (top of the motorized

syringe).
5) Cut and remove the plastic cable tie.
6) Remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock

washers that secure the motorized syringe.
CAREFULLY remove the syringe being mindful
of the cables.
7) Pass the 2 cables of the new motorized syringe through the hole in the support and through
the grommet.
8) Put the new motorized syringe in place and secure it with the 2 screws and 2 spring lock
washers.
9) Strap the motorized syringe to the support with a new cable

tie. The tie-wrap should pass underneath the grommet. DO
NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

10) Connect the tube coming from the 3 way valve to the top of the motorized syringe (black
fingertight nut).
11) On the rear side of the syringe module, connect the 2 strands coming from the motorized
syringe (unlabelled) to the syringe module board (CN2 and CN3).
12) Put the 3 cables in the metal cable holder and close it.

6.12 Thermal Fuse
1) Remove the cartridge module. (Section 6.7)
2) On the bottom side of the cartridge module, open

the metal cable holder, which restrains the thermal
fuse cable.

3) Pull out the old thermal fuse.
4) Apply thermal grease on the inner surface of the housing and push the new thermal fuse into
the housing.
5) Put the cable in the metal cable holder and close the holder.
6) Re-install the cartridge module.
6.13 Degasser Module
4) On the rear side of the D-10, unscrew the 3 fittings

connecting the buffer and wash/diluent bottle tubings
(white, green and blue fingertight nuts – bottom left corner
of the instrument).

5) On the right side of the D-10, disconnect the silicon

tubing, which goes from the vacuum pump to the air
output (bottom right corner), from the frame.
6) Remove the 2 white plastic knurled nuts and the small metal
plate from the degasser.
7) Unscrew the white, green and blue fingertight nuts at the

degasser.
8) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers, which

hold the degasser (bottom of the instrument), at the rear
of the D-10.

9) Loosen the captive screw, located near the degasser

module board, on the degasser.
10) Operating from the right side of the instrument, slightly pull
out the degasser and disconnect the ribbon cable from the
degasser module board.
11) Take the new degasser and connect the ribbon cable to its module board.
12) Put the new degasser in place and secure the captive screw from the top.
13) Replace the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers at the rear (bottom of the instrument).
14) Re-connect the 3 color-coded nuts at the degasser. The correct order is (from top to bottom):
• white
• green
• blue
15) Replace the metal plate and the 2 white plastic knurled nuts.
16) Re-connect the silicon tubing coming from the vacuum pump to the air output (right side of
the instrument – bottom right corner).
19) Re-connect the white, green and blue fingertight nuts at the rear (bottom left corner). Be
careful to MATCH THE COLORS.


21) Go to the “D-10 Degasser module (2/4)” screen and

perform a system flush by clicking on ALL.

• monitor the pressure for approximately 5
minutes; if it fluctuates by more than ± 5%,
manually prime the pump using the 50ml
syringe and re-check the pressure
23) Leaving the Flow rate unchanged, click on START

PROP. VALVE and then on START PUMP. Monitor the
pressure for approximately 5 minutes; if it fluctuates by
more than ± 5%, manually prime the pump using the
50ml syringe and re-check the pressure. At the end, click
on STOP PROP. VALVE.

24) Go to the “D-10 Degasser module (1/4)” screen and test

the vacuum pump:
• verify that the pump is able to create a vacuum
at least equal to 125 points
6.14 Vacuum Pump
2) On the right side of the D-10, disconnect the silicon

tubing, which goes from the vacuum pump to the air
output (bottom right corner), from the frame.
3) On the head of the pump, disconnect the silicon tubing

coming from the degasser.
4) Slide the plastic cable tie along the vacuum pump

(towards the rear of the D-10) and disconnect the power
supply strand.

5) Remove the 2 screws, which secure the vacuum pump to

the bracket and remove the pump.
6) On the old pump, remove the remaining silicon tubing and connect it to the corresponding
nozzle of the new vacuum pump.
7) Put the new pump in place and secure it to the bracket, using the two screws.
8) Connect the supply strand to the pump. Be very careful to RESPECT POLARITY.
9) Slide the plastic cable tie along the vacuum pump back to its original position.
10) On the head of the pump, connect the silicon tubing coming from the degasser to the free
nozzle.
11) Re-connect the silicon tubing, which comes from the vacuum pump head to the air output of
the D-10 (bottom right corner).


14) Go to the “D-10 Degasser module (1/4)” screen to check

that the new vacuum pump is working properly:
• verify that the pump is able to create a vacuum
at least equal to 125 points
6.15 Interface Board
To protect electronic cards against damage from static electricity, several precautions must
be taken:
• use a grounded wrist strap before handling the components. If one is not
available, first touch both of your hands to a safely grounded or metal object
• hold components by the edges and try not to touch the IC chips, leads,
connectors, or other components
• place components on a grounded antistatic pad or on the bag that came with the
components whenever they are separated from the system
it.

3) Disconnect the following cables from the interface board:

• 3 ribbon cables on the right side
• 4 ribbon cables on the bottom side
• 6 connectors on the left side
• 1 ribbon cable on the top side
4) Remove the old interface board (6 plastic standoffs).
5) Remove the 2 MC and HPPC EPROMs from the old

interface board with the PLCC EPROM extractor (P/N:
2200420).
6) Install these EPROMs on the new interface board. Be careful NOT TO SWAP THE 2
EPROMs.
7) Check to see if the new interface board comes

equipped with a TC microchip (soldered on the board).
If not, you may need to remove this chip from the old
interface board and install it on the new one. The notch
must be ORIENTED TOWARDS THE FRONT SIDE of
the D-10.
Each replacement interface board has a sticker on it, giving the board's specific
parameters. Note these values; they must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the
replacement is done.
8) Put the new interface board in place on the 6 standoffs.

9) Connect all cables and ribbon cables to the new board. Note that there is only one possible
connection for each cable and ribbon cable.

Go to the “D-10 Thermal module control (4/7)” screen.

12) Enter the following parameters from the new interface
board:
• System gain value
• System offset value
• click on DONE
6.16 Rack Door Module

the door.
4) Locate the X movement board on the left side of the D-10.
On this board, disconnect the 3 connectors coming from the

5)
rack door module (labelled '2', '7' and '12'). Removing the
ribbon cable first will make it easier to remove these
connectors.
7) Remove the 4 screws, which secure the rack door module to the
frame.

8) Remove the rack door module. Be mindful of the cables, as there are several metal cable
holders on their way to the X movement board.
9) Install the new rack door module and secure it to the frame using the 4 screws.
10) Lead the 3 cables to the X movement board and connect them at CN2, CN7 and CN12. Re-
connect the ribbon cable to the board if it was previously removed.
12) Close the right door.

15) Go to the “D-10 Rack door module (1/2)” screen to check

that the new rack door is working properly:
• test the solenoid
• open and close the rack door
• monitor the sensors' status
6.17 Proportioning Valve
1) Place both buffer bottles at bench level or lower to minimize siphoning.

3) Loosen the 2 captive screws and completely pull

4)
Disconnect the white and green fingertight nuts at the
proportioning valve. Use a plug and union to cap each
fluid line. If there is a leak, wipe off the drops.
Disconnect the black fingertight nut from the proportioning

5)
valve.
6) On the HPLC module board (rear of the module),

disconnect the connector (labelled '15') coming
from the proportioning valve.

7) Remove the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers securing the

proportioning valve. CAREFULLY remove the valve from the
bracket, paying attention to the strand.
8) Pass the strand of the new proportioning valve through the grommet.
9) Put the new valve in place and secure it using the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers.
10) Connect the proportioning valve connector to the HPLC module board (CN15).
11) Connect the black, white and green fingertight nuts to the new proportioning valve. Be careful
to MATCH THE COLORS.
14) Put the buffer bottles back on the reagent tray.


16) Go to the “D-10 Degasser module(2/4)” screen:

• click on BUFFER 1 to prime the first line
• click on BUFFER 2 to prime the second line


19) Perform the procedure in Section 7.3 WC-FC verification.
6.18 High-Pressure Pump
1) Place both buffer bottles at bench level or lower to minimize siphoning.


4)
Disconnect the tube at the bottom of the pump head.
Use a plug and union to cap the fluid line. If there is a
leak, wipe off the drops.
5) Disconnect the remaining tubing:

• 1 silicon tubing coming from the waste manifold
• 1 beige fingertight nut (tube coming from the
pressure sensor)
• 1 black fingertight nut (tube coming the HP valve –
port 6)

disconnect the 3 connectors (labelled '8', '9' and
'16') coming from the HP pump.

7) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock

washers and 4 flat washers that secure
the pump. CAREFULLY remove the
pump from the bracket. Pay attention to
the strands, especially the one that
passes through the grommet.
8) Put the strands of the new HP pump in position; one of them should pass through the
grommet.
Each spare HP pump has a sticker on it, giving the pump's specific parameters (Waiting
Count and Filling Count). Note these values; they must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file
once the replacement is done.
9) Put the new pump in place and secure it with the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat
washers.
10) Connect the 3 connectors of the new pump to the HPLC module board (CN8, CN9, CN16).
11) Connect all tubing to the head of the pump. Be careful to connect the tube coming from the
proportioning valve ONLY AT THE BOTTOM.


16) Go to the “D-10 Degasser module (2/4)” screen:


• set the Flow rate to 1.5 ml/min

19) Go to the “D-10 HP module pump, valve (8/16)” screen.

Enter the following parameters from the new pump:
• Waiting Count value
• Filling Count value
• click on DONE
20) Perform the procedure in Section 7.7 Flow Rate calibration.
21) Perform the procedure in Section 7.3 WC-FC verification.

6.19 7 Port, 3 position HP Valve + 23 µL Sample Loop

3) Disconnect the beige fingertight nut at the top of the pump

head and replace it with a plug. If there is a leak, wipe off
the drops.

4) Disconnect the following from the HP valve:

• 1 yellow fingertight nut (tube coming from the
output of the HP pump – port 6)
• 1 red fingertight nut (tube coming from the
probe – port 5)
• 1 stainless steel nut (tube coming from the
cartridge module – port 3)
• 1 green fingertight nut (tube coming from the
pressure sensor – port 2)
• 1 blue fingertight nut (tube coming from the
syringe module – port 7)

disconnect the 2 connectors coming from the
valve (unlabelled).
6) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers that

secure the valve and CAREFULLY remove it from the
bracket. Pay attention to the strands.
7) Pass the strands of the new HP valve through the hole in the bracket.

8) Put the new valve in place and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
9) Re-connect all of the tubing from step 4), making sure the fittings are in their proper position
numbers.
10) Connect the 2 connectors to the HPLC module board.

Go to the “D-10 HP module pump, valve (4/16)”

14) screen:
• click on HOME MVT (RESET)
• click on TO INJECT POSITION and monitor
the sensors' status
• click on TO LOAD POSITION and monitor
the sensors' status
• click on TO PRIME POSITION and monitor
the sensors' status
• click on TO LOAD POSITION and monitor
the sensors' status
15) Go to the “D-10 Syringe module (3/6)” screen and

perform a syringe priming.


PUMP.
18) Go back to the “D-10 HP module pump, valve (4/16)”

screen and move the valve to inject position.
Go back to the “D-10 HP module pump, valve (1/16)”

19)
screen:
PUMP.

21) Go to the “D-10 HP module pump, valve (4/16)” screen

and move the valve to load position.
6.20 Pressure Sensor
1) Place both buffer bottles at bench level to minimize siphoning.

4)
Disconnect the white and green fingertight nuts at the
proportioning valve; use plugs and unions to cap the
fluid lines. If there is a leak, wipe off the drops.

Disconnect the black fingertight nut from the proportioning

5)
valve.
The proportioning valve and the pressure sensor are mounted on a small bracket, which is
secured to the HPLC drawer by 4 Nylock nuts.
6) Unlock the 4 Nylock nuts.
7) Pull the bracket forward and lift it to release. Pay

attention to the 2 strands coming from the
proportioning valve and the pressure sensor.


disconnect the connector coming from the
pressure sensor (labelled '6').

securing the old pressure sensor to the bracket.
CAREFULLY remove the sensor.
Passing the plug through the hole in the bracket can be very
tricky. Therefore, it is recommended to slightly twist the wires.
10) Disconnect the 2 beige fingertight nuts on the pressure

sensor.

11) Connect the tubing to the new pressure sensor (2 beige fingertight nuts):
• 1 tube coming from the HP valve (top of the sensor)
• 1 tube coming from the HP pump head (bottom of the sensor)
Each replacement pressure sensor has a sticker on it, giving the sensor's specific
parameters. Note values; they must be entered in the 'instrument.ini' file once the
replacement is done.
12) Put the new sensor in place and secure it using the 2 screws and 2 spring lock washers. Be
careful NOT TO MOUNT THE SENSOR UPSIDE DOWN. The bevelled face must be
oriented upwards.
13) Pass the strand coming from the new sensor through the grommet and connect it to the
module board (CN6).
14) Put the bracket back in place and lock the 4 Nylock nuts.
15) On the proportioning valve, connect the tube coming from the HP pump head (black
fingertight nut).
16)
Remove the unions and plugs and re-connect the 2 tubes coming from the degasser (white
and green plastic knurled fittings). Be careful to MATCH THE COLORS.


Go to the “D-10 HP module sensor calibration (1/2)”

21) screen. Enter the following parameters from the new
pressure sensor:
• High Pressure Sensor Offset
• High Pressure Sensor Gain
• click on DONE

23) Check for possible leaks while the pump is running. After approximately 5 minutes, click on
STOP PUMP.
6.21 Column Heater Coil


3) Disconnect the beige fingertight nut at the top of the pump

head and replace it with a plug. If there is a leak, wipe off
the drops.
4) On the HP valve, unscrew the stainless steel nut connected

to port 3. If there is a leak, wipe off the drops.
5) Open the cartridge module by pulling the black

metal cover all the way to the left.
6) Pull out the cartridge holder and close the

cartridge module. At this step, it is normal to
observe a small leak in the cartridge module.
Place a small piece of absorbent material, such
as a paper towel, in the space left by the
missing cartridge holder to absorb the liquid.

7) Remove the 4 screws securing the black metal

cover. Remove the cover.
8) Remove the screws, which secure the column

heater coil support (1 screw) and the cartridge
support (2 screws).
9) Use the M3 standoffs (P/N: 2200436) and

secure them in the 2 holes of the column heater
coil support.
10) Grasp the 2 standoffs and pull out the column heater coil
support, along with the fixed cartridge support. Slightly
moving the column heater coil from left to right and from
top to bottom, while pulling it out, will facilitate removal.
Use caution, as the 2 parts are still connected together.

11) Separate the fixed cartridge support from the column

heater coil support:
• insert an open-end wrench in the slot
between the 2 parts, to reach the stainless
steel nut
• while holding the fitting with the wrench,
rotate the fixed cartridge support counter-
clockwise, in order to unscrew it
12) Take the new column heater coil (already mounted on

the bobbin) and assemble it with the fixed cartridge
support:
• hold the fitting with an open-end wrench
• rotate the fixed cartridge support clockwise, in
order to screw it on the fitting
13) Put the fixed cartridge support and the column heater coil support back in place and secure
them using the screws removed in step 8). Note that there's no need to add thermal grease in
the housing.
14) Put the black metal cover back, using the 4 screws.
15) Put the cartridge holder back in place.
16) On the HP valve, connect the stainless steel tubing coming from the cartridge module to port
3 (stainless steel nut).
17) On the HP pump head, remove the plug and re-connect the beige fingertight nut (tube
coming from the pressure sensor).
20) Switch on the D-10 and go to the MAINTAIN screen.

21) Set the Flowrate to 1.5 ml/min and the % Buf 2 to 0.

Then, click on Start Pump.
22) Check for possible leaks while the pump is running. After approximately 5 minutes, click on
Stop Pump.
6.22 Z position Sensor
4) Loosen – but do not remove – the 2

screws that secure the Z-motor.

5) Push (or pull) the Z-motor towards the front of the D-10 (there are
oblong holes allowing this movement) and take the belt off the
pulley.
6) Loosen – but do not remove – the screw that secures the pulley
to the Z-motor shaft.
7) Hold the Z-motor with one hand and remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat
washers.
8) Push (or pull) the Z-motor towards the rear of the D-10 and
remove it from its support; tilting the motor will facilitate the
job. Regarding the pulley, just leave it in place.

The Z position sensor is fastened with 2 nuts to a small metal

plate, which is itself fastened with 2 screws to the Z-motor, on the
same end as the slot disk.
9) On the Z-motor:
• loosen – but do not remove – the 2 screws that
secure the metal plate
• swivel the plate on which the sensor is fastened
• remove the old Z position sensor (2 nuts + 2
serrated lock washers)
10) On the Z board, disconnect the connector coming from the Z

position sensor (labelled '13').
11) Put the new Z position sensor in place on the metal plate and secure it with the 2 nuts and
serrated lock washers.
12) Swivel the metal plate back in its original position and tighten the 2 screws.

13) Connect the connector coming from the new Z position sensor to the Z board (CN13).
14) Tilt the Z-motor and put it back in place on its support. During the positioning of the motor,
don't forget to slide the shaft into the pulley.
15) Keep the Z-motor in position with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat washers –
but do not tighten the screws.
16) Slide the belt on the pulley.
17) Tighten the pulley screw. Concerning the positioning of the pulley on the shaft, follow the
example of the TH-motor.
18) Adjust the tension of the belt by sliding the Z-motor in the oblong holes and tighten the 2 Z-
motor screws. Follow the example of the TH-motor.
20) Put the buffer bottle support back in place.

22) Go to the “D-10 Sample arm module Z (2/4)” screen:

• set Direction to from up to down
• set the Movement select to 1 step
• click on START
• watch to see if the sensor's status changes
during the movement

6.23 CCFL Backlight
2) Disconnect the 3 ribbon cables from the right

side of the LCD interface board.

securing the LCD display. Remove the display.
4) Remove the 2 plastic rivets and the small aluminum

cover.
5) Pull out the old CCFL backlight and replace it with

the new one. Be careful NOT TO TOUCH the
surface.

6) Put the aluminum cover back in place and secure it with

the 2 plastic rivets.
7) Re-connect the 3 cable on the interface board.
8) Put the LCD display back in place and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
With a new CCFL backlight, a re-adjustment to the

contrast may be required. Turn the potentiometer
located on the right side of the instrument.
6.24 Power Supplies 1 & 2
1) Remove the entire electronic module. (Section 6.6)
2) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers

and 2 flat washers that secure power supply 2
(top).
3) Remove the old power supply 2 from the electronic module (2 plastic standoffs in the bottom
left and top right corners).

4) Put the new power supply 2 in place on the 2 standoffs.
5) Secure it using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat washers.
6) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers

and 2 flat washers that secure power supply 1
(bottom).
7) Remove old power supply 1 from the electronic module (2 plastic standoffs in the bottom left
and top right corners).
8) Put the new power supply 1 in place on the 2 standoffs.
9) Secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat washers.
10) Replace the electronic module and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
11) Connect the 2 ribbon cables going from the PC motherboard to the floppy drive and the hard
disk.
12) Put the plastic holder (with the printer in it) back in place.
13) Pull out the thermal printer.
14) Connect the mini-jack plug and the 6-pin DIN plug to the printer and put it back in its plastic
holder.
15) Connect all cables to the interface board (in no particular order). Note that there is only one
possible connection for each cable.
16) Connect all connectors to the power supplies.

Before being able to use new power supply 1 (bottom), it is necessary to set its output
voltage to 5.15 V. The test points are located on the interface board:
5.15 VDC
GND
18) On power supply 1, turn the potentiometer until

the output voltage reaches 5.15 V.
19) Put the protective grid back in place and secure it with the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers
and 2 flat washers.

6.25 Motherboard
be taken:
1) Remove the entire electronic module. (Section 6.6)
2) On the interface board, disconnect the last ribbon

cable, located on the top end of the card.
3) Loosen the 2 captive screws.
4) Lift the interface board support.
5) Disconnect and remove the yellow cable between the

motherboard (top left corner) and the LAN port.

6)
Disconnect all cables from the mezzanine board:
• 2 ribbon cables
• 1 connector
7) Disconnect all cables from the motherboard:

• 3 ribbon cables on the top
• 1 ribbon cable on the right side
• 1 connector in the top, right corner
• 1 connector in the top, left corner
8) Remove the 11 screws and washers that secure the motherboard and the screw, flat washer
and spacer that secure the mezzanine board.

9) Remove the old motherboard.
10) Remove the Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) from the old motherboard and insert it on
the new one. Because the number of pins are different on either side of the cut-outs, the
module will only fit in one orientation.
11) Remove the heatsink (with fan) from the old motherboard.
12) Remove the CPU from the old motherboard and install it
on the new board. Locate the socket and open it by
pulling the lever upwards. The socket lever must be fully
open (90° to 100°) when removing and installing the
CPU. Insert the CPU with the correct orientation,
knowing that there is a notched corner. Take care NOT
TO EXERT TOO MUCH FORCE, but press the CPU
down gently into the slot. Once completely inserted,
close the socket lever while holding down the CPU.
13) Install the heatsink on the new motherboard; don't forget to connect its connector. It is not
absolutely necessary to apply thermal grease on the CPU.
14) Remove the mezzanine board from the old motherboard.
15) Put the new motherboard in place and

secure it with the 11 screws and flat
washers.
16) Install the mezzanine board on the new motherboard and secure it with the screw, spacer
and the flat washer.
17) Connect all cables to the motherboard.
18) Connect all cables to the mezzanine board.

19) Connect the yellow cable between the motherboard (top left corner) and the LAN port.
20) Close the interface board support and secure the 2 captive screws.
21) Connect the ribbon cable located on the top end of the interface board.
22) Replace the electronic module.
6.26 LCD Interface Board
be taken:
2) Disconnect all cables from the LCD interface

board:
• 2 ribbon cables on the right side
• 1 connector on the right side
• 1 connector on the bottom
• 1 ribbon cable on the left side
3) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers that secure the LCD
interface board. Remove the board.
4) Connect all cables to the new interface board.
5) Put the new interface board in place.
6) Secure the 4 screws, 4 spring lock and 4 flat washers.
Continue with steps 8 through 12 ONLY if the operating software is <DiaSer 1.13.
8) Connect an external keyboard to the port at the back of the D-10.

9) Turn on the D-10 and launch the Service software:

10) Insert the "Touch screen calibration disk" in the floppy drive.
11) Go to the “D-10 Miscellaneous (1/1)” screen and click

on SETUP. This will launch the calibration program.
12) A cross will appear on the touch screen; click precisely on it using a pointed (but not sharp)
tool. Repeat this operation 8 more times and finally press on 'Enter' on the keyboard. You will
be back in the Service software.
6.27 LCD Display
2) Disconnect the 3 ribbon cables from the right

side of the LCD interface board.

3) Remove the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers that

secure the LCD display. Remove the display.
4) Connect the backlight supply cable to the new LCD display.
5) Connect the two ribbon cables.
6) Put the new LCD display in place and secure it with the 4 screws and 4 spring lock washers.
With a new CCFL backlight, a re-adjustment to the

contrast may be required. Turn the potentiometer
located on the right side of the instrument.
Continue with steps 8 through 12 ONLY if the operating software is <DiaSer 1.13.
8) Connect an external keyboard to the port at the back of the D-10.
9) Turn on the D-10 and launch the Service software:

10) Insert the "Touch screen calibration disk" in the floppy drive.

11) Go to the “D-10 Miscellaneous (1/1)” screen and click

on SETUP. This will launch the calibration program.
12) A cross will appear on the touch screen; click precisely on it using a pointed (but not sharp)
tool. Repeat this operation 8 more times and finally press on 'Enter' on the keyboard. You will
be back in the Service software.
6.28 Waste Manifold 1
2) Open the right door and locate waste manifold 1.
3) Disconnect all tubing from the old waste manifold:

• 2 pinch valve tubings on the left side
• 1 tubing coming from the internal waste bottle on the
bottom

4) Remove the 2 thumbscrews and 2 nylon washers that

fasten the manifold.
5) Remove the old waste manifold.
6) Connect the 3 tubings to the new waste manifold.
7) Secure the new manifold using the 2 thumbscrews and 2 nylon washers. The screws should
be finger-tight ONLY. Do not over tighten.
10) Click on the Service button.

11) Perform a waste bottle check by clicking on the Check

Waste bottle button.
6.29 Waste Manifold 2
2) Open the right door and locate waste manifold 2.
Disconnect all tubing from the old waste manifold:

3)
• 2 teflon tubings on the left side (blue and black
fingertight nuts)
• 1 silicon tubing on the left side (LUER fitting)
• 2 silicon tubings on the front (barbed and LUER
fittings)
• 1 teflon tubing on the right side (blue fingertight
nut)


washers, which fasten the old manifold.
5) Remove the old waste manifold.
6) Put the new waste manifold in place and secure it using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers
and 2 flat washers.
7) Connect all tubing to the new waste manifold.
10) Click on the Service button.

11) Perform a syringe priming by clicking on the Syringe

Priming button. Repeat the operation 3 times and
check for leaks on the new waste manifold.
6.30 Hard Disk
3) Remove the thermal printer (Section 6.3)
4) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the hard disk.
5) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the floppy drive.

6) Disconnect the power supply connectors from the

floppy drive and hard disk.
7) Open the first plastic cable holder, located on the right

side of the printer module.
the door.

9) Open the second plastic cable holder.
10) On the left side of the printer module, pull the ribbon
cable out of the third plastic cable holder.
11) Holding the module with one hand, remove the 4

screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers that
secure. Remove the printer module.

12) Remove the 4 screws and 4 serrated lock washers

securing the old hard disk. Remove the hard disk.
13) Put the new hard disk in place and secure it using the 4 screws and 4 serrated lock washers.
14) Put the printer module back in place and secure it using the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers
and 4 flat washers.
15) On the left side of the printer module, push the ribbon cable back in the plastic cable holder.
16) Re-connect the hard disk and floppy drive supply connectors.
17) Route the wires through the plastic cable holders and close them (right side of the printer
module).
18) Connect the 2 ribbon cables going from the PC motherboard to the floppy drive and the hard
disk.
19) Replace the thermal printer.
6.31 Barcode Reader
1) Decontaminate the Sample Fluid Pathway using the procedure in Section 5 of the Operation
Manual.
2) Place the system in Sleep state using the RUN screen.

3) Launch the Service software:

4) Go to the “D-10 Sample arm module” screen and click on

the SAMPLE ARM INITIALIZATION button.
5) Go to the “D-10 Sample arm module X (1/4)” screen:

• select To tube
• set the tube number to 3
• click on START
6) Go to the “D-10 Sample arm moduleTH (2/4)” screen:

• set the Movement select to 80 strips
• click on START


• click on START
Go to the “D-10 Service Software (1/2)” screen and click

8)
on SHUT DOWN.
9) Turn off the power and unplug the external power cord.
10) Remove the 3 reagent bottles and remove the tray.
11) Unlock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners located on the rear side of

the D-10 and slide out the metal top cover.

13) Leaving the sample arm in the same position,

disconnect the red fingertight nut at the top of the
sample probe. CAREFULLY remove the probe. Use
extreme caution, as the probe is a biohazard.
14) Cut and remove the tie-wraps, which fasten the barcode
reader strand to the sample arm.
15) On the Z movement board, disconnect the plug

(unlabelled) coming from the barcode reader.

16) Remove the 2 screws and 2 flat washers, which secure

the barcode reader to its bracket.
17) Remove the old barcode reader.
18) Install the new barcode reader on the bracket, replace the 2 screws and 2 washers – but do
not tighten the screws.
Connect the plug coming from the new barcode reader (unlabelled) to the Z movement
19)
board.
20) Fasten the barcode reader cable, and the Hall effect
sensor cable, to the sample arm using new tie-wraps.
Be careful to have a few mm of clearance between the
cable and the rack drive module.
21) Use the barcode reader positioning jig (P/N: 2200430)

to adjust the position of the new barcode reader.

Place the barcode reader positioning jig in contact with the sample arm, as indicated by the
unbroken line below. Push the barcode reader against the jig, as indicated by the dotted
line below. Securely tighten the 2 screws.
22) Replace the sample probe and re-connect the red fingertight nut.
24) Slide in the metal top cover and lock the 2 ¼ turn fasteners.
25) Replace the reagent tray.
26) Replace the 3 reagent bottles. The correct positioning order for the bottles is indicated on the
top metal cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2
27) Install the power cord and turn on the power.
Continue with step 28 ONLY if the operating software is <DiaSer 1.13.
28) To test the new barcode reader, perform a run.

6.32 Detector Module

3) On the right side of the cartridge module, unscrew the beige

fingertight nut.
4)
Operating from the right side of the D-10, locate the white
union and unscrew the grey fingertight nut.
5) At the top of the module, remove the thumbscrew and

the black cover.

6) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the detector module

board.
7) Loosen the captive screw located on the right side of

the detector module.
8) Pull out the old detector module.
9) Put the new detector module in place and tighten the captive screw.
10) Remove the thumbscrew and black cover from the new module.
11) Connect the ribbon cable to the detector module board, replace the cover and tighten the
thumbscrew.
12) Connect:
• the blue PEEK tubing to the cartridge module (beige fingertight nut)
• the orange PEEK tubing to the white union (grey fingertight nut)
15) Perform the procedure from Section 7.1 Detector adjustment.

6.33 Rack Door Module
the door.
4) Operating from the left side of the D-10, locate the X movement board.
5) On this board, disconnect the 3 plugs coming from the rack

door module (labelled '2', '7' and '12'). Remove the ribbon
cable at the top for easier access.

7) Remove the 4 screws, which secure the rack door module to the
frame.
8) Remove the rack door module. Pay attention to the cables, as there are several metal cable
holders on their way to the X mvt board.
9) Install the new rack door module and secure it to the frame using the 4 screws.
10) Lead the 3 cables to the X mvt board and connect them to CN2, CN7 and CN12. Re-connect
the ribbon cable to the board if it was previously removed.


15) Go to the “D-10 Rack door module (1/2)” screen to test

the new rack door:
• start and stop the solenoid
• open and close the rack door
• monitor the sensors' status
6.34 Rack Input Sensor
the door.
4) On the X movement board, disconnect the plug coming from

the rack input sensor (labelled '8'). Remove the ribbon cable
at the top for easier access.


The rack input sensor is fastened with 1 screw and 1

serrated lock washer to a small, threaded metal plate. The
plate itself is fastened to the bottom of the rack drive
module.
7) Remove the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2

flat washers that secure the metal plate to the rack
drive module.
8) Remove the plate/sensor assembly from the rack drive module. Pay attention to the sensor
cable, as there are several cable holders on its way to the X movement board.
9) Remove the old rack input sensor from the metal plate.

10) Fasten the new rack input sensor to the metal plate.
Make sure the sensor is aligned properly with the plate. //
11) Secure the plate/sensor assembly to the rack drive module using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock
washers and 2 flat washers. The plate should be pushed to the far right (towards the rack
door) prior to securing the screws.
12) Lead the cable to the X movement board and connect it at CN9. Re-connect the ribbon cable
to the board if it was previously removed.
14) On the front side of the D-10, connect the front cover
sensor simulator (P/N: 2200415) and the front cover
switch simulator (P/N: 2200416).
WARNING: Use extreme caution when using these tools, as all moving parts can be
engaged.



• select To tube
• click on START
17) Remove the dilution/wash station. (Section 6.9)
18) On the “D-10 Sample arm module X (1/4)” screen:

• select Home movement
• click on START
19) Go to the “D-10 Rack introduction module (1/1)” screen:

• click on LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION
• introduce a rack
20) Unlock the 2 screws which secure the plate/sensor

assembly to the rack drive module. Use the rack sensor
adjustment gauge (P/N: 2200429) to adjust the position
of the new rack input sensor.

Move the rack manually and insert the rack Change the position of the gauge and
sensor adjustment gauge between the rack monitor again the Rack input sensor status.
and the rack drive module. Move the This time, the status should be no reflection.
plate/sensor assembly and monitor the Rack If the result is not correct, move the
input sensor status on the RACK INTRO. (1/1) plate/sensor assembly again. Repeat both
screen. With the gauge fully inserted, the tests until the results are OK. Tighten the
status should be reflection. screws when done.
21) Click on LAUNCH RACK EJECTION.


• select To tube
• click on START
23) Put the dilution/wash station back in place.

• click on START

25)
on SHUT DOWN.
26) Unplug the front cover sensor simulator and the front cover switch simulator.

6.35 Rack Output Sensor
the door.
4) On the X movement board, disconnect the plug coming from

the rack output sensor (labelled '9'). Remove the ribbon cable
at the top for easier access.


The rack output sensor is fastened with 1 screw and 1

serrated lock washer to a small, threaded metal plate.
The plate itself is fastened to the bottom of the rack drive
module.

washers that secure the metal plate to the rack drive
module.
8) Remove the plate/sensor assembly from the rack drive module. Pay attention to the sensor
cable as there are several cable holder on its way to the X movement board.
9) Remove the old rack output sensor from the metal plate.
10) Fasten the new rack output sensor to the metal plate.
Make sure the sensor is aligned properly with the plate.
//
11) Secure the plate/sensor assembly to the rack drive

module using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and
2 flat washers. The plate should be pushed to the far
left prior to securing the screws.

12) Lead the cable to the X movement board and connect at CN9. Re-connect the ribbon cable
to the board if it was previously removed.

17) Go to the “D-10 Rack introduction module (1/1)” screen

to check that the new sensor is working well:
• the default status should be no reflection
• click on LAUNCH RACK INTRODUCTION and
introduce a rack
• the sensor's status should change to reflection
• click on LAUNCH RACK EJECTION
• the status should come back to no reflection
6.36 User Interface Module


the D-10 (top).
6) Disconnect the ribbon cable located on the left end of the

LCD interface board.
7) On the front end of the user interface module,

open the metal cable holder and slide out the 2
grommets.

8) Open the last metal cable holder, located on the inner side
of the user interface module, to release the Teflon tubing to
the probe.
9) Pull the ribbon cable out of the plastic cable holder.
10) Remove the 4 screws and 4

spring lock washers that
secure the user interface
module to the frame. Be
careful to HOLD THE
MODULE with one hand.
11) Remove the user interface module. Pay attention to the contrast adjustment potentiometer
located on the right side.
12) Put the new user interface module in place and secure it using the 4 screws and 4 spring lock
washers. Pay attention to the contrast adjustment knob located on the right side.
13) Push the ribbon cable back in the plastic cable holder and re-connect it to the LCD interface
board.

14) Put the probe tubing back in place:

• slide in the 2 grommets
• close the 2 metal cable holders
18) Put the 3 bottles (buffers + wash/diluent) back in place on the reagent tray. The correct
positioning order for the bottles is indicated on the top metallic cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2
6.37 Arm
4) Remove the user interface module. (Section 6.36)
5) Disconnect the red fingertight nut at the top of the sample probe. CAREFULLY remove the
probe. Use extreme caution, as the probe is a biohazard.
Disconnect the large ribbon cable from the X movement

6)
board.

7) On the rear side of the arm, open the

metal cable holders and slide out the
grommet.
8) On the X movement board, disconnect all plugs coming from

the rack door module (labelled '2', '7' and '12') and the rack
drive module (labelled '3', '8' and '9').
9) Manually move the sample arm to the middle of the rack

drive module.
11) Remove the 4 screws, 4 spring lock washers and 4 flat washers, which secure the old arm to
the frame. Be careful to HOLD THE ARM with one hand.

12) CAREFULLY take out the old arm, tilting it to

facilitate the job. It is not necessary to remove
the 8-pin and 12-pin flex cables.
13) CAREFULLY install the new arm in the frame – but do not tighten the screws.
14) Put the sample arm alignment jigs (P/N: 2200433)

in place on each side of the frame and use them
to adjust the position of the new arm.

Make sure that the sample arm rests on the 2 pins indicated by the unbroken arrows. Then,
push (or pull) the arm so that it comes in contact with the 4 other pins (indicated by the
dotted arrows). Securely tighten the 4 screws.
15) Remove the sample arm alignment jigs.
16) Re-connect all cables to the X mvt board:

• the 3 plugs coming from the rack door module at CN2, CN7 and CN12
• the 3 plugs coming from the rack drive module at CN3, CN8 and CN9
• the ribbon cable
17) On the rear side of the rack drive module, slide in the grommet and close the metal cable
holders
18) Put the X movement adjustment tool (P/N: 2200428) in place.
19) Put the dummy probe (P/N: 2200424) in place and secure it with the red fingertight nut.
20) Replace the user interface module.

engaged.



• click on START

25) Check to see that the dummy probe is

correctly centered in the cone of the X
movement adjustment tool. If it is, go to step
34. If it isn't, continue with step 26.

• set Power on motor to free
• click on APPLY
27) Manually move the arm by rotating the X motor encoder disk until the probe is centered.

• set Power on motor to hold
• click on APPLY
29) Unlock the screw on the X movement encoder disk.

Manually rotate the X movement encoder disk counter clockwise (as viewed from the front)
30)
just until the X-asix sensor indicates “free”. Do this slowly so that the leading edge of the slot
is just visible to the sensor.
31) Carefully re-tighten the locking screw.


• click on START
Go to the “D-10 Sample arm module X (2/4)” screen:

33)
• set Direction to from left to right
• set Movement selet to strips 20
• click on START

• set Direction to from right to left
• set Movement select to sensors
• for the Home sensor, set the selection to yes
and the target to obstructed
• for the Axis sensor, verify that the selection is
set to no
• click on START
On the X motor, verify that the position sensor is between

35)
the 2 slots. If it is not, move the X home flag or X home
sensor until the sensor is between the 2 slots.
36) Check the probe position as described in steps 24 and 25.


• introduce the TH movement adjustment tool
(P/N: 2200432)
Go to the “D-10 Sample arm mod: Tube ident (2/3)”

38)
screen:
• click on START
• click on the SAVE RESULTS button, when
finished, to save the new TH offset value
Go to the “D-10 Sample arm mod: Tube ident (3/3)”

39) screen:
• select all tubes
• click on START
• verify that the TH offset value is correct by
comparing the indications of the magnet and
tube columns with the stickers on the TH
movement adjustment tool

• select To tube
• click on START


• set the Movement select to strips 140
• click on START
Use the Z movement control tool (P/N: 2200431) to verify the

setting of the Z movement. If the Z movement position is not
correct, adjust in the following order:
42) • Move the Z home flag or the Z home sensor.

• Initialize the Z movement only, with the home sensor.
• Make sure the Z position sensor is still between the 2
slots. If not, move the slotted disk.
• Check the Z movement control again using the Z
movement control tool.

Place the Z movement control tool in contact with the TH movement adjustment tool. Verify
that the probe support is between the 1st stage (included) and the 3rd stage (excluded). The
ideal situation is when the probe support touches the 2nd stage.
43) Perform the Hall Effect sensor adjustment from Section 7.11.

and click on LAUNCH RACK EJECTION


• select To sample aspiration position (tube)
• set Tube position to 7
• click on START

46)
on SHUT DOWN.
47) Unplug the external power cord.
48) Remove the X movement adjustment tool and replace the dilution/wash station.
49) Remove the dummy probe and replace the sample probe.

6.38 Rack Drive Module

5) On the X movement board, disconnect all plugs coming from

the rack drive module (labelled '3', '8' and '9'). Remove the
ribbon cable for easier access.
6) On the syringe module, unscrew the green and yellow

LUER fittings (tubes coming from the dilution/wash
station).
7) Manually move the sample arm to the middle of the rack drive module.

9) Remove the security cable connector at the bottom of the

rack drive module.
10) Remove the 4 screws, along with the spring lock washers and flat washers, that secure the
old rack drive module to the frame. Be careful to HOLD THE MODULE with one hand.
11) CAREFULLY take out the old rack drive module.
12) CAREFULLY install the new rack drive module in the frame – but do not tighten the screws.
13) Put the rack support alignment jigs (P/N: 2200433)

in place on each side of the frame and use them
to adjust the position of the new rack drive
module.
Make sure that the rack drive module is in contact with all 6 pins, then tighten the 4 screws.

14) Remove the rack support alignment jigs.
15) Connect the security cable connector to the new rack drive module.
16) On the syringe module, secure the green and yellow LUER fittings (tubes coming from the
dilution/wash station).
17) Connect the 3 plugs coming from the new rack drive module to the X movement board at
CN2, CN7 and CN12.
18) Put the X movement adjustment tool (P/N: 2200428) in place.
engaged.




• click on START
23) Remove the probe and replace it by the dummy probe (P/N: 2200424). WARNING: the
probe is a biohazard. Use EXTREME CAUTION when removing.

25) Refer to Section 6.37. Complete steps 24 through 46.


• click on START
Go to the “D-10 Servics Software (1/2) screen and click

27)
on SHUT DOWN.
28) Unplug the external power cord.
29) Remove the X movement adjustment tool and replace the dilution/wash station.
30) Remove the dummy probe and replace the sample probe.

6.39 HP Pump Head
On the bottom end of the pump head, remove the

1) piston flush tubing from the barbed fitting; detach all
fingertight nuts. Cap the line coming from the
proportioning valve using a plug and union.
2) Remove the 2 center pump head mounting screws.
3) Alternate the remaining 2 screws, loosening them a few turns at a time until the pump head is
free.
4) Pull the pump head straight out from the follower

assembly.

5) Move the piston flush barbed fitting from the old pump head to the replacement one.
6) Put the new pump head back on the follower assembly and secure the 2 center mounting
screws. Alternate between the 2 screws, giving a few turns at a time until the pump head is
fastened.
7) Secure the remaining 2 screws.
8) On the bottom end of the pump head, fasten the piston flush circuit outlet fitting.
9) Reattach the fluid lines removed in step 1.






6.40 HP Pump Piston
1) Remove the HP pump head. (Section 6.39)
2) Remove the piston assembly from the follower assembly.
Each piston assembly consists of a piston guide, a spring and a piston. Avoid getting
fingerprints or oil onto the piston assembly.

3) Pull the old piston straight out of the piston guide.
4) Insert a new piston.
5) Put the piston assembly back in the follower assembly. The flat faces on the piston guide
should be in the vertical position.
6) Put the HP pump head back in place.





11) Perform the procedure for Flow Rate verification in Section 7.6.
12) Perform the procedure from Section 7.3 WC-FC verification.
6.41 HP Pump Piston Seals
1) Remove the HP pump head. (Section 6.39)
2) Remove the priming port.
3) Remove the old piston seals from the inner side of

the pump head with the piston seal removal tool.
Dispose of the seals as they cannot be re-used.
4) Place the new seals in a large syringe.
5) Fill the syringe about half full of de-ionized water (preferably degassed).

6) Point the tip up and push the plunger in until all of the air is removed from the syringe.
7) Place a finger over the end of the syringe and pull the plunger back, in order to create some
vacuum in the barrel, and shake vigorously. Repeat this operation at least 5 times.
Install the new seals in the pump head with the piston seal removal tool. This may be done
8)
under water to avoid air introduction.
9) Put the priming port back on the pump head.
10) Put the HP pump head back in place.
11) Put the HP pump back in the D-10.





16) Perform the procedure for Flow Rate verification in Section 7.6.
6.42 Tube Height Sensor

engaged.
3) Launch the Service software:




• click on START
6) Disconnect the red fingertight nut at the top of the sample probe. CAREFULLY remove the
probe. Use extreme caution, as the probe is a biohazard.
7) On the “D-10 Sample arm module Z (1/4)” screen:

• click on START

8)
on SHUT DOWN.


the D-10 and slide out the metal top cover.

washers that secure the TH tube height flag (small
metal plate) to the sample arm. Remove the TH tube
height flag.
14) On the Z movement board, unplug the cable coming

from the TH tube height sensor.
The TH tube height sensor is fastened to the TH home flag

(small metal plate) with 2 nuts and 2 serrated lock
washers. The flex cable is also fastened to the plate, by
means of 2 tie-wraps.


washers that secure the TH home flag to the arm.
16) Remove the old cable and completely remove the

plate/sensor assembly from the arm.
17) Clean off the residues of adhesive on the arm.
18) Remove the old TH tube height sensor from the metal plate.
19) Fasten the new TH tube height sensor to the metal plate.
20) Fasten the flex cable to the metal plate using new
tie-wraps. It is very important to position them as
described on the picture, so that they don't interfere
with the movement of the arm.
21) Fold the end of the new flex cable, following the example of the old cable.
22) Fasten the plate/sensor assembly to the arm using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2
flat washers – but do not tighten the screws.

23) Use the TH home flag positioning jig (P/N: 2200426)

to adjust the position of the plate/sensor assembly.
Position the TH home flag positioning jig on the sample arm. Make sure the surfaces are in
contact. Match the surfaces indicated with the dotted and unbroken arrows.
Move the TH home flag so that it comes in contact (on both surfaces) with the jig. Tighten
the screws when done.

24) Route the flex cable to the Z mvt board and plug it in.
Each spare TH tube height sensor comes already

equipped with a piece of adhesive tape on the flex
cable.
25) Remove the protective sheet and glue the flex cable to the
sample arm. Make sure that the cable doesn't touch the
arm.
26) Fasten the TH tube height flag to the arm using the 2 screws, 2 spring lock washers and 2 flat
washers – but do not tighten the screws.
27) Use the TH tube height flag positioning jig (P/N:

2200426) to adjust the position of the metal plate.

Place the TH tube height flag positioning jig on the new TH tube height sensor. The surfaces
indicated with the unbroken arrows must come in contact.
Move the TH tube height flag so that it comes in contact with the 2nd stage of the jig.
Tighten the screws.
Verify that the TH tube height flag doesn't touch the 1st stage, but is placed between the 2nd
stage (included) and the 3rd stage (excluded). If this is not accomplished, repeat the
adjustment.



• introduce the TH movement adjustment tool
(P/N: 2200432)
Go to the “D-10 Sample arm mod: Tube Ident (2/3)”

30)
screen:
• click on START
• click on the SAVE RESULTS button, when
finished, to save the new TH offset value
Go to the “D-10 Sample arm mod: Tube Ident (3/3)”

31) screen:
• select all tubes
• click on START
• verify that the TH offset value is correct by
comparing the indications of the magnet and
tube columns with the stickers on the TH
movement adjustment tool


and click on LAUNCH RACK EJECTION

• click on START

34)
on SHUT DOWN.
36) Replace the sample probe and secure the red fingertight nut.

41) Place the 3 reagent bottles on the reagent tray. The correct positioning order for the bottles is
indicated on the top metal cover:
• 1 = buffer 1
• 2 = buffer 2
6.43 7-Port High-Pressure Valve Rotor Seal and Stator Face
Loosen the 2 captive screws and

1)
completely pull out the HPLC drawer.

The figure below shows the components of a typical high-pressure valve.
Remove all of the tubing connected to the stator. It is not necessary to remove the sample
2)
loop.
3) Remove the 3 stator screws with a 9/64 inch hex key.
Remove the stator and stator face assembly from the stator ring. If needed, remove the stator
4)
ring screws.
5) Remove the stator ring.
6) Gently pull the rotor seal off the shaft assembly.

Place the new rotor seal onto the shaft

assembly with the grooves facing the
7)
stator. The 3 holes on the rotor seal
will only fit on the assembly one way.
Replace the stator ring so the 2 short pins on the ring are placed into the corresponding holes
8)
in the body. Replace the stator ring screws if they were removed.
Place the new stator face assembly on

the stator matching the pins to the
9) holes in the stator. The notch on the
stator face assembly should be
oriented towards the hole on the stator.
Replace the stator and stator face assembly on the valve so that the pin on the stator ring is
10)
in the hole on the stator.
11) Replace the 3 stator screws. Tighten each screw one half turn past fingertight.
12) Push the HPLC drawer back into position and tighten the screws.

6.44 Reference
Section 7.1.11: Rhebuild Kit Package Insert; Rheodyne, Rohnert Park, California.

7 ADJUSTMENTS
7.1 List of Procedures
Section Procedure Page Number
7.2 Detector Adjustment 7-1
7.3 WC/FC Verification 7-5
7.4 WC/FC Measurements 4-14
7.5 High-Pressure Sensor Verification 7-19
7.6 High-Pressure Sensor Calibration (Field Procedure) 7-20
7.7 Verification of the Pump Flow Rate 7-23
7.8 High-Pressure Pump: Flow Rate Calibration 7-27
7.9 Thermal Module Check 7-34
7.10 Thermal Module Calibration 7-35
7.11 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check 7-42
7.12 Hall Effect Sensor Check 7-43
7.13 Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment 7-46
7.14 TH Offset Determination and Check 7-48
7.15 Mobile Cartridge Support Adjustment 7-50
7.2 Detector Adjustment

Objective
To set the offset and gain on each channel: sample measurement and reference
measurement.
Tools
D-10 service software (DIASER)

Flat head screwdriver with a maximum tip width of 1.5 mm
Multimeter (voltmeter and ohmmeter)
Preparation
Perform a Flow Cell Cleaning. (Section 9.2.5)

Prime the high-pressure circuit completely.

7.2.1 Locations of the Adjustment Trimmers and Test Points
J Test point N Test point
Sample Gain Sample Zero Reference Gain Reference

Trimmer Trimmer Trimmer Zero Trimmer
Fig. 7-1: Detector board: trimmer and test point locations

7.2.2 Procedure
1 Remove the front cover. (Section 6.2)

2 Unlock the 2 captive screws and
3 Remove the detector board cover.

Place the screw into the hole of the
detector to avoid any outside light.
4 Open the service software. Select the

Detector option from the D-10 Service
Software (1/2) screen.
5 On the Detector Screen(1/4), enter the

following values:
Set Light: 150

Set Gain: 64
6 Check the light source electrical intensity. Measure the voltage between J
test point (+) and N test point (-). The value should be 150 mV +/- 10 mV. If
the measured value is out of tolerance, check the LED source (ohmmeter,
low impedance in one direction). If the LED is OK, replace the detector
board.

7 In the Detector Screen (1/4) set the flow

rate to 1.5 mL/min. Select Start Pump. If
the pressure is unstable, re-prime the
pump. Select Start Pump.
8 Check for air bubbles in the flow cell.

• Remove the P4 tube, coming out of the detector module, at the female-
female connector.
• Using a finger, cover the outlet, being careful not to completely stop the
flow. Monitor the pressure. The additional pressure when the tube is
closed should not be higher than 150 psi (10.5 kg/cm2)
• Check if the detector Abs Meas. changes when the tube is closed or
open. If the value increases, there is a bubble in the flow cell. To remove
the bubble, open and close the outlet repeatedly for several seconds until
the measurement stabilises.
9 Rotate the sample gain trimmer counter clockwise until the minimum value
(Abs. Meas.) is reached.
Note: Because of the possible saturation of the first stage, it is possible that
the value can increase for a short time during the rotation. Continue the
rotation until the value is at the minimum.
10 Rotate the reference grain trimmer counter clockwise until the minimum
value is reached.
Note: Because of the possible saturation of the first stage, it is possible that
the value can increase for a short time during the rotation. Continue the
rotation until the value is at the minimum.
11 Adjust the sample gain trimmer clockwise until the displayed value is above
12,079,000 (-0, + 300,000).
If this value cannot be reached because it is lower than the target, adjust to
the maximum value. If the maximum value is lower than 10,000,000, the
LED light source must be replaced.
If this value cannot be reached because it is higher than the target, the LED
source has a higher intensity than usual. Adjust to the minimum value.
Check if the value is lower than the saturation value (16,777,215)
12 Adjust the reference gain trimmer clockwise until the displayed value of the
relative absorption (log) is equal to 0.020 AU (+/- 0.002 AU).
If the adjustment can be made continue with Step 14.

13 If this adjustment cannot be made, adjust the reference gain trimmer to the
maximum value. If the maximum value is lower than 10,000,000, the LED
light source must be replaced. See Section 6 for the procedure. If the
maximum value is higher than 10,000,000, adjust the sample gain trimmer
until the displayed value of the relative absorption (log) is equal to 0.020 AU
(+/- 0.002 AU).
14 Check the offset.
• Set Light: Enter 0 (LED off)
• Adjust the sample zero trimmer until the displayed Absorption value is
between 1000 and 7000.
• Adjust the reference zero trimmer until the displayed Reference value is
between 1000 and 7000.
15 Stop the High Pressure Pump.
16 Exit the Service Software.
17 Replace the detector board cover.
18 Carefully push the HPLC drawer back in and tighten the 2 captive screws.
19 Replace the front cover.
7.3 WC/FC Verification

Objective
Verification of the waiting count (WC) and filling count (FC) measurements found in the
instrument.ini file. This procedure must be performed after the replacement of the
proportioning valve (Section 6.17) or the high-pressure pump (Section 6.18). The
Static, Dilamex and Step Gradient tests are mandatory. The Continuous Gradient test is
optional.
Tools

WC/FC Check Kit (P/N 220-0440) containing a PEEK dummy insert, PEEK tubing coil
and dye. The dye must be diluted prior to use.
9.4 mL of dye to 0.5 L of distilled water, de-ionized water or buffer.
The final absorption level must be between 0.5 to 0.6 AU. If the absorption is out of
range, make adjustments to either the dye or water volume until the solution is within the
range.

7.3.1 Preparation
Preparation is required for each of the following procedures:
• Static Absorption Measurement

• Dilamex gradient test
• Step gradient test
• Continuous gradient test
1 Tool Installation:
• Remove the cartridge insert and

install the PEEK dummy insert
without the coil attached.
• Close the door.
• Remove the cover from the door of
the cartridge module.
• Connect the coil at the outlet and
inlet of the dummy insert.
2 Open the Service Software. Select HP:

Pump + Valve from the D-10 Service
Software (2/2) screen to open the D-10
HP module pump,valve (1/16) screen.
3 If necessary manually prime buffer 1 using the 50 mL syringe (40 mL

minimum).
4 Priming the Dye Solution:
• Cap the Buffer 2 line where it enters the proportioning valve and
connect the dye supply in its place. Place the dye bottle up on the
instrument to provide gravity flow.
• Select Start Prop Valve.
• Manually prime the dye solution through the pump using the 50 mL
syringe.
• Select Stop Prop Valve when the syringe is filled (40 mL minimum).
5 Set the flow rate at 1.5 mL/min and select “START PUMP”. Check the
pressure. The pressure value should be between 400 psi (28.2 kg/cm2)
and 700 psi (49.3 kg/cm2). If the pressure is not stable, re-prime the pump
and re-check the pressure. Stop the pump when done.

6 Close the D-10 HP module pump, valve (1/16) screen.

7 Select the “DETECTOR” button on the D-10 Service Software (1/2)
screen.
8 Enter the following parameters:
• Set Light: 150

• Set Gain: 64
Wait 3 minutes for stabilisation. If

necessary, modify the gain value to
obtain an absorption value of 0.02
AU +/- 0.002 AU. If the detector
absorption measurement does not
set, remove the bubbles from the
detector. Refer to Step 8 in Section
7.1.
9 Set the flow rate to1.5 mL/min and select Start Pump. Verify that the
pressure is stable. If it is unstable, re-prime the pump and check the
pressure.
10 Recheck the detector absorption measurement. If it is unstable, repeat
step 9 above.
11 Stop the Pump.
12 Return to the main screen in the service software.
7.3.2 Procedures
7.3.2.1 Static Absorption Measurement (18 minutes)
Perform the preparation steps from Section 7.3.1.
Objective
To determine the relative absorption of 100% dye solution.
Measurement
1 Select HP: Pump + Valve from the D-
10 Service Software (2/2) screen.
Select next until the D-10 HP
module: pump, valve (10/16) screen
is reached.

2 Set the flow rat to 1.5 mL/min. Select Start Pump.

3 Click on the field next to the “Selected log file” and select a file or create
a new file.
4 Select Start Test.
5 When the test is finished, select Stop Pump.
Calculation
1 Select Start Calculation. The following results are displayed on the
screen:
• Mean values for buffer 1 and dye solution

• The relative 100% buffer 2 (dye solution) absorption.
7.3.2.2 Dilamex Test (14 minutes)
Objectives
• To measure and check the 50% and 100% dynamic mixing.

• To adapt the WC and FC values in order to have a 100% dynamic buffer 2 close
to the static value.
• To have a % value as close as possible to the 50% value.
Measurement
1 Select HP: Pump + Valve from the
D-10 Service Software (2/2)
screen. Select next until the D-10
HP module: pump, valve (11/16)
screen is reached.
2 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min.

3 Enter the WC and FC values to test
4 Select the field next to “Load gradient file”. Load the gradient file
“dilamex_grad.hpl”
5 Select Start Pump.
6 Select the field next to “Selected log file” and select a log file or create a
new one.
8 When the test is finished, stop the pump.

Calculation
1 Select next to go to the “ D-10 HP
module: pump, valve: (12/16)”
screen.
2 In the field next to “Selected log file”, select the log file of the dilamex
test to process.
3 Select Start Calculation. The results are displayed on the screen.
Examination of the results
1 The relative absorption of 100% buffer 2 (dynamic 100% absorption) is
compared to the previously obtained static 100% absorption value (see
static absorption measurement, screen 10/16). The difference must be
< 5 mAU. The result of the AU comparison is shown in a box on the
screen.
• : indicates that the difference is within the tolerances. Proceed to

Step 3 below.
• : indicates that the difference is out of range. Proceed to Step 2.
• ? : indicates that the static value is not available. Perform the Static
Absorption Measurement(Section 7.3.2.1)
The relative value (in %) of the 50% buffer 2 absorption is compared to

the theoretical 50% value. Tolerance: +/- 0.7 %. The result of the
comparison is shown in a box on the screen.
• : indicates that the difference is within the tolerances.

• : indicates that the difference is out of range.
2 • If the static absorption is lower than the dynamic 100% absorption,
there is an error. Repeat the Static Absorption Measurement (Section
7.3.2.1).
• If the difference is higher than 0.005 AU, reduce the difference by
increasing the FC by 1 unit. Repeat the Dilamex test.
• If increasing the FC by 1-3 units cannot reduce the difference,
choose the minimum value of FC that gives the smallest difference.
3 Check the % relative absorption of 50% buffer2, compared to the 50%
value.
• : indicates it is OK. Proceed to Step 5.
• : indicates it is not OK. Proceed to Step 4.

4 • If the 50% point is lower than 50%, reduce the WC by one unit and
increase the FC by 1 unit. Repeat the Dilamex test.
• If the 50% point is higher than 50 %, increase the WC by 1 unit and
decrease the FC by 1 unit. Repeat the Dilamex test.
5 Note the WC and FC values with the best results:
• 100% dynamic buffer 2 as near as possible to the static value

• % value corresponding as near as possible to the 50% value.
7.3.2.3 Step Gradient Test (35 minutes)
Objectives
• To measure and check the response curve of the buffer mixing with the
previously measured WC and FC.
• Check the 50% point.
Measurement
D-10 Service Software (2/2) screen.
Select next until the D-10 HP
module: pump, valve (13/16) screen
is reached.
2 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min.

3 Enter the WC and FC values to test.
“step_grad.hpl”.
6 Select the field next to “Selected log file” and select a log file.

Calculation
screen.
2 In the field next to “Selected log file”, select the log file of the step
gradient test to process.
3 Select Start Calculation. The results are displayed on the screen.
1 The relative absorption of 100% buffer 2 (dynamic 100% absorption) is
compared to the Static 100% absorption value (see static absorption
measurement, screen 10/16). The difference must be < 5 mAU. The
result of the comparison is shown in a box on the screen.
• : indicates that the difference is within the tolerances. Proceed to

Step 4.
• : indicates that the difference is out of range. Proceed to Step 2.
• ? : indicates that the static value is not available. Repeat the Static
Absorption (Section 7.3.2.1).
The relative value (in %) of the 50% of buffer 2 absorption is compared

to the theoretical 50% value. Tolerance: +/- 0.7 %. The result of the
comparison is shown in a box on the screen.

The relative values (in %) of the other steps (10 to 90%) are calculated
and compared to a tolerance window. The results of the calculation are
shown on the screen. Typical tolerance ranges:
10%: 3 to 10 60%: 60 to 68
20%: 11 to 20 70%: 70 to 79
30%: 21 to 30 80%: 80 to 89
40%: 32 to 40 90%: 90 to 97.


2 Check the relative absorption of 100% buffer 2 (dynamic 100%

absorption) compared to the Static 100% absorption value.
If the indication is , repeat the dilamex test (Section 7.3.2.2).
3 Check the % relative absorption of 50% buffer2, compared to 50%.
4 Check the other points.
7.3.2.4 Continuous Gradient Test (Optional)
Objectives
• Check the continuous gradient curve with the previously measured WC and FC.
• Check if the curve shape is good.
Measurement
HP module: pump, valve (15/16)
screen is reached.
2 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min

3 Enter the WC and FC values to test
“cont_grad.hpl”
6 Select the field next to “Selected log file” and select a log file.

Calculation
screen.
2 Select the log file of the continuous gradient test to process.

3 Select Start Calculation. The curve is displayed on the screen.
1 Verify that the curve has the appropriate shape. Refer to the example
Calculation Step 1 above.
If not OK, repeat the dilamex test (Section 7.3.2.2).
7.3.2.5 Entering the WC and FC Values
1 Select HP: Pump + Valve from

the D-10 Service Software (2/2)
screen. Select next until the D-
10 HP module: pump, valve
(8/16) screen is reached.
2 Enter the WC, used in the previous test, into the “WC (Waiting count)”
field
3 Enter the FC, used in the previous test, into the “FC (Filling count)” field
4 Click on the “DONE” button. The data is now stored in the instrument.ini
file.
5 Reconnect the buffer 2 line at the proportioning valve.
6 With the proportioning valve on, pump at 1.5 ml/min for 3 minutes.
7 Disconnect the tubing coil from the dummy insert. Replace the cap on
the cartridge module door. Remove the dummy insert. Install the D-10
cartridge.
8 Close the D-10 HP module:pump,valve (8/16) screen.

9 From the D-10 Service Software (1/2) screen, select the “DETECTOR”
button.
10 Select Start Pump. Check the
detector values. If the values are
erratic it indicates air bubbles in the
circuit. Remove the bubbles
according to Section 7.2.2, step 8.
11 Enter 0 in the Set Light field to switch off the LED light source.
12 Close the Service Software.
7.4 WC/FC Measurements

Objective
Determination of the waiting count (WC) and filling count (FC) of the high pressure
pump. Unit: °.
Tools
• D-10 service software (DIASER)

• WC-FC determination kit (P/N 240-0442)
• Includes: 30 mL plastic syringe, T junction, silicon tube, PEEK tubing coil
mounted on the PEEK dummy insert, ruler
7.4.1 Preparation
1 Tool Installation:
• Remove the cartridge insert and

install the PEEK dummy insert
without the coil attached.
• Close the door.
• Remove the cover from the door of
the cartridge module.
• Connect the tubing coil at the outlet
and inlet of the dummy insert.
2 Using the T junction and the silicon tubing, connect the 30 mL syringe to the
buffer 1 inlet. (Figure 7-2)

T Connector
T2 White T1 Green
Teflon tube
0 ID = 1,59 mm
Silicone tube
6 mm x 3 mm
10
20
D-10
30
ml
30 mL syringe
BUFFER 1 BUFFER 2
Fig. 7-2: Installation for WC/FC determination, drawing 1
3 Fill the 30 mL syringe with buffer 1. If it is difficult, disconnect the T1

(green fitting) from the rear panel of the D-10 and close off the end of
the tubing with a finger. Reconnect the T1 tube to the D-10 rear panel
when done.
4 Open the Service Software. Select
HP: Pump + Valve from the D-10
Service Software (2/2) screen to
open the D-10 HP module pump,
valve (1/16) screen.
5 Manually prime the buffer 1 at the pump using a 50 mL syringe (40 mL

minimum).
6 Select Start Prop Valve and manually prime the buffer 2 line using a 50
mL syringe. Select Stop Prop Valve when the syringe is filled (40 mL
minimum).

7 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min. Select Start Pump. Check if the
pressure is stable. If the pressure is not stable, re-prime the pump and
re-check the pressure. Select Stop Pump when done.
8 Remove the teflon tube from the buffer 1 bottle and place it on the ruler.
See figure 7-3.
Ruler
0 10 20 30
POSITIVE movement of
the meniscus T Connector
Teflon tube, ID = 1.59 mm

T2 T1
white green
0
Silicon tube BUFFER 2

10
6 mm x 3 mm
20
D-10
30
ml
HP pump
Buffer 1 filled 30 mL syringe
Fig. 7-3: Installation for WC/FC determination, drawing 2
7.4.2 Procedure
Leak check
Observe the meniscus in the buffer 1 tube. Check that there is no
movement of the meniscus under the following conditions:
• VALVE off and HP PUMP off

• VALVE on and HP PUMP off
• VALVE on and then HP PUMP on.
If the meniscus moves down the tube, the proportioning valve or buffer
tubing is leaking.
After the check, stop the pump and the valve.

Determination of the sum WC + FC

Objective
To define the WC + FC sum by verifying the movement of the meniscus. This

determination is done in 2 steps:
• Roughly estimate the WC + FC sum by changing the FC value by steps of 5

units.
• Precisely define this one by modifying the FC value by a step of 1 unit.
The typical table for the (WC, FC) set is as follows:
• WC: 145, FC 130

• WC: 145, FC 125
• WC: 145, FC 120
• WC: 145, FC 115
1 Select next to until the “ D-10 HP
screen is reached.
2 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min

3 Set WC to 145 and FC to 130 for the first step values.
“determ_WC_FC_0.hpl”
6 Observe the movement of the meniscus. If the movement is in the
“negative” direction, immediately stop the test and the pump.
7 Selected the next set of values for WC and FC, and enter these values into
the system.
8 Select the same gradient file. (When the gradient is loaded, the new values
of WC/FC are taken in account).
9 Select Start Test again and observe the direction of the meniscus.
10 Stop the test and the pump.
11 Repeat steps 7 to 10 until a change in the movement direction is detected.
Notice the values for the two rough limits of FC: for a movement in the
positive direction, FC(r+) and for a movement in the negative direction, FC
(r-).

12 When the two limits FC(r+) and FC(r-) are found, the test should be
repeated between these two limits of FC. Change the FC by 1 unit until the
new, precise limits FC(p+) (movement of the meniscus in positive direction)
and FC(p-) (movement of the meniscus in negative direction or no
movement) are determined.
13 When these limits are defined, note that the SUM = 140 + FC(p-).
Determination of the WC and FC
Objective
To determine the values for WC and FC, by observing the movement of the
meniscus. Begin the test with the following rough values of WC: 150, 155, 160.
1 Begin with a value of WC = 150. Calculate the FC : FC = SUM-150.
Enter the two values into the system.
2 Select the gradient file “determ_WC_FC_0.hpl”. (When the gradient is
loaded, the new values of WC/FC are taken in account).
4 Observe the movement of the meniscus. Immediately stop the test and
pump after movement is seen.
6 Select the next set of values for WC and calculate FC = SUM - WC. Enter
the two values into the system.
7 Select the gradient file “determ_WC_FC_0.hpl”. (When the gradient is
loaded, the new values of WC/FC are taken in account).
8 Select Start Test. Observe the movement of the meniscus. Immediately
stop the test and pump after movement is seen.
9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 until a change in the direction of the movement is
noticed. Note the values for the two limits of WC: WC(r+) for a movement in
the positive direction, and WC(r-) for a movement in the negative direction.
If the movement of the meniscus is always negative, increase the SUM by
one unit and repeat step 8.
10 When the two limits WC(r+) and WC(r-) are found, the test should be
repeated between these two limits of WC. Change the WC by 1 unit, until
the new precise limits WC(r+) (movement of the meniscus in positive
direction) and WC(r-) (movement of the meniscus in negative direction or
no movement) are determined.
11 When these limits are defined, WC = WC(p-)- and FC = SUM - WC.
12 Note these two values for the next checks. The values should be entered
into the instrument.ini file after the verification process is complete.
(Section 7.3.)
End of Procedure
Remove the syringe, T junction and tubing. Reconnect the buffer 1 line to the D-
10 if removed. Place the line back into the buffer bottle.

7.5 High-Pressure Sensor Verification

Objective
Check the values given by the high-pressure sensor. This procedure must be performed
after installation of a new high-pressure sensor.
Tools

Pressure gauge (0 –5000 psi)
1500 psi back pressure regulator with fittings
D-10 Cartridge Bypass tool (P/N 220-0435)
7.5.1 Preparation
1 Tool Installation
• Remove the cartridge insert and install the PEEK dummy insert.
• Remove the cap from the door of the cartridge module. Close the
door.
• Connect the pressure gauge to the inlet of the insert.
• Connect the tubing from the inlet of the backpressure regulator to the
outlet of the pressure gauge.
Connect the tubing from the outlet of the backpressure regulator to the
outlet of the insert.
2 Prime the high-pressure circuit.
7.5.2 Procedure
Objective
To check the calibration of the high-pressure sensor.

screen. The D-10 HP module:
pump, valve (1/16) screen is
displayed.
2 Select psi in the field next to the "Pressure" field.

3 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min. Select Start Pump.

4 • Adjust the backpressure regulator until the pressure gauge reads
approximately 500 psi.
• Check the value displayed on the screen and compare it to the value
on the pressure gauge. Tolerance: lower than +/- 5%.
5 Select Stop Pump when done.
6 Evaluation of the Results
• If the results are not within the tolerance, perform a calibration of the
sensor (Section 7.5)
• If the results are acceptable, disconnect the pressure gauge and
backpressure regulator from the dummy cartridge insert. Remove
the insert and replace the cover on the door. Install the analytical
cartridge.
7 Close the D-10 HP module: pump, valve (1/16) screen. Select
“Detector” from the D-10 Service Software (1/2) screen.
9 Enter the number 0 in the “Set Light” field to turn off the LED light
source. Close the service software.
7.6 High-Pressure Sensor Calibration (Field Procedure)

Objective
Calibrate the high-pressure sensor: determine the slope and the intercept.
Check the result of the calibration.
Tools

Pressure gauge (0-5000 psi)
1500 psi back pressure regulator with fittings
Pulse Dampener (P/N 195-7226)

7.6.1 Preparation
1 Tool Installation
• Remove the cartridge insert and install the PEEK bypass tool.
door.
• Connect the pulse dampener to the inlet of the tool.
• Connect the inlet of the pressure gauge to the outlet of the pulse
dampener.
• Connect the tubing from the outlet of the backpressure regulator to the
outlet of the insert.
2 Prime the high pressure circuit.
7.6.2 Procedure
Objective
To determine the slope and the intercept of the pressure sensor by measuring two
points: a low pressure point and a high pressure point.
1 Select HP: Sensor Calib from the

HP module: sensor calibration
2 Select psi in the field next to the "Pressure" field.

3 First Measurement: Approximately 1470 psi
• Adjust the pressure slightly above 1470 psi. The displayed values
decrease slowly (thermal stabilisation).
• When the pressure reaches 1470 psi, click on the “MEMORIZE”
button at the end of the line “Pressure: high value”.
• Enter 1470 psi into the “External Ref.” field for “Pressure: high
value”.

4 Second Measurement: Approximately 0 psi
• Stop the pump and open the pump outlet fitting and a connection at
the cartridge bypass tool.
• When the pressure stabilizes, click on the “MEMORIZE” button at the
end of the line “Pressure: low value”.
• Enter 0 psi into the “External Ref.” field for “Pressure: low value”.
5 Calculation
When both points have been entered, select “Calculation of the offset
and the gain”. The results of the calculation (sensor offset and sensor
gain) are displayed.
6 Tolerances
Gain: 10 to18.
Offset: 0 to 50.
If the values are correct, save the results. The new values are stored
into the instrument.ini file. If the values are not correct, repeat the
procedure.
NOTE: You must leave and re-enter service software for the new
parameters to take effect.
7 Perform the Verification Procedure in Section 7.6.3.
7.6.3 Verification
Objective
Check the result of the calibration.
1 Check at 500 psi
• Adjust the pressure to a value near 500 psi.

• Compare the displayed value on the screen and the value of the
pressure gauge. Tolerance: +/- 2%
2 Remove the pressure gauge and backpressure regulator. Remove the
cartridge insert and replace the cover on the door. Install the analytical
cartridge and close the door.

7.7 Verification of the Pump Flow Rate

Objective
The verification is performed to check the pump flow rate at 1.5 mL/min and 500 psi
backpressure. The measurement uses either the volumetric method (7.7.2) or the
gravimetric method (7.7.3). This procedure must be performed after replacement of any
pump components where faults (pressue leakage) did not accompany insufficient flow.
Tools

Backpressure regulator (0 to 1500 psi)
Volumetric container (read error < 0.2 %) such as a 5 mL volumetric flask (Section 7.7.2
Volumetric Method)
Balance (precision: 0.01g) and 25 mL minimum volume container (Section 7.7.3
Gravimetric Method)
Distilled or deionized water or buffer (depending on method used)
7.7.1 Preparation
1 Tool Installation
• Remove the cartridge insert and install the cartridge bypass tool.
door.
• Connect the pressure gauge to the inlet of the tool.
• Place the tubing from the outlet of the backpressure regulator into
the vessel to be used.
2 Select HP: Flow Calib from the D-
Select Next until the D-10 HP
module: flow rate calib (2/4)
screen is reached.
3 Using a 50 mL syringe, prime the pump (40 mL minimum) with buffer 1.

4 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min. Select Start Pump. If the pressure is
not stable, re-prime the pump and re-check the pressure.

5 Check for leaks.

6 Adjust the backpressure regulator for a pressure value of 500 psi.
7 Stop the HP pump.
7.7.2 Volumetric Method
Procedure
Check the 1.5 mL/min flow rate at 500 psi

1 Select HP: Flow Calib from the
screen. Select Next until the D-
10 HP module: flow rate calib
2 Select Volume from the drop down list next to “Method selection”.
3 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min in the “Flow rate” field.
4 Enter 4 in the field next to “Duration”. If the value, indicated in the
“Remaining time” field, is different from 4 minutes reset this value by
selecting the “TIMER RESET” button.
5 Check the backpressure at this flow rate before beginning the test.
Select Start Pump. If necessary, adjust the backpressure regulator to a
pressure of 500 psi (mean value).
6 Check for leaks.
7 Stop the pump.
8 Empty the vessel and dry it thoroughly.
9 Place the tubing from the regulator back into the vessel.
11 When the meniscus of the fluid reaches the 5 mL mark, select Stop Test.
The remaining time is indicated on the screen. It should be
approximately 40 seconds.
Note: If the remaining time is 0, the test is automatically stopped. If the

value 0 is obtained before the 5 mL vessel is filled, there is a problem
with the delivery by the high-pressure pump or the selected duration was
not 4 minutes.
12 Enter 5 into the field next to “Volume”. The “Time” field is automatically
updated and is calculated from the time of Start Test was selected.

13 Select “LAUNCH CALC.”. The result is displayed in the “Calculated”

field of the “data calculation results: mL/min area. The calculated value
is compared to the theoretical value. The result of the comparison is
given in a box next to the calculation.

• : indicates that the difference is out of range. The calibration must
be repeated.
Tolerance: 5%.
Final Steps
1 • Disconnect the backpressure regulator from the pressure gauge.
• Disconnect the pressure gauge from the bypass tool.
• Replace the cap on the cartridge module door.
• Install the D-10 cartridge.
2 Close the “D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. 4/4” screen. Select
“DETECTOR” from the D-10 Service Software (1/2) screen.

7.7.3 Gravimetric Method
Procedure
Check the 1.5 mL/min flow rate at 500 psi

screen is reached.
2 Select weight from the drop down list next to “Method selection”.
3 Enter the density of the liquid to be used in the “Density” field
• Buffer 1: typically 1.001 g/mL

• Distilled or Deionized water: 1.000 g/mL
5 Enter 10 in the field next to “Duration”.
7 Check for leaks.
8 Stop the pump.
10 Weigh the empty vessel. Note the weight.
13 The test is finished the value in the “Remaining time” field will be 0.
14 Weigh the vessel, being careful not to spill the liquid. Enter this value, in
g, into the field next to “Weight”.
15 Select “LAUNCH CALCULATION”. The result is displayed in the
“Calculated” field of the “data calculation results: mL/min area. The
calculated value is compared to the theoretical value. The result of the
comparison is given in a box next to the calculation.

• : indicates that the difference is out of range. The calibration must
be repeated.
Tolerance: 5%.

Final Steps
1 • Disconnect the backpressure regulator from the pressure gauge.
• Disconnect the pressure gauge from the cartridge bypass tool.
• Replace the cap on the cartridge module door.
• Install the D-10 cartridge.
2 Close the “D-10 HP module: flow rate calib. 4/4” screen. Select
“DETECTOR” from the D-10 Service Software (1/2) screen.
erratic it indicates air bubbles in
the circuit. Remove the bubbles
7.8 High-Pressure Pump: Flow Rate Calibration

Objectives
• Measure the flow rate of the pump with the theoretical parameters
• Calculation of the correction
• Check the result of the correction
Tools

Back pressure regulator (0 to 1500 psi)
Volumetric container (read error < 0.2 %) such as a 5 mL volumetric flask (Section 7.8.2
Volumetric Method)
Balance (precision: 0.01g) and 25 mL minimum volume container (Section 7.8.3
Gravimetric Method)
Distilled or deionized water or buffer (depending on method used)

7.8.1 Preparation
1 Tool Installation
• Remove the cartridge insert and install the cartridge bypass tool.
door.
• Connect the pressure gauge to the inlet of the bypass tool.
• Place the tubing from the outlet of the backpressure regulator into
the vessel to be used.
screen is reached.
3 Using a 50 mL syringe, prime the pump (40 mL minimum) with distilled

water (gravimetric method) or with buffer 1 (volumetric method).
4 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min. Select Start Pump. If the pressure is
not stable, re-prime the pump and re-check the pressure.
5 Check for leaks.
6 Adjust the backpressure regulator for a pressure value of 500 psi.
7 Stop the HP pump.
7.8.2 Volumetric Method Procedure
Objective
To measure the time it takes to fill a volumetric vessel at a defined flow rate and
backpressure. A calculation is performed using the theoretical and measured flow
rates.

First Measurement: 1 mL/min theoretical flow rate

1 Select volume from the drop
down list next to “Method
selection”.
3 Enter 6 in the field next to “Duration”. If the value indicated in the
“Remaining time” field is not 6 minutes, reset this value by selecting the
“TIMER RESET” button.
5 Check for leaks.
6 Stop the pump.
7 Empty the vessel and dry it out completely.
8 Put the free end of the backpressure regulator into the empty vessel.
approximately 1 minute.

with the delivery by the high pressure pump or the selected duration was
not 6 minutes.
12 Select the “LAUNCH CALC.” button. The result is displayed in the “1.0”
field under the “Data calculation results: mL/min” area. Check the
calculated value. If the value differs from the set flow rate by more than
15%, there is an error in the measurements and the test must be
repeated.
Second Measurement: 1.5 mL/min theoretical flow rate
“Remaining time” field, is not 4 minutes, reset this value by selecting the

4 Check for leaks.
5 Stop the pump.

not 4 minutes.
field under the “Data calculation results: ml/min” area. Check the
repeated.
Third Measurement: 2.0 mL/min theoretical flow rate
2 Enter 3 in the field next to “Duration”. If the value indicated in the
“Remaining time” field not 3 minutes, reset this value by selecting the
4 Check for leaks.
5 Stop the pump.

not 3 minutes.

field under the “Data calculation results: ml/min” area. Check the
repeated.
Saving the Calculations
1 After completion of the 3 flow rate
measurements, select Next to
display the D-10 HP module: flow
rate calib (3/4) screen. The
theoretical and measured flow rate
is displayed for each flow rate
tested. The slope and intercept for
each rule (1, 2 and 3) are also
calculated and displayed.
2 Save the results by selecting the “SAVE RESULTS” button.

A confirmation screen is opened. If the confirmation is given, the new
values are saved into the instrument.ini file.
7.8.3 Gravimetric Method Procedure
Objective
To measure the weight of a liquid delivered by the pump at 3 different flow rates for a
defined time and backpressure.
First Measurement: 1 mL/min theoretical flow rate

1 Select HP: Flow Calib from the
10 HP module: flow rate calib
2 Select weight from the drop down list next to “Method selection”.

3 Enter the density of the liquid to be used in the “Density” field
• Buffer 1: typically 1.001 g/mL

• Distilled or Deionized water: 1.000 g/mL
“Remaining time” field, is not 10 minutes, reset this value by selecting
the “TIMER RESET” button.
7 Check for leaks.
8 Stop the pump.
13 The test is finished when the value in the “Remaining time” field is 0.
15 Select “LAUNCH CALC.”. The result is displayed in the “1.0” field of the
“Data calculation results: ml/min” area. Check the calculated value. If the
value differs by more than 15%, there is an error in the measurements.
Repeat the test.
Second Measurement: 1.5 mL/min theoretical flow rate
1 Set the flow rate to 1.5 mL/min in the "Flow rate" field.
4 Check for leaks.
5 Stop the pump.
Repeat the test.


Third Measurement: 2.0 mL/min theoretical flow rate
1 Set the flow rate to 2.0 mL/min in the "Flow rate" field.
4 Check for leaks.
5 Stop the pump.
Repeat the test.
Calculations
1 After the 3 measurements are taken
and the flow rates are calculated,
select Next to open the “D-10 HP
module: flow rate calib. 3/4” screen.
The theoretical and measured flow
rates are displayed. The slope and
intercept for each rule (1, 2 and 3)
are calculated and displayed.
2 Save the results by selecting the “SAVE RESULTS” button. A

confirmation screen will open. If the confirmation is accepted, the new
values are saved into the instrument.ini file.

7.9 Thermal Module Check

Objective
Check the temperature of the thermal module.
Tools

Fluke™ multimeter, with thermocouple connection
Cartridge insert with thermocouple temperature sensor
Procedure
1 Select "Thermal Control" from

screen.
2 Remove the cartridge insert from the cartridge holder and replace it with
the cartridge insert equipped with the thermocouple temperature sensor.
Close the cartridge module. Connect the sensor wire to the Fluke
multimeter.
3 Wait 20 minutes for thermal stabilisation. Verify the in the “Current calc.
temp.” field and on the Fluke multimeter.
4 Compare the values obtained on the screen and the value on the
multimeter.
• Tolerance: +/- 1.6°C
If the values are not within the range perform the Thermal Module
Calibration procedure (Section 7.9).
5 Close the current thermal module screen.

6 Remove the Cartridge insert with temperature sensor and install the
normal cartridge insert.
7 Close the “D-10 Thermal module control (1/7)” screen. Select
“DETECTOR” from the "D-10 Service Software (1/2)" screen.


detector values. If the values
are erratic, it indicates air
bubbles in the circuit. Remove
the bubbles according to
Section 7.2.2, step 8.
7.10 Thermal Module Calibration

Objectives
• Calibrate the temperature measurement on the system. It consists of the following

determinations:
gain and offset of the electronic interface (slope and intercept), depending on the
interface board
the sensor offset correction, depending on the sensor
the gradient correction; gradient between the sensor location and the cartridge
holder
• Check the result of the calibration.
Tools

Pt100 electronic thermometer (Hanna instrument)
low temperature control set
high temperature control set
cartridge insert with temperature sensor
adapter wire

7.10.1 Preparation
1 Remove the front cover. (Section 6.2)

2 Unlock the 2 captive screws and
3 Switch on the thermometer and set the range to -199.9 to 199.9 °C (one
decimal digit)
7.10.2 Interface Board Gain and Offset Measurements
Objective
Determination the slope and intercept of the interface board electronics. The values are
then saved into the system.
Gain (slope) and Offset (intercept) Measurements

the D-10 Service Software
(2/2) screen. Select Next
until the D-10 Thermal
module control (5/7) screen is
reached.
2 Connect the low temperature control set to the thermometer using the
adapter wire. Note the value: LT EXT (°C)
3 Connect the high temperature control set to the thermometer using the
adapter wire. Note the value: HT EXT (°C)
4 Disconnect the D-10’s temperature sensor from CN4 on the high-
pressure module board. (Figure 7-4)

CN4 Connection
Fig. 7-4: High-Pressure Module Board with the CN4 Connection
5 Connect the low temperature control set to CN4. The system displays a
“current calc. temp”. (Approximately 20 -22°C)
6 Select “START CALIBRATION”.
7 Enter the LT EXT value into the “Temp.: low value”, “External Ref.” field.
Click on the “MEMORIZE” button next to this field.
8 Select “STOP CALIBRATION”.
9 Remove the low temperature control set from CN4 and connect the high
temperature control set. The system displays a “current calc. temp”.
(Approximately 40 -43°C)
10 Select “START CALIBRATION”.
11 Enter the HT EXT value into the “Temp.: high value”, “External Ref.”
field. Click on the “MEMORIZE” button next to this field.

Calculations
1 Launch the calculation by selecting the “CALCULATION OF THE GAIN
AND THE OFFSET” button. The results of the calculation (system offset
and system gain) are displayed. Tolerances for the measured values:
• System gain: 0.90 to 1.10

• System offset: - 4°C and + 4°C
If the values are within range, select "Save Results". The new values
are stored in the instrument.ini file.
If the values are not correct, there is a problem on the temperature

measurement interface.
End of the test
1 Connect the Pt100 thermal sensor to CN4.
2 Click on the “STOP CALIBRATION” button. The temperature displayed
in the “Current calc. temp.” field takes into account the new saved
parameters.
3 Proceed to Section 7.10.3 Sensor Offset Correction Measurement.
7.10.3 Sensor Offset Correction Measurement
Objective
Determination of the sensor offset correction. The result will be saved into the system.
Measurements
10 Thermal module control (6/7)
screen is reached.
2 Connect the D-10’s Pt100 thermal sensor to CN4 on the high-pressure

module board. (Figure 7-6)
3 Wait 10 to 15 minutes for a thermal stabilisation. Check the stabilisation
in the “Current calc. temp.” field.
4 Remove the D-10 Pt 100 thermal sensor from CN4 and connect it
quickly to the external thermometer with the adapter wire. Note the

displayed value: EXT TEMP (°C)

5 Reconnect the D-10 Pt100 thermal sensor to CN4 on the high-pressure
module board.
6 Click on the “START CALIBRATION” button. Wait 5 seconds.
7 Enter the EXT TEMP value into the “Temperature”, “External Ref.” field.
8 Click on “MEMORIZE” at the end of the “Temperature” field.
Calculation
1 Launch the calculation by click ing the “CALCULATION OF THE
SENSOR OFFSET” button. The result of the calculation is displayed in
the “sensor offset, calc.” field. Tolerances for the measured value:
• Sensor offset: - 2°C and + 2°C.
If the values are correct, select Save Results. The new value is stored
into the instrument.ini file.
If the values are not correct, there is a problem with the temperature
measurement interface or on the sensor.
End of the test
1 Click the “STOP CALIBRATION” button. The temperature displayed in
the “Current calc. temp.” field takes into account the new saved
parameter.
2 Proceed to Section 7.10.4 Gradient Offset Measurement.
7.10.4 Gradient Offset Measurement
Objectives
Determination of the gradient offset between the position of the sensor and the cartridge.
The value is saved to the system.
Measurements
1 Select "Thermal Control" from the
screen. Select Next until the D-10
Thermal module control (7/7)
screen is reached.

the cartridge insert equipped with the temperature sensor. Close the
cartridge module. Connect the sensor wire to the Pt100 electronic
thermometer.
3 Wait 20 minutes for a thermal stabilisation. Check the stabilisation in the
“Current calc. temp.” field and on the thermometer.
4 After stabilisation, click on the “START CALIBRATION” button.
5 Enter the value from the thermometer in the field labelled “external ref.”
And click on “MEMORIZE” at the end of the “Temperature” field.
Calculation
1 Select “CALCULATION OF THE GRADIENT OFFSET”. The result of
the calculation is displayed in the “gradient offset, calc.” Field.
Tolerances for the measured value:
• Gradient offset range is between 0°C and - 2°C
If the values are correct, select Save Results. The new value is stored
into the instrument.ini file.
If the values are not correct, there is a problem with the temperature
measurement interface or on the sensor.
End of the test
1 Click on the “STOP CALIBRATION” button. The temperature displayed
in the “Current calc. temp.” field takes into account the new saved
parameter.
thermometer. They should be the same: tolerance: +/- 0.2°C.
3 Proceed to Section 7.10.5 Verification.
7.10.5 Verification
Objective
To check the temperature of the cartridge.

Procedure
screen.
the cartridge insert equipped with the temperature sensor. Close the
cartridge module. Connect the sensor wire to the Pt100 electronic
thermometer.
3 Wait 20 minutes for a thermal stabilisation. Verify the temperature in the
“Current calc. temp.” field and on the thermometer.
thermometer. They should be the same: tolerance: +/- 0.2°C. If not,
repeat the calibration procedure.
End of test
1 If necessary, connect the temperature sensor to CN4 on the HP module
connection board.
2 If necessary, remove the cartridge insert with temperature sensor and
re-install the cartridge insert.
3 Carefully push the HPLC drawer back in. Tighten the 2 captive screws.
4 Replace the front cover.
5 Close the “D-10 Thermal module control (1/7)” screen. Select
“DETECTOR” from the "D-10 Service Software (1/2)" screen.
erratic it indicates air bubbles in
the circuit. Remove the bubbles

7.11 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check

Objectives
• Check the performance of the internal waste bottle vacuum system

• Compare the performance to the standard performance
Tools
7.11.1 Procedure
1 Select "Syringe" from the D-10

Service Software (1/2) screen.
kPa
2 Click on the “Waste Vacuum” unit field and select the “kPa” unit.
3 Click on the “Start Dilution Valve” and on the “Start Wash Valve” buttons.
These actions close the 2 pinch valves on the syringe module, thereby
closing the internal waste circuit.
4 Click on the “Start Liquid Pump” button. This action starts the liquid
pump.
5 The vacuum in the closed circuit, displayed on the “Waste Vacuum” field,
will increase. Note the maximum value obtained after 15 seconds.
6 Click on the “Stop the Liquid Pump” button.
7 Click on the “Stop Dilution Valve” and the “Stop Wash Valve” buttons.
The internal vacuum is removed.
8 Refer to Section 7.11.2 Results for evaluation of the test.

7.11.2 Results
Typically the performance of the waste bottle vacuum should be > 50 kPa.
The level of the waste bottle check in the Dia.exe software is typically set to 29 kPa. If
the vacuum measured during the waste bottle check before a run is less than this limit,
the check fails. The performance measurement done with this protocol does not have
any software limitation of the vacuum.
If the level measured by this test is very low (less than 5 kPa for example), there is an air
leak in the internal waste circuit.
If the level is more than 5 kPa, but less than the maximal performance of approximately
50 to 60 kPa, there is probably a loss of performance of the pump. This may be due an
internal blockage of the air and liquid flow into the pump. In this case, the pump should
be cleaned or replaced.
A level around 50 kPa or more indicates the waste circuit is functioning properly and is
within a good safety margin.
7.12 Hall Effect Sensor Check

Objective
Verify that the Hall effect sensor is functioning properly.
Tools

Standard rack, with 13 mm adapter inserts
7 Microvial adapters
7.12.1 Procedure
First Setup
1 Select "Rack Intro" from the D-
10 Service Software (1/2)
screen.

2 If there is a rack in the system, select "Launch Rack Ejection" and remove
the rack.
3 Insert 7 microvial adapters in positions 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 of an empty
sample rack.
4 Select "Launch Rack Introduction". Place the rack inside the open rack
door and allow the system to bring it into position. The rack door will
close and the barcodes will be read.
Checking for the Presence of Microvial Adapters
1 Select "Sample Arm" from the
screen. Select "Hall Sensor
Test".
2 Check the boxes for both "First tube" and "Last tube". Enter 2 in the field
for first tube and 8 for the last tube.
3 Select "Start". The sample arm moves near the first tube position, then
continues in 1 mm increments until it is 4 mm past the center of the tube.
After a new initialization, the arm continues in this fashion through the last
tube defined on the screen
4 The results of the test are displayed on the screen. The display shows
varying positions for the first and last tubes that range from -50 to +40. A
"yes" at any of these positions indicates a magnet was detected, while
"no" indicates a magnet was not detected.
Expected results:
• Results of the first tube should show "yes” starting at the -20 position
and ending at +20. Results are acceptable if "yes" appears in any
position prior to -20 or after +20..
• Results of the last tube should show "yes" starting at the -20 position
and ending at +20. Results are acceptable if "yes" appears in any
position prior to -20 or after +20..
If the results are not acceptable, perform the Hall Effect Sensor
Adjustment in Section 7.13.

Second Setup
screen.
2 Select "Launch Rack Ejection" and remove the rack.

3 Remove the microvial adapter from position 7. Keep the other microvial
adapters in positions 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 8.
4 Select "Launch Rack Introduction". Place the rack inside the open rack
door and allow the system to bring it into position. The rack door will
close and the barcodes will be read.
Checking the Absence of Microvial Adapters
1 Select "Sample Arm" from the
screen. Select "Hall Sensor
Test".
for the first tube. The field for last tube can remain empty.
continues in 1 mm increments until it is 4 mm past the center of the tube.

varying positions for the first tube that range from -50 to +40. A "yes" at
any of these positions indicates a magnet was detected, while "no"
indicates a magnet was not detected.
Expected results:
• Results of the first tube should show "no" starting at the -20 position
and ending at +20. Results are acceptable if "no" appears in any
position prior to -20 or after +20.
If the results are not acceptable, perform the Hall Effect Sensor
Adjustment in Section 7.13.
End of Test
screen.
2 Select "Launch Rack Ejection" and remove the rack.
7.13 Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment

Objective
Adjustment of the Hall effect sensor.
Tools

Dummy Rack (P/N 240-0432)

7.13.1 Procedure
Setup
1 Select "Rack Intro" from the D-10
2 If a rack is present in the system, select "Launch Rack Ejection" and

remove it.
3 Select "Launch Rack Introduction". Place the dummy rack inside the
open rack door and allow the system to bring it into position. The rack
door will close and the barcodes will be read.
Adjustment
1 Select "Sample Arm" from the D-
Select "Hall Sensor Test".
for first tube and 9 for the last tube.
continues in 1 mm increments until it is at approximately the center of the
tube.
After a new initialization, the arm continues in this fashion through the
center of the last tube selected on the screen

varying positions for the first and last tubes that range from -50 to +40. A
"yes" at any of these positions indicates a magnet was detected, while
"no" indicates a magnet was not detected.
Expected results:
• Results of the first tube should show "yes" beginning at least at the -20
position. Results are acceptable if "yes" appears in any position prior
to -20.
• Results of the last tube should show "yes" at least until +20. Results
are acceptable if "yes" appears at any position after +20.
If the results are not acceptable, continue with Step 5.

5 If the first tube position is not acceptable,
shift the sensor to the right side of the
instrument.
Modification of the sensor position is done

with pliers as in the picture to the right
or by modification of the position of the
board
If the last tube position is not acceptable,

shift the sensor to the left side of the
instrument.
Modification of the sensor position is done

with pliers as in the picture to the right or
modification of the position of the board
Repeat steps 2-4 from the Adjustment

section above. Repeat the adjustment and
re-check if the results are not acceptable.
7.14 TH Offset Determination and Check

Objective
Determine and check the TH offset parameter.
Tools


7.14.1 Procedure
Setup

remove it.
TH measurement:
1 Select "Sample Arm" from the D-10
Select "Tube Identification". Select
Next until the D-10 Sample arm
mod: Tube Ident. (2/3) screen is
reached.
2 Select "Start". The sample arm moves to positions 1, 5 and 10. For each
position, the rack height is sensed by the Tube Height sensor. The
results, given in the number of steps, are displayed. The mean value of
the 3 results and the TH offset are calculated and displayed. The current
TH offset is also displayed.
3 Check the calculated values. The tolerance is +/- 200.
If the calculated result is out of range, the Tube Height sensor position
adjustment should be done. Refer to the Tube Height sensor replacement
procedure in Section 6.4.2.
If the calculated value is within range, save the new result by selecting the
“SAVE RESULTS” button.
4 Perform the Tube Identification Check in Section 7.15.

7.15 Tube Identification Check

Objective
Check the identification of microvial adapters using TH offset and Hall effect sensor
parameters.
Tools

7.15.1 Procedure
Setup

remove it.
Tube identification test
1 Select "Sample Arm" from the D-10
Select "Tube Identification". Select
Next until the D-10 Sample arm
mod: Tube Ident. (3/3) screen is
reached.
2 Check the boxes for all tube positions (1 - 10). Select Start.

3 The arm moves from the home position to each of the selected tube
positions and senses the tube height. The result of the tube height
measurement is displayed. The tube height measured value is corrected
by the TH offset. The corrected result is displayed in the corresponding
area.
The results of the magnet detection are given in the “magnet” area.
The result of the tube identification is given in last column labelled "tube".
4 Return to " D-10 Rack Introduction module (1/1)" screen. Select "Launch
Rack Ejection" to remove the dummy rack. Compare the displayed
results in the "tube" column to the dummy rack.
5 If the magnet column on the display does not correspond to the position
numbers on the rack, perform the Hall Effect Sensor Adjustment
procedure. (Section 7.12)
6 If the tube is mis-identified, and the magnet is detected, perform the TH
Offset Determination and Check procedure. (Section 7.14)
7.16 Mobile Cartridge Support Adjustment

Objective
To have good closure of the cartridge module thus avoiding stress and leaks on the
cartridge.
Tools
Caliper (digital), 1/100 of mm

40.7 mm standard axis
D-10 Service Software (DIASER)
7.16.1 Procedure
1 Take out the entire cartridge module. (Section 6.7)

2 Replace the analytical cartridge with the 40.7 mm standard axis.
3 Put the cartridge holder back in the cartridge module – but do not close the
cover.

4 Swivel the cover until the mobile

part comes in contact with the
fixed part (without constraint) (see
picture)
5 Using a digital calliper, measure

the external dimension between
the left end of the frame and the
mobile cartridge support.
The measurement must be done
- on the lower side, between the
points A and A'
- on the upper side, between the
points B and B'.
Note the values.
With the digital calliper, measure the AA' and BB' dimensions.
A'
B'
B
5A If the AA' and BB' dimensions are different (more than 0.1 mm difference),
the first step consists in adjusting the cartridge module in order to have the
same value. Go to step 6.
If the AA' and BB' dimensions are the same (0.1mm tolerance), go to step
8

6 Unlock – but do not remove – the 2 side

screws, located on the mobile cartridge
support (one on the upper face and one on
the lower face)
7 Adjust the position of the mobile

cartridge support, by turning the 2
screws clockwise or counter-
clockwise (see picture).
A clockwise rotation of the screw
decreases the dimension of the
side corresponding side.
Adjust the screws in order to have
the same dimensions for AA' and
BB'.
One screw turn corresponds to 0.5
mm
Then go to step 8.
8 Close the black metal cover and repeat the operation described in step 5.
This time, the dimension should be smaller by 1mm on both sides –
corresponding to the tightening applied to the axis. If it is, there's no need
to adjust the cartridge module: go to step 12. If it isn't, continue with step 9.
9 Swivel the cover in order to come back to the situation described in step 4.
10 If it was not done previously, unlock – but do
not remove – the 2 side screws, located on
the mobile cartridge support (one on the
upper face and one on the lower face).

11 Adjust the position of the mobile

cartridge support, by turning the 2
screws clockwise or counter-
clockwise, of the same angle.
Clockwise increases the amount of
tightening applied to the axis. This
must be done when the difference
of the AA' (or BB') dimension for the
closed position and for the open
position of the cover is less than 1
mm.
Counter-clockwise has the reversed
effect.
One screw turn corresponds to 0.5
mm
12 Re-tighten the 2 side screws.
13 Close the black metal cover and repeat the operation described in step 5. If
the desired amount of compression (1 mm) is reached, go to step 14. If it
isn't, repeat steps 9 through 13.
14 Replace the cartridge module in the D-10.
15 Replace the analytical cartridge.
16 Switch on the D-10 and launch the
Service software:
• click on Exit to Service
software
17 Go to the HP: PUMP + VALVE (1/16)

screen:
• set the Flow rate to 1.5
mL/min
18 Check for leaks while the pump is running. After approximately 5 minutes,
click on STOP PUMP.

8 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 Error Messages
The errors that can occur during the run process are in the following table. The system
must be able to accept new error messages as required without compromising
compatibility.
Error type Possible reason

Communication error with interface Physical link broken or another instance of
board the program is running
Start Pump failed MC or HPPC not responding
Stop Pump failed MC or HPPC not responding
Load profile failed MC or HPPC not responding
Warm Up gradient failed MC or HPPC not responding
GetSysTable Failed MC or HPPC not responding
Load Profile failed MC or HPPC not responding
Begin run gradient failed MC or HPPC not responding
stop gradient failed MC or HPPC not responding
End run gradient failed MC or HPPC not responding
X motor error Mechanical error, the motor encoder has not
sensed movement
Z motor error Mechanical error
TH motor error Mechanical error
Syringe motor error Mechanical error
HPValve motor error Mechanical error
Measure reference adjustment error Reference adjustment on the measure cell
was impossible
Too much measures requested The sample rate or the duration in the
parameter file generates more than the 1800
we can store in MC. Parameter file is not
correct.
Reference drift error During the chromatogram, the reference
signal moved to far from the start value for
which the reference adjustment was
performed.
Cam flag time out The cam flag signal did not occur within 10s
after the Gradient was launched.
Error on launch rack introduction Communication problem
HLaunchInjection error Communication problem
CmChromato::load_raw failed The raw file name used to display the
chromatogram was not found on the disk
Rack stucked error The introduction sequence detected that the
rack was not correctly removed or entered.
Analysis : Memory allocation error DAM interface error
Analysis : File read error DAM interface error
Analysis : bad data source error DAM interface error
Analysis : SafeArray error DAM interface error
Analysis : DataBase access error DAM interface error

Error type Possible reason

Analysis : Multiple Initialisation error DAM interface error
Analysis : Unknown assay error DAM interface error
Analysis : Corrupted ini file error DAM interface error
Analysis : Not Initialised error DAM interface error
Analysis : Log Error DAM interface error
Analysis : Update Failed DAM interface error
Analysis : Write Init Failed DAM interface error
Analysis : Not loaded DAM interface error
Analysis module: Says error DAM error
Analysis module: Calibration failed DAM error
No tube in the Worklist, Please Empty worklist given for the RUN
introduce a rack
HPLC pump error
Reagent Low warning injection count Remaining injections are insufficient
reached
Error during rack door handling
HP Pump High pressure error Appears if the absolute of pressure is reached
(2000 psi)
High pressure Error During the run, the average pressure was
over 800 psi for more than 6s
Low pressure error During the run, the average pressure was
below 130 psi for 30s
8.2 Troubleshooting Guide from Operations Manual

Problem Probable Cause Recommended Solution
200:155
No peaks appear on the 1. Air in sampler syringe line or system not 1. Verify end of wash line is at the bottom of the Wash/Diluent
chromatogram; report primed correctly Solution bottle. Perform a system flush.
shows no data
2. Clotted or short sample 2. Check sample for clots or low volume. Predilute and re-run
sample.
3. Prediluted sample not mixed 3. Remake prediluted sample, mix and re-run.
4. Wash Station leak 4. Call Technical Support.
5. Proportioning valve does not work properly 5. Check the proportioning valve: Switch the valve manually,
using the command on the Service screen. A loud clicking
noise should be heard when switching to Buffer 2 and a
quieter noise when switching to Buffer 1. If no click is heard,
call Technical Service.
6. Probe is bent or blocked 6. Replace probe.
7. System not primed correctly 7. Follow the steps in “Prime the Reagent Lines” on page 3-5 of
Service Manual
the Operation Manual.

8. Insufficient sample in the tube/sample vial 8. Manually prepare sample and re-run.
Shape of the peaks 1. Expired, contaminated or damaged 1. Change the reagent(s).
degrade reagent(s)
2. Expired or damaged cartridge 2. Change the cartridge.
3. Dirty flow cell 3. Run decontamination procedure on page 5-2 of the Operation
Manual.
Calibration failure; peak 1. Data entry error 1. Verify correct entry for calibrator values.
out of range; peak not

detected
2. Wrong calibrator used or vial barcoded 2. Verify correct calibrator is used and is correctly barcoded.
incorrectly
3. Calibrators are placed in the wrong rack 3. Check calibrator position in rack.
position
4. Inadequate calibrator volume 4. Verify sample vials contain sufficient volume of calibrator.
5. Improper reconstitution of calibrators 5. Reconstitute new vials of calibrator.
6. Air bubble in detector and/or pump system 6. Flush system. See “Perform a System Flush” on page 4-7 of
7. Dirty flow cell 7. Run decontamination procedure. See “Clean/Decontaminate
Sampling Fluid Path” on page 5-2 of the Operation Manual.
8. Damaged reagent or cartridge 8. Replace damaged component.
8-3
Early retention times 1. Elevated sample concentration; high total 1. Check dilution chamber and probe wash port for debris or
areas waste backup.
8-4
Early retention times 2. Buffer contamination 2.Replace buffer(s); do not pool buffers.
(Continued) 3. Buffer evaporation 3.Replace buffer(s); keep buffer(s) capped.
4. Wrong test parameters 4.Verify correct method is running; Load correct Update Kit disk
using the LOT INFO/Update Kit screen.
5. Damaged, wrong, or expired cartridge 5. Replace cartridge.
6. Cartridge temperature too high 6. Call Technical Service.
7. Proportioning valve does not work properly 7. Check the proportioning valve: Switch the valve manually,
using the command on the Service screen. A loud clicking
noise should be heard when switching to Buffer 2 and a quieter
noise when switching to Buffer 1. If no click is heard, call
Technical Service.
Late retention times 1. Low sample concentration; low total areas 1. Check for clotted samples; check for blockage in probe.
2. Leak in flow path 2. Check for leaks (including cartridge holder).
3. Air in pump 3. Purge pump; flush system.
4. Wrong test parameters 4. Verify correct method is running; Load correct Update Kit disk.
5. Clogged buffer line 5. Check the line and clean as needed using the LOT
Service Manual
INFO/Update Kit screen.

6. Bad pump seal 6. Call Technical Service.
7. Damaged buffer(s) 7. Replace buffer(s).
8. Damaged, wrong, or expired cartridge 8. Replace cartridge.
9. Cartridge was not primed 9. Prime cartridge. See specific assay instruction manual.
10. Cartridge temperature too low 10 Call Technical Service.
.
11. Proportioning valve does not work properly 11 Check the proportioning valve: Switch the valve manually,
. using the command on the Service screen. A loud clicking
noise should be heard when switching to Buffer 2 and a quieter
noise when switching to Buffer 1. If no click is heard, call
Technical Service.
Noise spikes appear on 1. Air bubble in detector and/or pump system 1. Flush system. See “Perform a System Flush” on page 4-7 of
chromatogram / drifting the Operation Manual.
baseline
2. Air bubble in detector 2. Flush system. See “Perform a System Flush” on page 4-7 of
3. Dirty flow cell 3. Run decontamination procedure. See “Clean/Decontaminate
200:155
Sampling Fluid Path” on page 5-2 of the Operation Manual.

4. Detector board fault 4. Call Technical Service.
200:155
Noise spikes appear on 5. Dirty dilution well 5. Clean dilution well as described on page 5-2 of the Operation
chromatogram / drifting Manual.
baseline (continued)
Low Total Area 1. Short sample 1. Ensure that there is enough sample in the tube.
2. Sample is too dilute 2. Manually dilute sample at lower dilution ratio (1:100) and re-
run.
3. Clotted sample 3. Manually dilute sample and re-run.
4. Prediluted sample not mixed 4. Remake the prediluted sample, mix and re-run.
5. Leak at dilution chamber 5. Call Technical Service.
6. Air in sample lines or diluent syringe 6. Check Wash/Diluent Solution bottle volume and verify wash
line is properly placed in bottle. Perform system flush. See
“Perform a System Flush” on page 4-7 of the Operation
Manual.
7. Uptake line clogged with undissolved 7. Flush the sample uptake lines.
sample particulate
Service Manual
High Total Area 1. Sample is too concentrated 1. Manually dilute sample at higher dilution ratio (1:400) and re-
run.
2. Inadequate wash of sample probe or 2. Check dilution chamber and probe wash port for overflow. Call
inadequate drain of dilution chamber Technical Service.
3. Syringe pump not functioning properly 3. Call Technical Service.
4. Leak in the internal waste bottle 4. Ensure that the internal waste bottle cap is closed. Perform the
waste bottle test from the Service screen. See “Clean Internal

Waste Bottle” on page 5-2 of the Operation Manual.
5. Air in the sample line or syringe 5. Flush system. See “Perform a System Flush” on page 4-7 of
Module does not turn on 1. Power outage at the source 1. Check main, incoming, power circuit breaker.
when main power switch
is pressed, or loses
power
2. Main power fuse(s) failure 2. Replace one or both fuses. If repeated failure, contact
Technical Service.
3. Main power switch failure 3. Call Technical Service.
Pressure Fluctuations Air in the pump - Eliminate air using steps described in “Assess the Check
Valves” on page 3-8 of the Operation Manual.
8-5
8-6

Low system pressure 1. Loose or open connections 1. Check the fluid lines for any leaks or open connections.
Perform a systematic search from the detector to the buffers
(see “D-10 Fluid System” on page 6-10 of the Operation
Manual). Tighten any loose or open connections; do not
overtighten.
2. Reagent intake lines above fluid level 2. Reposition fluid lines and perform a system flush. See “Perform
a System Flush” on page 4-7 of the Operation Manual.
3. Air in pump 3. Eliminate the air using steps described in “Assess the Check
Valves” on page 3-8 of the Operation Manual.
4. Dummy cartridge installed 4. Replace dummy cartridge with analytical cartridge.
High system pressure 1. Blockage exists in fluid lines 1. Check for blockages in the lines or cartridge. Perform a
systematic search from the detector back to the high-pressure
pump (see “D-10 Fluid System” on page 6-10 of the Operation
Manual). Replace components as needed.
2. Fittings are overtightened 2. Check for overtightened fittings.
Touch screen is very dark 1. Contrast adjustment incorrect 1. Adjust contrast using the display contrast knob (inside right
Service Manual
or very light panel).

2. Backlight efficiency too low 2. Call Technical Service.
Printout missing lines or is 1. Print head is out of alignment or needs 1. Call Technical Service.
very faint replacement
2. Incorrect paper used 2. Use only Bio-Rad supplied paper.
Software problem Failure of the system to startup correctly or Turn the power off, then on again. If the problem persists, call
error encountered during operation Technical Service for assistance.
Instrument fails to boot on Floppy disk left in disk drive Remove floppy disk from drive and cycle power switch.
power on
200:155
8.3
200:155

Communication error with Physical link broken or another 1. Click on the "OK" button.
interface board instance of the program is running If a second instance of the program is open, the default will be
Diagnostics and Checks

repeated.
Do the shutdown procedure.
After cycling the power, don't click on any icon on the touch screen.
If the error message appears again, go to step 2
2. Check the serial link cable between the PC board and the interface
board.
Verify is the ribbon cable is well plugged into the interface board
receptacle and into the PC board receptacle.
3. Check to see if the MC controller runs. Check the MC Activity LED.
If not OK, shutdown the system.
Switch on. If the failure persists, replace the interface board.
4. Check the 5VDC power supply. VDC test point. The value should
be 5.15 VDC. See Section 6.24, power supplies).
Service Manual
5. If the problem persists, replace the electronic module.

Start Pump failed MC or HPPC not responding 1. Click on the "OK" button.
Stop pump failed If a new error message appears, do the shutdown procedure.
Load profile failed After cycling the power, don't click on any icon on the touch screen.
Warm Up gradient failed If the error message appears again, go to step 2
GetSysTable Failed
Load Profile failed
Begin run gradient failed
stop gradient failed

End run gradient failed
2. Check the serial link cable between the PC board and the interface
board.
Verify is the ribbon cable is properly plugged into the interface
board receptacle and into the PC board receptacle.
3. Check to see if the MC controller runs. Check the MC Activity LED.
If not OK, shutdown the system.
4. Check to see if the HPPC controller runs. Check the HPPC Activity
LED. If not OK, shutdown the system.
It the failure persists, replace the interface board.
5. Check the 5VDC power supply. VDC test point. The value should
8-7
be 5.15 VDC. See Section 6.24, power supplies).

8-8
X motor error Mechanical error, the motor encoder 1. Go to the service software.
has not sensed the move, or the Select the sample arm, X move.
home sensor cannot be reached. Select the speed index 9 for the service movement (highest
speed). This is the worst case for the motor (lowest torque).
2. Check to see if the pulleys are properly tightened on the motor
axis.
Check to see if the belt holder is properly tightened.
Check to see if the slot disk is properly tightened.
3. Check the stepper motor movement.
If the motor does not move, check the electrical connections on the
X connection board, and between the X connection board and the
interface board.
The motor itself can be checked by connecting to the plug of
another motor. X, TH and Z motors are identical. An extension
cable, with male and female plugs, can be used for that.
If the X motor is connected to the Z motor position, the "sample
Service Manual
arm, Z move" should be used in the service software.

4. If the motor is OK, check the interface board circuit connections.
If the connection is OK, the hardware on the interface board failed.
Replace the interface board and try again. See replacement
procedure.
5. Check the sensors on the service screen: axis sensor and home
sensor. If a sensor does not give the right answer, check this
sensor by connecting to the plug of another sensor. See "sensor
check document". The sensor extension cable can be used.
Replace if necessary. See replacement procedure.
6. Check to see if the X motor can close (high effort) and open (low
effort) the rack door.
Select "rack door" button on the service software.
If the movement cannot open the door, check the rack door
movement.
If the movement of the rack door is stiff, replace the rack door
module.
7. Check to see if the X movement is stiff by moving the X arm near
the rail guides. If yes, the sample arm module should be replaced.
200:155
Z motor error Mechanical error, the motor encoder 1. Go to the service software.
has not sensed the move, or thhome Select the sample arm, Z move.
sensor cannot be reached. Select the speed index 9 for the service movement (highest
speed). This is the worst case for the motor (lowest torque).
200:155
Z motor error (continued) 2. Check to see if the Z movement is not blocked in the upper
position: manually move the pulley for a downward movement.
3. Check to see if the pulleys are properly tightened on the motor axis
and on the lead screw.
Check if the slot disk is properly tightened.
4. Check to see if the Z movement is blocked by the TH assembly. It
can happen when the tube holder sensor gives incorrect
information and stops the TH movement in a high position. In this
case, the tube height sensor must be checked and replaced if
necessary.
Z connection board, and between the Z connection board and the
X connection board, and between the X connection board and the
interface board.
The motor itself can be checked by connecting it to the plug of
another motor. X, TH and Z motors are identical. An extension
Service Manual
cable, with male and female plugs, can be used for that.
If the Z motor is connected to the TH motor position, the "sample
arm, TH move" should be used in the service software.
Replace the interface board and try again. See replacement

procedure.
7. Check the sensors on the service screen: axis sensor and home
sensor. If a sensor does not give the right answer, check this
sensor by connecting it to the plug of another sensor. See "sensor
check document". The sensor extension cable can be used.
8. Check to see if the Z movement is noisy. If yes, lubricate the lead
screw and move the motor upwards and downwards.
9. Check to see if the Z movement is hard. If yes, verify the belt
tension. The tension should not be too high (in this case, it can
produce some Z errors).
TH motor error Mechanical error, the slot sensor of 1. Go to the service software.
the motor has not reflected the move, Select the sample arm, TH move.
8-9
or the home sensor cannot be Select the speed index 9 for the service movement (highest
reached. speed). This is the worst case for the motor (lowest torque).
8 - 10
TH motor error (continued) 2. Check to see if the TH movement is not blocked in the upper position:
manually move the pulley for a downward movement.
3. Check to see if the pulleys are properly tightened on the motor axis and
on the lead screw.
Check if the slot disk is properly tightened.
If the motor does not move, check the electrical connections on the Z
connection board, and between the Z connection board and the X
connection board, and between the X connection board and the
interface board.
The motor itself can be checked by connecting it to the plug of another
motor. X, TH and Z motors are identical. An extension cable, with male
and female plugs, can be used for that.
If the TH motor is connected to the Z motor position, the "sample arm, Z
move" should be used in the service software.
Service Manual

Replace the interface board and try again. See replacement procedure.
6. Check the sensors on the service screen: axis sensor, home sensor and
tube height sensor. If a sensor does not give the right answer, check this
sensor by connecting it to the plug of another sensor. See "sensor check
document". The sensor extension cable can be used.
7. Check to see if the TH movement is noisy. If yes, lubricate the lead
screw and move the motor upwards and downwards.
8. Check to see if the TH movement is hard. If yes, verify the belt tension.
The tension should not be too high (in this case, it can produce some TH
errors).
Syringe motor error Mechanical error 1. Go to the service software.
Select "syringe".
200:155
200:155

Syringe motor error (continued) 2. Check the syringe stepper motor movement.
syringe connection board, and between the syringe connection board
and the interface board.
If the motor does not move, check the syringe connection board (visual
control of the connector, soldered points and wires).
If not OK: repair or replace the connection board. See replacement
procedure.
If OK: replace the syringe. See replacement procedure.
If the problem is not solved, replace the interface board. See
replacement procedure.
3. Check the syringe home sensor on the service screen.
If a sensor fails, check the connection board (visual control of the
connector, soldered points and wires).
If not OK, replace the connection board. If OK, replace syringe. See
replacement procedure.
Service Manual
HP Valve motor error Mechanical error 1. Go to the service software.

Select "HP: pump and valve", and go to screen 4.
2. Check the HP valve stepper motor movement.
If the motor does not move or if it runs with a bad noise, check the
electrical connections on the HP module connection board, and between
the HP module connection board and the interface board.
If the motor does not move, check the HP module connection board

(visual control of the connector, soldered points and wires).
If not OK: replace the connection board.
If OK: replace the HP valve.
If the problem is not solved, the interface board must be replaced.
3. Check the HP valve sensors on the service screen.
The sensor status is 5 for the load position, 6 for the inject position and 4
for the prime position.
Individual sensor status:
The status of the individual sensors and the associated test points on
the HP module connection board (see fig. 2-11):
Position Sensor 0 S0I test point S0O test point
Load: 1 5V 0V
Inject: 0 0V 5V
8 - 11
Prime: 0 0V 5V
8 - 12
HP Valve motor error Mechanical error 3. Position Sensor 1 S1I test point S1O test point
Load: 0 0V 5V
Inject: 1 5V 0V
Prime: 0 0V 5V
Position Sensor 2 S2I test point S2O test point

Load: 1 5V 0V
Inject: 1 5V 0V
Prime: 1 5V 0V
If a sensor fails, check the connection board (visual control of the
connector, soldered points, wires).
If not OK, replace the connection board. If OK, replace the HP valve.
See replacement procedure.
Measure reference adjustment Reference adjustment on the 1. Bubble in the flow cell: Go to the service software. Select detector
error measure cell was impossible screen.
Service Manual
Select 150 and 64 as the nominal values for the detector.

Check to see if an air bubble is in the flow cell of the detector: run the
HP pump for a 1.5 flow rate; open the fluidic circuit at the outlet of the
flow cell. Close the outlet tube of the flow cell with a finger and observe if
the absorption value is stable. If it increases when the tube is closed,
there is a bubble in the flow cell.
Try to evacuate the bubble by opening and closing the outlet. When the
value is stable, the bubble is removed.
2. Detector cannot be adjusted: See detector adjustment procedure.
Too much measures requested The sample rate or the duration 1. This error can happen when tryng to modify a profile2.ini file and
in the parameter file generates supplying parameters that result in more than 1800 measures per run.
more than the 1800 Correct the profile2.ini chromaprofile section to give compatible
measurement that can be parameters.
stored in MC. Parameter file is Should not happen to the end user
not correct.
Reference drift error During the chromatogram, the 1. This indicates only there was a drift on reference during measurement.
reference signal moved too far Failure on the detector. The detector should be replaced. See
from the start value for which replacement procedure.
the reference adjustment was
performed.
200:155
Cam flag time out The cam flag signal did not
occur within 10s after the
Gradient was launched.
200:155
Error on launch rack Communication problem 1. Check the serial link cable between the PC board and the interface
introduction board.
Verify is the ribbon cable is properly plugged into the interface board
2. Check to see if the MC controller runs. Check the MC Activity LED. If not
OK, shutdown the system.
3. Check the 5VDC power supply. VDC test point. The value should be
5.15 VDC. See Section 6.24, power supplies).
HLaunchInjection error Communication problem 1. Check the serial link cable between the PC board and the interface
board.
Verify that the ribbon cable is properly plugged into the interface board
2. Check to see if the MC controller runs. Check the MC Activity LED. If not
OK, shutdown the system.
Service Manual

3. Check the 5VDC power supply. VDC test point. The value should be
5.15 VDC. See Section 6.24, power supplies).
CmChromato::load_raw failed The raw file name used to Means that for the .dam file you selected in the data screen did not have
display the chromatogram was a corresponding .raw file.
not found on the disk Should not happen. Suppress the dam file for consistency

Rack stuck error The introduction sequence
detected that the rack was not
correctly removed or entered.
Error from Interface to DAM • Internal errors should never occur, so it is very important to escalate
The following errors are internal the information.
errors. They always mean • The first thing is to collect the maximum information of the context of
abnormal situation like disk the error (was the instrument running, which vial was under process
corruption or abnormally low (position in rack, type [calibrator - control - sample], did the error
resources (memory leakage). occur by itself or is it the result of a user action, what action, etc...)
For some error there is a "most • After noting the context, try to properly shutdown and reboot the
probable explanation" instrument. If the error persists replace hard disk and return the
original disk to Bio-Rad for investigation.
8 - 13
Never re-install over an existing "faulty" hard disk as this will

erase any hint of the actual problem. Return the faulty disk to
Bio-Rad for investigation.
8 - 14

Analysis : Memory allocation memory leakage
error
Analysis : File read error disk or file system corruption
Analysis : bad data source error disk or file system corruption
Analysis : SafeArray error memory leakage
Analysis : DataBase access disk or file system corruption
error
Analysis : Multiple Initialisation
error
Analysis : Unknown assay error disk or file system corruption
Analysis : Corrupted ini file error disk or file system corruption
Analysis : Not Initialised error
Analysis : Log Error
Analysis : Write Init Failed disk or file system corruption
Analysis : Not loaded
Service Manual
Analysis : Update Failed This error is declared if the

"Update Kit" fails.
Most probable cause :
1. The provided parameters 1 In the "Lot Info" screen, select the assay that matches the parameter
are not for the selected set.
assay
2. Damaged / unreadable 2 Try to read the floppy disk on another PC. Copy the content to a
floppy disk temporary folder to be sure the floppy is readable. If the floppy is
damaged, obtain a new one from Bio-Rad.
3. Damaged floppy drive 3 If the floppy is readable in another PC without any trouble, try the update
again and listen carefully to the noise that the instrument's drive makes.
Analysis module: Says error The Data Analysis Module This error is declared while processing the raw data for a given vial. This
encountered an error while occurs only once for a given injection, so the error will not be seen again
processing the raw data. for this injection.
It is important to collect the data associated with this vial analysis.
The most complete information is in the .log file associated with the
analysis. In the folder c:\Dia\Log, there is one file for each analysis. The
200:155
file is named after the vial raw data file name.

200:155
Analysis module: Says error The Data Analysis Module Example :

encountered an error while vial bar code : smpl1234
processing the raw data. position in rack : 8
injection number : 38
date of injection : 2003 / 02 / 20
⇒ raw data file : smpl1234 8-38-20-2-2003.raw
this one is located into C:\Dia\<assay>\Results
⇒ log file : smpl1234 8-38-20-2-2003.030220182008038.log
This one is located into C:\Dia\Log.

Collect the file associated with the injection that caused the error and
return it to Bio-Rad for investigation.
Analysis module: Calibration The Data Analysis Module was The following information is from the Operation Manual.
failed not able to obtain calibration
values from the two calibrator
Service Manual
vials processed. This error is

declared when working on the
second calibrator data, i.e. after
the two vials have been
processed by the instrument.
1. Data entry error 1. Verify correct entry for calibrator values.
2. Wrong calibrator used or vial 2. Verify correct calibrator is used and is correctly barcoded.
barcoded incorrectly
3. Calibrators are placed in the 3. Check calibrator position in rack.

wrong rack position
4. Inadequate calibrator volume 4. Verify that sample vials contain sufficient volume of calibrator.
5. Improper reconstitution of 5. Reconstitute new vials of calibrator.
calibrators
6. Air bubble in detector and/or 6. Flush system.
pump system
7. Dirty flow cell 7. Run decontamination procedure. See “Clean/Decontaminate Sampling
Fluid Path” on page 5-2 of the Operation Manual.
No tube in the Worklist, Please Empty worklist given for the This is only a warning. This only means there is no tube to process
introduce a rack RUN because the run list is empty. A rack must be inserted, or if the tubes
haven't any barcodes, the tube identifications must be edited manually.
Reagent Low warning injection Remaining injections are Warning message: Check the liquid level on the reagent bottles.
8 - 15
count reached insufficient to perform the run. Replace the bottles if necessary.
8 - 16
Error during rack door handling 1. Go to the service software and select the rack door button.
Check the rack door movement by opening and closing the door with the
service software.
If the X motor cannot open the door: check to see if the rack door is hard
to move. If yes, replace it. See replacement procedure.
2. Check the sensor status with the service software.
When the door is closed: the "closed door" sensor is free and the "open
door" sensor is obstructed.
When the door is open: the "closed door" sensor is obstructed and the
"open door" sensor is free.
Check to see if there is a safety margin for each situation: the sensors
should give the right values a little bit before the final position. If
necessary, adjust the position of the sensors to have a margin.
3. Check the rack door solenoid.
If it does not work, check the resistance of the solenoid. It should be at
35 ohms approximately. If the circuit is open, the rack door solenoid is
Service Manual
broken. Replace it. See replacement procedure.

HP Pump High pressure error Appears if the absolute of The high-pressure circuit is blocked.
pressure is reached (2000 psi) Determine the location of the blockage by opening the high-pressure
circuit at different points.
To run the pump, go to the service software and select the HP: pump +
valve" button.
High pressure Error During the run, the average 1. The cartridge should be replaced.
pressure was over 800 psi for
more than 6 seconds
2. The high-pressure circuit is partially blocked.
Determine the location of the blockage by opening the high pressure
circuit at different points.
To run the pump, go to the service software and select the HP: pump +
valve" button.
3. Check the high-pressure sensor response. Use an external manometer.
See high-pressure sensor adjustment, verification.
Low pressure error During the run, the average 1. The cartridge is not properly installed into the insert or the insert is not
pressure was below 130 psi for properly placed into the cartridge module.
more than 30 seconds
200:155
2. The dummy cartridge is installed instead of the right assay cartridge

3. The high-pressure circuit is open or has a leak. Check the circuit.
8.4 Sensor Check

If a motion sensor (X, Z, TH, rack door, rack introduction, front door) does not give the
right status, determine if the problem is at the sensor, on the wire or on the interface
board. The sensor can be tested by connecting it to another (compatible) position,
previously checked.
The table below gives the compatibility of the sensor connections. All the sensors with
the same identification can be connected alternately for testing.
If a sensor type is unique, it can only be replaced by a known, good identical part for
testing.
Designation Sensor Type Connection board Connector Identification

number
Syringe home sensor Optical Switch Syringe module CN2 A
connection board
Bubble detectors Analog Degasser module CN1 B
optosensor connection board CN3
CN6
Front door locking Reflective sensor HP module connection CN1 C
sensor board
Rack input sensor Reflective sensor X connection board CN8 C
Rack output sensor Reflective sensor X connection board CN9 C
Cam Flag sensor Optical Switch HP module connection CN9 D
board
Closed door sensor Optical Switch X connection board CN7 D
(rack door)
Open door sensor Optical Switch X connection board CN12 D
(rack door)
X Home sensor Optical Switch X connection board CN11 D
X axis sensor Optical Switch X connection board CN10 D
Z Home sensor Optical Switch Z connection board CN2 D
Z axis sensor Optical Switch Z connection board CN13 D
TH Home sensor Optical Switch Z connection board CN12 D
TH axis sensor Optical Switch Z connection board CN5 D
HP Pump encoder HP encoder HP module connection CN8 E
board
HP Valve sensors Optical Switch HP module connection CN7 F
board
Tube height sensor Optical Switch Z connection board CN8 G
8.5 Other Diagnostics: Warning Messages

8 - 18
Waste bottle check failed Mechanical problem on the pump 1. Check to see if the vacuum pump running is (noise) when the
test is launched. If not, replace the pump.
2. Check the efficiency of the pump:
• on the waste bottle, disconnect the LUER fitting
marked with a red point
• plunge this tube to a small bottle containing water
• go to the service software and launch a “waste
bottle check” from the syringe module screen
• verify if liquid is aspirated. If not, clean the pump
(there may be rubber debris). See dedicated
procedure.
Problem with the sensor 1. On the waste bottle closure, disconnect the silicon tube that
goes to the vacuum sensor and remove the LUER connector.
2. Connect the silicon tube to the 50 ml syringe (the syringe must
be empty).
Service Manual
3. Go to the service software and launch a “waste bottle check”

from the syringe module screen. During the test, slowly pull on
the syringe piston (~2 cm) and verify if the waste bottle check
fails or not. If it fails, the sensor has a failure and the board
must be replaced.
The waste bottle and/or the tubings are 1. Manually pinch the tube that goes from the waste bottle to the
not correctly sealed black manifold.
2. Go to the service software and launch a “waste bottle check”
from the syringe module screen. If the test fails, there is a leak
on the circuit between the pump inlet and the manifold inlet;
check all connections.
Mechanical problem on the pinch 1. Go to the service software and launch a “waste bottle check”
valves from the syringe module screen. Check if the two pinch valves
are activated. If not, replace them.
Problem with the pinch valve tubings 1. Disconnect the silicon tubes coming from the wash/dilution
station (yellow and green LUER connectors).
2. Pull out the small silicon tubes from the pinch valves.
3. With the fingers, close the yellow and the green plugs on the
200:155
syringe module and launch a “waste bottle check”. If the check

fails, there is a leak on one of the pinch valve tubings; replace
the faulty part.
200:155
Temperature check failed Thermal switch or Peltier Module failure 1 Check the Thermal switch and the Peltier Modules:
Disconnect the thermal devices: thermal switch and Peltier
Modules: connectors CN10, CN11 and CN13.
The wires of these elements are not identified and are
interchangeable.
Check the resistance for each device:
- the Peltier module has a value of approximately 1 ohm
for one polarity and a higher value, approximately 10
ohms, for the reversed polarity;
- the Thermal switch has a nominal short circuited value
for both polarities.
If the value is abnormal, replace the failed component.
The thermal switch is a thermal fuse: when the circuit is open
(infinite resistance) the thermal switch must be replaced.
Temperature sensor failure 1 Check the temperature sensor (Pt 100 ohms sensor):
Service Manual
Disconnect the temperature sensor: connector CN4.

Check the resistance:
- Between the white wire and the blue wire: the value
should be between 100 ohms (0°C) and 120 ohms
(~52°C).
- Between the blue wire and the red wire: the value is 0
ohm (short circuit).
If the value is abnormal, replace the failed component. See the

corresponding procedure.
Temperature controller failure 1 Check to see if the temperature controller is running:
On the interface board, verify that the TC activity LED is blinking
(frequency: approximately 2 Hz).
For the location: see Fig. 2-31.
If the LED is not blinking, replace the Interface Board.
Temperature interface failure 1 Check the 12VDC power supply voltage: measure the voltage
between the +12V and the GDN test points.
See "Interface Board: test point locations", fig. 2-34.
Typical values: 11.6 to 12.4 VDC.
Replace the power supply #1 if necessary.
8 - 19
8 – 20

Temperature check failed Temperature interface failure 2 Check the voltage applied to the Peltier Module:
Go to the service software: D-10 Thermal module control (3/7).
Stop the thermal regulation by clicking on the "STOP
THERMAL REGULATION" button. Then click on he "SET
PELTIER 100%PWM" button: this action supplies the Peltier
modules continuously.
When all the thermal devices (2 Peltier modules, 1 thermal
switch) are connected to the HPPC connection board, measure
the voltage between CN11, pin 1 and CN13 pin 2. See fig 2-11
"High Pressure Module Board with its electrical connections" for
the location.
3 Check the temperature gain and offsets parameters:
Go to the Service software: D-10 Thermal module control (4/7).
Typical range: System gain: 0.95 to 1.05; System Offset: -2°C
Service Manual
to +2 °C; Sensor offset: -2°C to +2 °C; Gradient Offset: -2°C to

+2°C.
Check the parameters:
The System gain and offset are indicated on the interface board
label.
The Sensor Offset is indicated on the label attached on the
temperature sensor wire.
If the values are out of range, a new temperature calibration
should be done. See the corresponding procedure.
4 If the Temperature sensor is in the nominal range (resistance),
check the temperature measurement interface by examining the
displayed value on the service software (D-10 Thermal module
control (1/7): calculated temperature. Check if the indicated
value is compatible with the current estimated temperature
If not, try to do a new temperature calibration (see the
corresponding procedure) and check if the interface board is
responding when the resistances tools are connected.
Or, if a calibration is not possible, replace the interface board
(see the corresponding procedure)
200:155
9 MAINTENANCE
This section contains the minimum requirements for performing annual preventive
maintenance on the D-10. Any additional maintenance items can be performed based
on regional requirements. Refer to the D-10 Operation Manual for daily, monthly and
periodic maintenance procedures.
NOTE: Preventive Maintenance must be performed ONLY by properly trained

service personnel.
9.1 Materials
Tools Part Number
Front Cover Switch Bypass 220-0416

PLCC EEPROM Extractor 220-0420
Cartridge Bypass Tool 220-0435
Cartridge Module Temperature Control Tool 220-0438
Mini Screwdriver 220-0412
Lubricant Oil 220-0406
Front Cover Sensor Bypass 220-0415
Flow Cell Cleaning Kit 195-7263
Required Parts
Sample Probe 220-0247

Pinch Valve Tubing Set 220-0255
High-Pressure Pump Piston Seals 220-0377
7-port High-Pressure Valve Stator and Rotor 270-2170
Additional Parts as Needed
Silicon Internal Tubing Set 220-0317

Teflon Internal Tubing Set 220-0315
PEEK Tubing Set 220-0316
External Waste Tubing 220-0321
High-Pressure Pump Pistons 220-0378
Liquid Waste Pump 220-0251
Additional Materials
Bleach (5% - 10% hypochlorite)

Deionized water in a squirt bottle

9.2 Maintenance Procedures
9.2.1 Safety
1. The sample probe must be removed before performing any maintenance on the
D-10.
2. The power cord must be removed when the D-10 is turned off and the bypass
tools are in place.
9.2.2 Preparation
1. Clean and Decontaminate the sample fluid path. Refer to Section 5 of the
Operation Manual for details of the procedure
2. Turn off the power to the D-10 and remove the front cover. Refer to Section 6.2
for the procedure.
3. Install the Front Cover Switch Bypass and Front Cover Sensor Bypass.
WARNING: The system is fully functional with these bypass tools in place. Use
extreme caution when working with the instrument in this state.
4. Turn on the power to the D-10.
5. If the sample rack is present, remove it using the D-10 user software.
6. Remove the sample probe.
WARNING: Use extreme caution when removing the sample needle as it is very
sharp and a potential biohazard.
7. Select “Exit to Service Software” in the Maintain screen. Enter the appropriate
password.
8. Check the current firmware and software versions in the “D-10 Software version
(1/1)” screen in service software. Update the software and/or firmware if needed.

9.2.3 Dilution/Wash Station
1. Select “Sample Arm” from the D-10 Service Software (2/2) screen. Select the
“Dilut./Wash Stat. Repla.” Option to move the arm for easy access to the
dilution/wash station.
2. Press the lever on the left side of the Dilution/Wash station. Slowly lift the it and
remove the 2 luer fittings. Remove the dilution/wash station completely.
3. Clean the dilution/wash station with bleach and rinse thoroughly with deionized
water. Verify that the drain holes are cleared of debris.
4. Check the tubing (S4 and S5) from the dilution/wash station to the pinch valves
on the syringe module. Open and/or remove the side doors if needed. Replace
the tubing if damaged. (P/N 220-0317)
5. Re-install the dilution/wash station. Connect the color-coded luer fittings before
pushing the dilution/wash station completely into place. A click from the lever will
be heard when it is secured properly.
6. Check evacuation of the drain lines. Select “Syringe” from the “D-10 Service
Software (1/2)” screen.
7. Select “Start Dilution Valve” and “Start Wash Valve” from the “D-10 Syringe
module (1/6)” screen.
8. Using a squirt bottle filled with deionized water, fill the dilution well and wash well
with a bout 1 mL of water each.
9. Select “Start Liquid Pump”.
10. Open the dilution valve by selecting “Stop Dilution Valve” and verify that the water
is evacuated properly. Close the dilution valve by selecting “Start Dilution Valve”.
11. Open the wash valve by selecting “Stop Wash Valve” and verify that the water is
evacuated properly.
12. Open the dilution valve by selecting “Stop Dilution Valve”.
13. Select “Stop Liquid Pump” to stop the pump.
9.2.4 Vertical Lead Screw Lubrication (TH and Z movements)
1. Select “Sample Arm” from the “D-10 Service Software (2/2)” screen. Select the “Z
Move” option.
2. Select the following parameters on the “D-10 Sample arm module (1/4)” screen
(Figure 9-1):
• To sample aspiration (tube)
• Test selection: A1c
• Tube position: 2

Figure 9-1:
Z macro
movement
Parameters
3. Select Start to move the arm to its final position for lubrication.
4. Place an absorbent towel under the lead screw, lower extremity to collect excess
oil.
5. Place a drop of lubricant oil in the upper part of the nut for both the TH and Z
movements.
6. Select Home movement in the Z macro movement section of the screen. (Figure
9-1). Select Start to begin the movement.
7. Select “Next” at the top of the screen to open the “D-10 Sample arm module Z
(2/4)” screen. Select the following parameters on the screen (Figure 9-2):
• Direction: from up to down
• Movement select: strips, 230
Figure 9-2: Z
elementary
movement
Parameters

8. Select Start to begin movement.

9. When movement has stopped, change the Direction to “from down to up” and
select Start again.
10. Repeat the selected movements 9 more times for a total of 10 up and 10 down.
Stop the movement after the last up movement and close the screen.
11. Select “Sample Arm” from the “D-10 Service Software (2/2”) screen. Select the
“TH Move” option.
12. Select Home movement from the “D-10 Sample arm module TH (1/4)” screen.
Select Start to begin the movement.
13. Select “Next” at the top of the screen to open the “D-10 Sample arm module TH
(2/4)” screen. Select the following parameters on the screen:
• Direction: from up to down
• Movement select: strips, 230
14. Select Start to begin the movement.
15. When movement has stopped, change the Direction to “from down to up” and
select Start again.
16. Repeat the selected movements 9 more times for a total of 10 up and 10 down.
Stop the movement after the last up movement and close the screen.
17. Wipe the lower part of the lead screw with the absorbent towel to remove any
excess oil. Dispose of the towel.
18. Select “Sample Arm Initialization” from the “D-10 Sample arm module” screen.
NOTE: Procedures 9.2.5 through 9.2.11 require the system to be shutdown,

turned off and the power cord removed.
9.2.5 Flow Cell Cleaning
1. Shut down the D-10, turn off the power and remove the power cord.
2. Make a dilution of the flow cell cleaning solution using one part cleaning solution
to two parts deionized water. Total volume should be at least 10 mL.
3. Remove the tubing at the detector in the following order to avoid twisting of the
backpressure loop tube:
• Disconnect the detector outlet tubing (orange PEEK) from the female-female
union.

• Remove the union from the backpressure loop tube and connect it to the
detector outlet PEEK tube.
• Connect the Teflon tube from the flow cell cleaning kit to the second inlet of
the union using the appropriate ferrule and fitting. Place the open end of the
Teflon tube into the cleaning solution.
4. Open the cartridge holder and remove the cartridge insert containing the
cartridge. Remove the cartridge and cap the ends.
5. Install the cartridge bypass tool. Place an absorbent towel under the silicon tube
attached to the male outlet of the tool to catch any liquid.
6. Connect the 10 mL syringe of the flow cell cleaning kit to the luer connector on
the cartridge bypass tool.
7. Gently pull back on the syringe plunger until 1 mL of cleaning solution has been
aspirated. Soak for 10 minutes.
8. Repeat Step 7.
9. Remove the Teflon tube from the cleaning solution and place it into a container of
deionized water.
10. Gently pull back on the syringe plunger until 2 mL of deionized water has been
aspirated. Remove the syringe and empty it.
11. Reconnect the syringe to the cartridge bypass tool and pull an additional 6 mL, 2
mL at a time. Remove the syringe.
12. Remove the union at the outlet of the flow cell.
13. Remove the union from the Teflon tube, connect it to the backpressure loop of the
D-10 and to the outlet of the flow cell.
14. Remove the cartridge bypass tool.
15. Wash the internal surface of the cartridge holder module, near the outlet to the
flow cell, with deionized water. Re-install the D-10 cartridge.
16. After the system is powered up, flush the fluid line by manually starting the pump.
Refer to Section 9.3.1 for the procedure.

9.2.6 Inspection and Cleaning
9.2.6.1 HPLC Module
1. Verify that the system is off and the power cord is removed.
2. Inspect all internal tubing for signs of leakage. Tighten or replace fittings and
tubing as needed.
3. Clean the bottom of the HPLC module. A small leak behind the pump head, at
the piston flush circuit, is not unusual.
4. Clean all other internal and external surfaces.
9.2.6.2 Cartridge Holder
2. Place an absorbent towel under the cartridge holder.
3. Open the cartridge holder. Check the movement of the cartridge holder door as
it is opened.
4. Remove the cartridge insert.
5. Clean the internal surface of the cartridge holder.
6. Replace the cartridge holder insert, checking the installation.
7. Close the cartridge holder and dispose of the towel.
9.2.6.3 Syringe Module
2. Inspect all internal tubing for signs of leakage. Tighten or replace fittings and
tubing as needed.
3. Clean the bottom of the syringe module.
4. Clean the internal waste bottle. Refer to Section 5 of the D-10 Operation
Manual for the procedure. Verify there are no rubber particles in the bottle.

9.2.6.4 Wires
2. Check the connection of the flex cables on the sample arm end (on the Z
movement PCB). (Figure 9-3)
Figure 9-3: Flex Cables on Z movement PCB
3. Inspect the flex cables at the X module end (2 blue connectors). (Figure 9-4)

Figure 9-4: Flex Cables on X Module
4. Check the Tube Height measurement flex cable and its connection to the Z
connection board.
9.2.6.5 Barcode Reader
2. Clean the barcode reader window.
9.2.6.6 External Waste Tubing
2. Check the external waste tubing. Replace if needed.
9.2.6.7 Rear Panel Fan
2. Remove the external grid and clean it.
3. Clean the dust off the blades of the fan.
4. Check the free rotation of the motor.

5. Re-install the external grid.
9.2.6.8 Sample Rack Track
2. Clean the external surface of the rack track.
3. Clean the dust off the external surface of the rack reflective sensor.
4. Check the position of the rubber wheel mounted on the rack driving motor.
9.2.7 Liquid Waste Pump Cleaning and Inspection
NOTE: Pump replacement is an alternative to this procedure.
WARNING: The liquid waste pump is biohazardous. Use disposable gloves

and extreme caution when handling.
2. Unlock, but don’t remove, the 4 screws that secure the head of the pump. (Figure
9-5)
Figure 9-5:
Liquid
Waste
Pump
3. The pump head consists of 2 green plastic parts; remove only the upper part.
(Figure 9-6)

Figure 9-6: Liquid Waste Pump Components
4. Clean the upper (removed) part, making sure there are no rubber particles
trapped in the nozzles.
5. Remove the 2 black rubber parts (Figure 9-6) from the pump, being careful not to
tear them. Clean the pump head. DO NOT remove the green plastic part from the
pump body.
6. Replace the 2 black rubber parts on the pump and reassemble the pump. When
replacing the 2 green plastic parts, be careful to respect the alignment of the 2
lines etched on one side of the pump head.
9.2.8 Pinch Valve Tubing Replacement
2. Remove the 2 pinch valve tubes from the syringe module.
3. Disconnect the ends of each tube from the luer fitting and the stainless steel tube
on the waste manifold #1. (Figure 9-7)

Figure 9-7: Pinch Valve Tubing Connections
4. Connect the new tubings at the luer fitting and the waste manifold.
5. Perform an internal waste bottle check after the system is powered up. Refer to
Section 9.3.1 for the procedure.
9.2.9 7-port High-Pressure Valve Component Replacement

1. Replace the rotor seal and stator face. Refer to Section 6.43 for the procedure.
9.2.10 High-Pressure Pump
1. Remove the pistons. Refer to Section 6.40 for the procedure.

2. Clean the pistons with deionized water and inspect them. Replace if scratched or
worn.
3. Replace the piston seals. Refer to Section 6.41 for the procedure.
9.2.11 Firmware Verification
1. Verify that the current firmware is on the MC Controller, the HPPC Controller and
the PIC TC Controller. The replacement procedures can be found in Section
6.15, Interface Board Replacement.

9.2.12 Replace the Sample Probe
1. Dispose of the old sample probe according to region requirements for the
disposal of sharps.
Warning: The sample probe is very sharp and a potential biohazard. Use
extreme caution when handling it.
2. Install the new probe and connect the sample tubing.
9.3 Checks and Adjustment Procedures

Replace the power cord and turn on the D-10.
9.3.1 Detector Flush and Internal Waste Check
1. Select Maintain from the D-10 user software.
2. Set the flow rate to 1.5 and select Start Pump. Let the pump run for 6 minutes.
Select Stop Pump.
3. Select Service.
4. Select Internal Waste Check. Verify that the check passed.
9.3.2 High-Pressure Valve Check
1. Select “HP: Pump + Valve” from the “D-10 Service Software (2/2)” screen.
2. Select “Next” until the “D-10 HP Module: pump + valve (4/16)” screen is reached.
3. Select “Home Mvt (Reset)” to initialize the valve. The sensor status is “load”.
4. Select “To Inject Position” to move the valve to inject position. The sensor status
is “inject”.
5. Select “To Load Position” to move the valve to load position. The sensor status is
“load”.
6. Select “To Prime Position” to move to prime position. The sensor status is
“prime”.
7. Select “To Load Position” to move the valve to load position. The sensor status is
“load”.

9.3.3 Sample Rack Track Check
1. Select “Rack Intro” from the “D-10 Service Software (1/2)” screen.
2. Select “Launch Rack Introduction”. Place an empty sample rack in position and
verify that the rack is introduced smoothly.
3. Select “Launch Rack Ejection”. Verify that the rack is ejected smoothly.
9.3.4 Internal Waste Bottle Performance Check

Refer to Section 7.11 for the procedure.
9.3.5 Detector Adjustment

Refer to Section 7.2 for the procedure.
9.3.6 Temperature Check

Refer to Section 7.9 Thermal Module Check for the procedure.
9.4 Post Maintenance
1. Shut down the D-10, turn off the power and remove the power cord.
2. Remove the bypass tools and replace the front cover.
3. Replace the power cord and turn on the D-10.
9.5 Performance Verification
1. Set up a sample run using controls.
2. Check the pressure stability during the warm-up gradient.
3. Review the chromatography and verify that it meets all criteria listed in the
Instruction Manual for the kit used.
9.6 D-10 Maintenance Report

Complete the D-10 Maintenance Report. Leave a copy at the customer site.

D-10 Maintenance Report
Date: Site: City:
State: Country: S/N: Assays:
Software Version: Service Software Version: Firmware Version: Injection Count
Required as part of PM ~ As Needed
Component Clean/Check Replace Lubricate
Dilution/Wash Station Interior/Exterior /
S4 and S5 Tubing / ~
Drain Evacuation /
Sample Arm Sample Probe
Vertical Lead Screws Z Movement /
TH Movement /
Detector Flow Cell/Flush /
Adjustment /
HPLC Module Interior/Exterior /
Cartridge Holder Internal Surface /
Syringe Module Tubing / ~
Exterior /
Internal Waste Bottle /
Wires Flex Cables on Sample Arm / ~
Flex Cables at X Module / ~
Barcode Reader Window /
External Waste Bottle Tubing / ~
Rear Panel Fan Grid /
Blades /
Rotation /
Sample Rack Track Track /
Rack Introduction /
Rack Ejection /
Liquid Waste Pump Interior / ~
Pinch Valve Tubing
Internal Waste Bottle /
Interface Board EPROMS /
7- Port High-Pressure Valve Rotor/Stator /
Positioning /
High- Pressure Pump Piston Seals
Pistons / ~
Thermomodule Temperature Adjustment /
Performance Pre PM Post PM Verification
Pump Pressure/ Fluctuation ______/______ ______/______

Pump Purge and Leak Check
Retention Times: A1c/Ao _____ / _____ _____ / _____
Calibrator Slope/Intercept _____ / _____ _____ / _____
Baseline Quality ____________ ____________
Comments


10 SPARE PARTS
Bio-Rad Adil
Part Description Picture Comments
P/N P/N
2200221 2200221 D10 LCD Display Touch

Screen
2200222 2200222 D10 Reagent Tray
2200223 2200223 D10 Hard Disk Drive, 40 Capacity: 40 GB

Gb
Designed for 3.5"

floppy disks, with a
2200224 2200224 D10 Floppy disk drive, memory capacity of
1.44MB 1.44 MB.
D10 Thermal Printer

2200225 2200225
Assembly, Kyosha Kyoline
XT Model C029-W6

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200226 2200226 D10 Door w/ Hinges: Front,

top
Plastic thumbscrew
2200227 2200227 D10 Door w/Hinges: Front, included.
bot.
Screws, flat washers

2200228 2200228 D10 Spring,Gas Front Top and pin included.
Door
Used in the front

cover assembly.
2200229 2200229 D10 Solenoid+Sensor:
Front Door Complete with the
cable.
2200231 2200231 D10 Arm (w/ bar code

reader)

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200232 2200232 D10 Drive Belt:

X Movement
2200233 2200233
D10 Drive Belt: Needle Z
2200234 2200234 D10 Drive Belt: Tube

Holder
2200235 2200235
D10 Sensor: Hall Effect
2200236 2200236 D10 Sensor: Z home

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200237 2200237 D10 Sensor: TubeHold

position
2200238 2200238 D10 Sensor: TubeHold With flex cable.

tube ht.
2200239 2200239 D10 Sensor: TubeHold

home
2200240 2200240
D10 Sensor: X position
2200241 2200241 D10 Sensor: X home

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Rev 3
D10 PCB:
2200242 2200242 Compatible with all
Z Movement
DAE001 R3 previous revisions.
Rev 3
2200243 2200243 D10 PCB: Compatible with all
X Movement DAE002 previous revisions.
2200244 2200244 D10 Cable,flex:Samp arm

12 pin
2200245 2200245 D10 Cable,flex:Samp arm

8 pin
D10 Barcode Reader,

2200246 2200246
Opticon Model NFT07175L
2200247 2200247 D10 Probe, 122mm L
2200248 2200248 D10 Module: Syringe

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200249 2200249
D10 Valve: Pinch SIRAI S2
2200250 2200250 D10 Pump: Syringe

1 ml
2200251 2200251
D10 Pump: Liquid Waste
Rev 2
2200252 2200252 D10 PCB: Syr Module Compatible with all
2200253 2200253 D10 Valve, 3-way: Syringe

Module

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Complete with LUER

2200254 2200254 D10 Tank, Waste: Internal fittings.
50ml, HDPE
2200255 2200255 D10 Tubing: Pinch Valve,

2/pk
2200256 2200256 D10 Module, High Complete drawer.

Pressure (HP)
2200257 2200257 D10 7-Port Valve w/ 23ul

Sample Loop
RheBuild Kit for HP

V2/D10 Refurb Kit:
2702170 2702170 valve (rotor and
7-Port Valve
stator) #7531-999.

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200258 2200258 D10 Valve, 3-way

Proportioning, Parker
2200259 2200259 D10 Sensor, High pressure
Rev 5
2200260 2200260 D10 PCB: HP Module, Compatible with all
DAE003 previous revisions.
2200261 2200261
D10 Module, Detector
2200262 2200262
D10 PCB: Detector LED

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200263 2200263 D10 PCB: Detector

Reference
2200264 2200264 D10 PCB: Detector

Absorption
Rev 4
2200265 2200265 D10 PCB: Detector Compatible with all
Complete with fittings

2200266 2200266 D10 Flow Cell: Detector (not crimped).
2200267 2200267 D10 Module: Cartridge

Heater

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200268 2200268 D10 Sensor, Temperature
2200269 2200269 D10 Heater, Peltier, 2/pk
2200270 2200270 D10 Fuse, Thermal
2200271 2200271 D10 Cartridge Holder
2200272 2200272 D10 Pump Assembly,

HPLC

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
NOTE: Not
compatible with
2200273 2200273 D10 Sample loop, 23µl Variant II injection
loop
Including power
supply 1, power
2200274 2200274 D10 Module, Electronics supply 2,
motherboard and
interface board.
Delivered voltages:
+5 VDC
2200275 2200275 D10 Power Supply 1 +12 VDC
+26 VDC
(-12 VDC)
Delivered voltage:
2200276 2200276 D10 Power Supply, 24 volt +24 VDC
2200277 2200277 D10 Fan: Processor (K6)

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200278 2200278 D10 Motherboard PCM-

5896
2200279 2200279 D10 Processor (K6-2E

350MHz)
2200280 2200280 D10 Memory DIMM 64Mb
Rev 6
2200281 2200281 D10 PCB: Interface Compatible with all
Rev 2
2200282 2200282 D10 PCB:LCD Internal Compatible with all

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200283 2200283 D10 Module: Rack Support
2200284 2200284 D10 Wheel, rubber: Rack With mounting screw.

drive
2200285 2200285 D10 Motor w/ Wheel: Rack

Drive
2200286 2200286 D10 Sensor: Rack input
2200287 2200287 D10 Sensor: Rack output

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200288 2200288 D10 Dilution/Wash Station
2200289 2200289 D10 Module, Degasser
Rev 3
2200290 2200290 D10 PCB: Degasser Compatible with all
Not interchangeable
2200291 2200291 D10 Bubble Detector 1 with #2 and #3.
Not interchangeable

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Not interchangeable
2200294 2200294 D10 Pump, Vacuum,

NMP830KND
2200295 2200295 D10 Tubing, Buffer: Degas,

2/pk
2200296 2200296 D10 Tubing, Wash:

Degasser
2200297 2200297 D10 Microvial Adapters,

10/pk

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200298 2200298 D10 Cover: Front
2200299 2200299 D10 Door w/Hinges: Left
2200300 2200300 D10 Door w/Hinges: Right
2200301 2200301 D10 Printer support
2200302 2200302 D10 Rack, Sysmex

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200303 2200303 D10 Tube Adapter, 12mm,

10/pk
2200304 2200304 D10 Tube Adapter, 13mm,

10/pk
2200305 2200305 D10 Tube Adapter, 14mm,

10/pk
2200306 2200306 D10 Fan: Main
2200307 2200307 D10 Module: Rack Door

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200308 2200308 D10 Sensor: Rack Door

Open
2200309 2200309 D10 Sensor: Rack Door

Closed
2200310 2200310 D10 Sensor: Z position
2200311 2200311 D10 Solenoid: Rack Door
Rev 2
2200312 2200312 D10 PCB: LCD I/F Compatible with all
2200313 2200313 D10 Shipping Crate

w/Pallet

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Contents:
T1: 1/8" x 1/16" x 700
mm + T2: 1/8" x 1/16"
x 700 mm + T5: 1/8" x
1/16" x 700 mm + 3
2200314 2200314 D10 External Buffer Tubing bottle caps (each
glued to a tubing) + 3x
T15: 1/8" x 1/16" x 207
mm + S13: 6 mm x 3
mm x 2500 mm.
Contents:
T3: 1/8” x 1/16” x 570
mm + T4: 1/8” x 1/16”
x 650 mm + T6: 1/16”
x 0.75 mm x 530 mm +
T7: 1/16” x 0.75 mm x
115 mm + T9: 1/16” x
0.75 mm x 1250 mm +
2200315 2200315 D10 Tubing, Teflon: T10: 1/16” x 0.75 mm
Internal, Set x 210 mm + T11: 1/16”
x 0.75 mm x 530 mm +
T12: 1/16” x 0.75 mm
x 150 mm + T13: 1/16”
x 0.75 mm x 110 mm +
T14: 1/16” x 0.25 mm
x 1200 mm.
Contents:
P1: 1/16” x 0.5 mm x
2200316 2200316 D10 Tubing, Peek, Set 170 mm + P2: 1/16” x
0.5 mm x 120 mm.

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Contents:
S4: 6 mm x 3 mm x
550 mm + S5: 6 mm x
3 mm x 550 mm + S6:
3.2 mm x 2 mm x 27
mm + 6 mm x 3 mm x
23 mm (on each side)
+ S7: 3.2 mm x 2 mm
x 27 mm + 6 mm x 3
mm x 23 mm (on each
side) + S8: 6 mm x 3
mm x 140 mm + S9: 6
2200317 2200317 D10 Tubing, silicon, Set mm x 3 mm x 270 mm
+ S10: 6 mm x 3 mm x
160 mm + S12: 6 mm
x 3 mm x 330 mm +
S14: 6 mm x 3 mm x
30 mm + S15: 6 mm x
3 mm x 120 mm +
S16: 6 mm x 3 mm x
35 mm + S17: 6 mm x
3 mm x 60 mm + S18:
6 mm x 3 mm x 390
mm + 2 check valves.
2200318 2200318 D10 Service manual
Contents:
probe + HP pump
piston seals +
2200320 220320 D10 Preventive RheBuild Kit for HP
Maintenance Kit valve + pinch valve
tubing
S13: 6 mm x 3 mm x
2200321 2200321 D10 Tubing, Waste: 2500 mm.
External
Complete with
connector.
2200322 2200322 D10 Tank, Waste, External,
10L, HDPE Capacity: 10 l.

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200323 2200323 D10 Screw Kit, Complete
2200324 2200324 D10 Potentiometer:LCD

contrast
2200325 2200325 D10 Manifold, Waste,

Large
2200326 2200326 D10 Manifold, Waste,

Small
2200327 2200327 D10 Fittings, LUER: Int. With seals.

waste

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200328 2200328 D10 Fittings,LUER, Colored, Male and female.

Set
Contents:
S1: 4 mm x 2.5 mm x
250 mm + 6 mm x 3
mm x 20 mm (on each
2200329 2200329 D10 Tubing, Vacuum: side) + S2: 4 mm x 2.5
Degasser mm x 160 mm + 6 mm
x 3 mm x 20 mm (on
each side) + S3: 6 mm
x 3 mm x 220 mm.
T14: 1/16" x 0.25 mm

2200330 2200330 D10 Tubing, Back pressure x 1200 mm.
2200331 2200331 D10 Connector:bk press.

tubing
Ready to use: cut to

length, mounted on
2200332 2200332 D10 Tubing,Coil: Column its support and
heater equipped with fittings.

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Pistons + seals for
Corrective
2200333 2200333 D10 Maintenance Kit, Maintenance
HPLC pump (Order P/N 2200320
for full PM)
2200335 2200335 D10 Cable,power:Liquid

pump
2200336 2200336 D10 Cable,power:pinch

valve 1
2200337 2200337 D10 Cable,power:pinch

valve 2
2200339 2200339 D10 Cable,power:

Vacuum pump

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Flat cable between

2200340 2200340 D10 Cable:I/F interface board and
PCB>detector PCB detector board
Flat cable between

2200341 2200341 D10 Cable:I/F PCB>X interface board and
movemt PCB X mvt board
Flat cable between

interface board and
2200342 2200342 D10 Cable:I/F PCB>HP HPLC module
PCB 24pin board
(24 pins)
Flat cable between

interface board and
2200343 2200343 D10 Cable:I/F PCB>HP HPLC module
PCB 34pin board
(34 pins)
Flat cable between

interface board and
2200344 2200344 D10 Cable:I/F
syringe module
PCB>syringe PCB
board

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Strand between
2200345 2200345 D10 Cable,pwr:P.E.M. power block and
switch switch
Strand between
D10
2200346 2200346 switch and power
Cable,power:switch>suppl
boards
y
Strand between
D10
2200347 2200347 power boards and
Cable,power:supply>I/F
interface board
PCB
Supply strand
between interface
2200348 2200348 D10 Cable,power:I/F
board and
PCB>mobo
motherboard
2200349 2200349 D10 Cable,power:Hard

disk

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200350 2200350 D10 Cable,power:Floppy

drive
Flat cable between

LCD interface
2200351 2200351 D10 Cable:LCD I/F
board and LCD
PCB>int PCB
internal board
Flat cable between

2200352 2200352 D10 Cable:mobo>floppy floppy drive and
drive motherboard
Link cable between

motherboard and
2200353 2200353 D10 Cable:mobo>external
external LAN
LAN
connector
Link cable between

motherboard and
2200354 2200354 D10 Cable:mobo>external
external VGA
VGA
connector

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Link cable between

motherboard and
2200355 2200355 D10 Cable:mobo>kbd +
external keyboard +
mouse
mouse connectors
Link cable between

interface board and
2200356 2200356 D10 Cable:I/F PCB>ext
external rack feeder
rack mod
connector
Flat cable between

interface board and
2200357 2200357 D10 Cable:I/F PCB>ext
external RS422-
RS232
RS232 connectors
2200358 2200358 D10 Cable,power:

Thermal heater
Link cable between

2200359 2200359 D10 Cable:I/F interface board and
PCB>degasser PCB degasser board

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200360 2200360 D10 Wire,Ground:P.E.M. Power Block Ground
HPLC module board

2200361 2200361 D10 Wire,Ground:HP ground
Module PCB
2200362 2200362 D10 Wire,Ground:cart.

module
Link cable between

HPLC module
2200363 2200363 D10 Cable:HP PCB>rack
board and rack
door sol
door solenoid
2200364 2200364 D10 Cable:+24 VDC

security

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200365 2200365 D10 Cable,power:CD-

ROM Drive
Connection cable
between Z mvt
2200366 2200366 D10 Cable:Z mvt board and Hall
PCB>Hall sensr effect adapter
sensor
2200367 2200367 D10 Flange nut
Used on the Z and

2200368 2200368 D10 Lead screw TH mvts.
2200369 2200369 D10 Bearing: Lead screw

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Standard, without
2200370 2200370 D10 Bearing, Slide play.
Marked ‘LL’, with

2200371 2200371 D10 Bearing, Slide, play.
Floating
Driving pulley of the X

mvt.
2200372 2200372 D10 Pulley, Belt, 16 teeth
With mounting screw.
Driving pulley of the Z

and TH mvts.
Led pulley of the Z

and TH mvts.

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
112 mm (W) x 42 mm
2200375 2200375 D10 Printer Paper, 10/bx (D) x 20 m (L).
2700220 Dummy PEEK cartridge
2200376 2200376 D10 Backlight, CCFL: LCD
D10 Piston Seals,

2200377 2200377
DuoFlow, 2/pk
D10 Pistons: DuoFlow,
2200378 2200378
2/pk
2200379 2200379 D10 Check Valve:

DuoFlow
Label size: 25.5mm x
12.8mm
14 labels–CAL1, 14
labels-CAL2, 7
2200380 2200380 D10 Bar Code Labels, Set labels-PRIME, 42
labels-CTRL
Total 154 labels (2
sheets x 77 labels)
2200381 2200381 D10 Motor Assy: HP Pump

D10 Pump Head: HP
2200382 2200382
Pump, center
D10 End Block: HP Pump,
2200383 2200383
inlet

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
D10 End Block: HP Pump,
2200384 2200384
outlet
D10 O-Ring: HP Pump
2200385 2200385
Flush Port
2200386 2200386 D10 Ball Seat: HP Pump
D10 Sapphire Ball: HP
2200387 2200387
Pump
D10 Tool: Priming Port
2200388 2200388
Sleeve
D10 Priming Port: HP
2200389 2200389
Pump
D10 Sleeve: HP Pump
2200390 2200390
Prime Port
2200391 2200391 HP Pump head screws kit
D10 HP Pump Cam
2200392 2200392
Sensor
D10 HP Pump Cam
2200393 2200393
encoder wheel
D10 Short Screw: HP
2200394 2200394
Pump outlet
D10 Long Screw: HP
2200395 2200395
Pump Head
Flat cable between

2200396 2200396 D10 Cable: Mobo>Hard motherboard and
Disk hard disk
Contains 1 yellow, 1
2200397 2200397 D10 Fittings: 7-port Valve, red, 1 blue and 1
Set green fitting.
2200398 2200398 D10 Box, Waste Container

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200399 2200399 D10 Box, Accessories
2200400 2200400 D10 Accessories kit
2200401 2200401 D10 Syringe, 50ml
D10 Tool: CDROM

2200402 2200402
extension cable
2200403 2200403 D10 Fuses, 2/pk
2200404 2200404 D10 Power Cord, 110v

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200405 2200405 D10 Power Cord, 220v
2200406 2200406 D10 Lubricant oil
2200407 2200407 D10 Cyanoacrylate glue Loctite 460 glue

Loctite 603 Oil
2200408 2200408 D10 Anaerobic glue Tolerant glue
D10 Tool: Belt Tension
2200409 2200409
Adjust
2200410 2200410 D10 Torque driver
2200411 2200411 D10 Balance
Flat end
2200412 2200412 D10 Tool: Detector screwdriver
Adjustment
D10 Tool: Pressure Sensor DRUCK DPI 610

2200413 2200413 with fittings.
Calib

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200414 2200414 D10 Pressure Gauge

w/Fittings
2200415 2200415 D10 Front Cover Sensor 6-pin connector

Bypass
2200416 2200416 D10 Front Cover Switch 4-pin connector

Bypass
2200417 2200417 D10 Cable extender: 5-pin

plug
2200418 2200418 D10 Cable extender: 6-pin

plug

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Contents:
2 check valves +
S14: 6 mm x 3 mm x
30 mm + S15: 6 mm
2200419 2200419 D10 Waste Check Valves x 3 mm x 120 mm +
w/tubes S17: 6 mm x 3 mm x
60 mm + S18: 6 mm
x 3 mm x 390 mm + 1
LUER connector.
2200420 2200420 D10 Tool: PLCC EPROM

Extractor
2200421 2200421 D10 Module Power Entry With fuses.
2200422 2200422 D10 Front cover assy Complete front cover.
2200423 2200423 D10 Switch: Front Cover Complete with the

cable.
2200424 2200424 D10 Dummy probe

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
X home sensor / TH
tube height flag
2200425 2200425 D10 Tool: X Home, TH positioning jig
Height 2-in-1 tool.
Z home sensor / TH
home flag positioning
2200426 2200426 D10 Tool: Z Home, TH jig
Home 2-in-1 tool.
2200427 2200427 D10 Tool: See-Thru Wash

Tower
Clear dilution/wash
2200428 2200428 D10 Tool, X Movement station with additional
Adjust cut-out.
Rack sensor
adjustment gauge /
upper front door
2200429 2200429 D10 Tool: Rack & Rack simulator / rack door
Door Sensor sensor positioning jig
3-in-1 tool.

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
Bar-code reader
2200430 2200430 D10 Tool: Bar Code
positioning jig
Position
2200431 2200431 D10 Tool, Z Movement

Control
2200432 2200432 D10 Tool: TH Vertical

Adjustment
Sample arm / rack

support alignment
2200433 2200433 D10 Tool: Sample Arm/ jigs
Rack Tray Bi-functional tool.
Contains an
alignment rail and a
2200434 2200434 D10 Tool: Slide Bearing thickness jauge (4-
Align in-1 tool).
PEEK With LUER

2200435 2200435 D10 Tool: Cartridge inlet and outlet.
Bypass

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200436 2200436 D10 Standoff, M3 2/pk
Contains 3 ¼"
female-female
2200437 2200437 D10 Union and Plug, ¼”, connectors and 3
3/pk ¼" male caps.
Thermocouple
2200438 2200438 D10 Tool: Cartridge inserted in an
Temp Check analytical cartridge.
Back pressure
2200439 2200439 D10 Tool, Pressure regulator + fittings.
Regulator
Calibrated load
(tubing coil)
2200440 2200440 D10 Tool: Coil & Dye, mounted on a
WC/FC Check dummy cartridge
holder + dye.
Hanna digital
thermometer +
adapter cable +
temperature sensor
2200441 2200441 D10 Tool:Temp inserted in an
Calibration Kit analytical cartridge
+ 2 reference
resistors.
D10 Tool: WC-FC 'T' connector +
2200442 2200442 silicon tubing + dye.
Determination

Bio-Rad Adil
P/N P/N
2200443 2200443 D10 Image CD

Appendix A: File Examples
Table of Contents:
DIA.ini A-1
Instrument.ini A-3
Profile.ini A-4
Profile2.ini A-6
Diaser.ini A-8
*.CSV (partial) from Service Software A-10
200:155 Service Manual A-i

A - ii Service Manual 200:155

DIA.ini File
[Status]
Version=2.17
[State]
CurrentInjNumber=6
DateTag=80
WPistonFlushTag=80
CurrentWasteVol=100000
[Settings]
Language=0
AutoWarmUpTime=27000
AutoShutDownDuration=1800
AutoShutDownDurationMin=1800
AutoShutDownDurationMax=5400
BarCodePresent=1
ArchiveToFloppy=0
ArchiveToSerial=1
ArchiveToNetwork=1
ReportCalError=1
ReportCtrlError=1
PressureUnit=0
WarmUpTimeOut=900
MaxNSRRuns=24
DisableAutoWarmUp=1
ReagentWarningLevel=5
CartWarningLevel=5
WasteWarningLevel=5
TotalWasteVol=100000
[Lis]
LisID=0
ExportActivated=1
LisAfterEachRun=0
LisAfterEachInjection=0
LisManualOnly=1
[Print]
AutoPrintOut=1
DailyLog=1
[Data]
ExportSelectedSample=0
DataOrientation=1
200:155 Service Manual A-1

[Assay]
CurrentAssay=0
CurrentReagentLot=AB06256
CurrentControlLot=33560
CurrentCalibC1=0.053
CurrentCalibC2=0.119
CurrentControlLL=0.051
CurrentControlLM=0.056
CurrentControlLU=0.061
CurrentControlHL=0.093
CurrentControlHM=0.097
CurrentControlHU=0.101
MaintainBPercent=50
[Maintain]
MaintainFlowRate=2.2
MaintainBPercent=50
ServiceSoftware=diaser.exe
[HPPump]
EPISTONVOL=380.000000
EENCRES=1024
EMOTORREDUCTION=20
EVRESPTIME=10
EVALVEHIGHTIME=20
EVRESPTIMEP=50
EVRESETOFFSET=0
[Barcode]
Calib1Header=CAL1
Calib2Header=CAL2
ControlHighHeader=CTRH
ControlLowHeader=CTRL
PrimerHeader=PRIME
A-2 Service Manual 200:155

Instrument.ini
[Status]
Version=2.12
[Instrument]
SerialNum=DA2L121104
[HPPump]
Rule1=0,1,2376.238,0
Rule2=1,1.5,2345.582,30.962
Rule3=1.5,99,2432.104,-100.689
HPSensor_Offset=19.831
HPSense_Gain=13.542
ECAMFILLSHIFT1=155
EFILLDURATION=113
[Arm]
wTHOffset=-55
wZOffset=0
[BubbleDetect]
Bubble_A_1=0
Bubble_A_2=255
Bubble_B_1=0
Bubble_B_2=255
Bubble_W_1=0
Bubble_W_2=255
[TC]
TCCal_Gain=1
TCCal_Offset=0.5
TCCal_SensorOffset=-0.3
TCCal_GradientOffset=-0.

Profile.ini
[Status]
Version=2.20
[General]
StandbyFlow=0.2
[Kit]
Kit0=0
Kit1=0
Kit2=0
Kit3=0
Kit4=0
[Init]
XSpeed=9
ZSpeed=2
THSpeed=2
SSpeed=2
VSpeed=0
InitType=1
NeedlePrime=1
wExhaustDelay=10
[LowPrime]
FillSyringeSpeed=7
EmptySyringeSpeed=4
XSpeed=6
THSpeed=5
ZSpeed=5
ExhaustChamberDelay=50
StrokeCount=3
[HighPrime]
FillSyringeSpeed=5
EmptySyringeSpeed=4
XSpeed=1
THSpeed=5
ZSpeed=5
WashStrokeCount=8
StrokeCount=38
[HpFlush]
FillSyringeSpeed=7
EmptySyringeSpeed=4

XSpeed=1
THSpeed=5
ZSpeed=5
ExhaustChamberDelay=50
StrokeCount=3
[SystemTable]
bFakeRead=0
bMXOverrun=3
wMXWarnSteps=2500
wMXWarnNbr=0
wMZWarnSteps=13001
wMZWarnNbr=0
wMTHWarnSteps=11002
wMTHWarnNbr=0
wMSWarnSteps=5200
wMSWarnNbr=0
wMVWarnSteps=2400
wMVWarnNbr=0
DegasLowPress=118
DegasHighPress=125
DegasTimeOut=120
bRackDoorMonitor=1
bFrontDoorMonitor=1
bRackDoorPresent=1
bWasteGoodVacuum=76
bWasteCheckTimeOut=20
[Misc]
SleepLightSourceLevel= 0
StandbyLightsourceLevel= 150
[PumpParameters]
wHPAnalogPeriod=250
PumpCurrentMax=181
wPumpCurrentDefaultMax=64
wPumpSpeedMax=1000
wPumpSpeedDefaultMax=2
fProfileSpeedSteps_fudge=400.0
fPSI_fudge=2500.0

Profile2.ini
[Status]
Version=2.20
[Kit]
Name=Hb A1c
SName=Hb A1c
StName=A1c
TestFile=a1c.hpl
PrimeFile=primer.hpl
WarmUpGradient=1
WarmUpGradientFile=warmupa1c.hpl
BeginRun=1
BeginRunFile=begina1c.hpl
EndRun=1
EndRunFile=enda1c.hpl
RealTotalBuffer1Vol=16000
RealTotalBuffer2Vol=15000
RealTotalWashVol=19000
TotalBuffer1Vol=15000
TotalBuffer2Vol=13000
TotalWashVol=16000
TotalCartridgeInj=500
Buffer1InjConsuption=60
Buffer2InjConsuption=26
WashInjConsuption=32
WasteInjVolume=120
DualKit=0
[Inject]
wSampleVolume=20
wDiluantVolume=480
wSecondDilutionSampleVolume=20
wSecondDilutionDiluantVolume=680
wDilutionValveDelay=10
wAirBubbleVolume=60
wAntiDropBubbleVolume=0
wTHSenseMicrovialHigh=6675
wTHSenseMicrovialLow=7675
wTHSenseMin=0
wZsamplingPosition=230
wZMicrovialSampling=180
wZantiDropOffset=105
wMicroVialAntiDropVolume=25
wFromDilutionToValve=745

wChamberCleaningVolume=1000
bFillSyringeSpeed=9
bEmptySyringeSpeed=9
bAirGapSyringeSpeed=1
bAspSampleSyringeSpeed=0
bDspSampleSyringeSpeed=0
bLoopFillSyringeSpeed=0
bXSpeed=9
bTHSpeed=6
bTHTubeHoldSpeed=2
bZSpeed=6
bZPiercingSpeed=1
bSyringeValveDelay=10
bExhaustChamberDelay=50
bBCReadFlag=1
wMicroVialSampleVolume=250
wMicroFromDilutionToValve=460
wMicroVialAirBubbleVolume=10
[Chroma]
wSampleRate=36
wSampleDuration=180
wInjectionDelay=20
bRefAdjust=1
bLightSourceIntensity=150
bIOGainValue=64
dAbsMax=16106127
dAbsMin=8388608
dAbsRef=8808038
bLightSourceIntensityMax=240
wBaseLinePercent=470
wInjectionInterval=180
dMaxRefDrift=13421772
bVSpeed=4
[Prime]
bVSpeed=8
wLoadDuration1=120
wInjectDuration1=12
wLoadDuration2=150
wInjectDuration2=18
wLoadDuration3=60
wInjectDuration3=60
wLoadDuration4=60
wInjectDuration4=210
wLoadDuration5=30

[PumpParameters]
wMaintainHighPRessureAlarm=2000
wRunHighPressureAlarm=1067
RunHighAverageMeasNumber=12
wRunLowPressureAlarm=130
RunLowAverageMeasNumber=60
Diaser.ini
[Status]
Version=1.05-1A
[Maintain]
UserSoftware=Dia.exe
LoadProfile=0
CheckBeforeExit=1
Password1=81d80815851d73ee717f27e5a2ce6851
Password2=97b6efa84a8ecd3851b76273e7a6e6b8
Password3=e8f95b17eea00d1f2bf5febb3e77877e
[Test]
Number=2
Test1=HBA1C
Test2=BTHAL
[Gradient]
bLightSourceIntensity=150
bIOGainValue=64
bPumpSpeed=3600
DurationMax=60
StaticGradDuration1=300
[Motor]
XStepCourseMax=2200
XStripCourseMax=44
XAllMoveSpeedDefault=5
ZStepCourseMax=12000
ZStripCourseMax=240
ZAllMoveSpeedDefault=5
THStepCourseMax=8000
THStripCourseMax=160
THAllMoveSpeedDefault=5

ZStepDilutionChamber=3500
ZStripDilutionChamber=70
ZStepWashChamber=10200
ZStripWashChamber=204
THOffsetTheo=7775
[HPPump]
FlowRateMax=20
FlowRateDefault=15
FlowRateCalibDefault=1,1.5,2,99
WCMin=145
WCMax=165
FCMin=100
FCMax=125
[StaticGradTest]
NbWin=2
START1=150
START2=510
END1=300
END2=600
[DilamexGradTest]
NbWin=3
START1=45
START2=240
START3=510
END1=80
END2=360
END3=600
[StepGradTest]
NbWin=11
START1=60
START2=270
START3=450
START4=630
START5=810
START6=975
START7=1170
START8=1350
START9=1535
START10=1685
START11=1895
END1=120
END2=315

END3=495
END4=675
END5=855
END6=1050
END7=1215
END8=1395
END9=1575
END10=1725
END11=1935
*.CSV (partial) from Service Software
Valid TimeStamp.hms TimeStamp.ms Raw Meas Ref Meas Log I0/I Temperature Degasser HP
Pressure Pressure
Ok 10:32:06 139 11966535 12593843 0,02218986 2132 129 567
Ok 10:32:06 439 11965404 12592568 0,02218694 2132 129 567
Ok 10:32:06 740 11962765 12594946 0,02236474 2132 128 565
Ok 10:32:07 40 11963223 12592520 0,02226445 2131 129 565
Ok 10:32:07 341 11965430 12595251 0,02227852 2131 129 575
Ok 10:32:07 641 11965170 12592656 0,02219847 2131 129 575
A - 10 Service Manual 200:155

Appendix B: Diagrams
Table of Contents:
D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-1
D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in inject position) B-3
D-10: High-Pressure Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-5
General Fluidic Diagram B-7
200:155 Service Manual B-i

B - ii Service Manual 200:155

D-10: Sample Preparation

Circuit
(HP valve in load position) wash solution
(from degasser)
T9
T6
Tubings: T7
T6: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 530 mm sampling

T7: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 115 mm probe
T9: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 1250 mm
T10: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 210 mm B NC NO B T10
T11: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 530 mm
T13: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 110 mm 3 way
dilution chamber
probe wash port

valve
T14: teflon 1/16'' x 0.25 mm (blue), l = 1200 mm
P4: PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm (orange), l = 190 mm
S4: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm (green), l = 550 mm T13 Y R

7 port,
S5: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm (yellow), l = 550 mm 3 position
S6: silicon 3.2 mm x 2 mm, l =27 mm 6 5
HP valve
T11 G
+ 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 23 mm on each side (load position)
S7: silicon 3.2 mm x 2 mm, l =27 mm
+ 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 23 mm on each side
1 7 4
S8: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 140 mm motorized
S9: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 270 mm syringe (1ml)
S10: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 160 mm B Dilution/
S12: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 330 mm wash
S13: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm (red), l = 2500 mm station sample rack
S14: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 30 mm piston flush 2 3 Y
S15: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 120 mm circuit
S16: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 35 mm G
S17: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 60 mm
HP pump head
S4 S5
from HP pump
piston
to the cartridge
and sensor holder G Y
2 pinch valves
dilution
probe wash
sample loop valve
valve
SS1 NO
NO
S17 S18 S6 S7
check valve
T14 P4 waste manifold #1
from detector
B B outlet
(back pressure tubing)
S13 S12
S9 vacuum
S8 sensor
R R
CPC fast
connector S15 S14 S10
S16 internal waste bottle

B Blue
waste manifold #2
check valve
liquid pump
R Red
High pressure valve: High pressure valve: High pressure valve:

G Green load position inject position priming position plastic barbed fitting LUER fitting
6 5 6 5 6 5
or
plastic knurled fitting stainless steel tube
W White 1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4
waste bottle stainless steel nut fast connector
Y Yellow 2 3 2 3 2 3
200:155 Service Manual B-1

B-2 Service Manual 200:155

D-10: Sample Preparation

Circuit
(HP valve in inject position) wash solution
(from degasser)
T9
T6
Tubings: T7
T6: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 530 mm sampling

T7: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 115 mm probe
T9: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 1250 mm
T10: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 210 mm B NC NO B T10
T11: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 530 mm
T13: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 110 mm 3 way
dilution chamber
probe wash port

valve
T14: teflon 1/16'' x 0.25 mm (blue), l = 1200 mm
P4: PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm (orange), l = 190 mm
S4: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm (green), l = 550 mm T13 Y R 77port,

port,
S5: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm (yellow), l = 550 mm 3 position
3 position
S6: silicon 3.2 mm x 2 mm, l =27 mm 6 5 HP valve
T11 HP valve G
(inject position)
+ 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 23 mm on each side (load position)
S7: silicon 3.2 mm x 2 mm, l =27 mm
+ 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 23 mm on each side
1 7 4
S8: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 140 mm motorized
S9: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 270 mm syringe (1ml)
S10: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 160 mm B Dilution/
S12: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 330 mm wash
S13: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm (red), l = 2500 mm station sample rack
S14: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 30 mm piston flush 2 3 Y
S15: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 120 mm circuit
S16: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 35 mm G
HP pump head
S4 S5
from HP pump
piston
to the cartridge
and sensor holder G Y
2 pinch valves
dilution
probe wash
sample loop valve
valve
SS1 NO
NO
S17 S18 S6 S7
check valve
T14 P4 waste manifold #1
from detector
B B outlet
(back pressure tubing)
S13 S12
S9 vacuum
S8 sensor
R R
CPC fast
connector S15 S14 S10
S16 internal waste bottle

B Blue
waste manifold #2
check valve
liquid pump
R Red
High pressure valve: High pressure valve: High pressure valve:

G Green load position inject position priming position plastic barbed fitting LUER fitting
6 5 6 5 6 5
or
plastic knurled fitting stainless steel tube
W White 1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4
waste bottle stainless steel nut fast connector
Y Yellow 2 3 2 3 2 3


D-10: HP Circuit
(HP valve in load position) High pressure pump
degasser
High pressure
B B sensor
to the 3 way valve
B T6 encoder
T5
DT1 3 bubble
detectors
M
T1 G DT2 G T3 G
NO T12 P1 P2
IN OUT
T15
T2 W W W
piston flush
G W T4 NC
circuit
IN OUT
DT3 proportioning valve
cam sensor
wash solution
S17
T15 T15 S1 S2
T7 to the check to the probe

valve
vacuum
pump T9
S3
buffer / reagent 1 buffer / reagent 2
vacuum
Y R motorized,
sensor 7 way,
6 5 3 position
Tubings: T11 HP valve
to the 1ml syringe (load position)
DT1: teflon 2.1 mm x 1.5 mm, l = 3000 mm to the rear of the
1 7 4
DT2, DT3: teflon 2.1 mm x 1.5 mm, l = 15000 mm instrument
T1: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'', (green) l = 700 mm B

T2: teflon 1/8" x 1/16", (white) l = 700 mm
T3: teflon 1/8" x 1/16", (green) l = 570 mm
T4: teflon 1/8" x 1/16", (white) l = 650 mm 2 3
P4 P3
T5: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'', (blue) l = 700 mm
T6: teflon 1/16'' x 0.75 mm, l = 530 mm G
T7: teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm, l = 115 mm
T9: teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm, l = 1250 mm analytical heating
cartridge
T11: teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm, l = 530 mm T14 flow
to the waste SS2
T12: teflon 1/16" x 0.75 mm, l = 150 mm cell
manifold #2
T14: teflon 1/16'' x 0.25 mm (blue), l =1200 mm (back pressure tubing)
T15: teflon 1/8" x 1/16'', l = 205 mm
loop
sample loop
P1: PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm, l = 170 mm cartridge holder
SS1 B Blue
Hb detector
P2: PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm, l = 120 mm module
P3: PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm (blue), l = 190 mm
P4: PEEK 1/16" x 0.5 mm (orange), l = 190 mm R Red
S1: polyamide 4 mm x 2 mm, l = 250 mm High pressure valve: High pressure valve: High pressure valve:
+ silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 20 mm load position inject position priming position G Green
6 5 6 5 6 5
plastic barbed fitting LUER fitting
S2: polyamide 4 mm x 2 mm, l = 250 mm
+ silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 20 mm or
1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4 plastic knurled fitting stainless steel tube W White
S17: silicon 6 mm x 3 mm, l = 60 mm stainless steel nut fast connector
SS1: stainless steel 23 ul calibrated loop 2 3 2 3 2 3 Y Yellow
SS2: stainless steel 1/16" x 0.5 mm, l = 650 mm


HP pump
OUTSIDE INSIDE
HP sensor
D-10:
degasser
M General Fluidic Diagram
T1 G DT2 G T3 G
NO T12 P1 P2
IN OUT
W W W
piston flush
T2 T4 NC
circuit
G W DT3
bubble proportioning OUT IN
detectors (3) valve probe
B B
T5 T6
chamber
DT1
probe wash
dilution
chamber
T15 T15 T10 S17 T7 T9
NC NO 7 way,
B B Y R 3 position
S1 S2 3-way 6 5 HP valve
check T11 G
valve (load
valve
buffer 1 buffer 2 position)
B 1 7 4
vacuum T13
pump B
vacuum
sensor
2 3
sample rack
Y
T15
S3 syringe S18 G S5
(1ml) S4
G Y
SS2
wash/diluent SS1
sample loop
NO NO
probe
B B dilution
wash
P4 P3 valve
valve
S6 S7
S13 S12 heating
T14 cartridge
R flow
(back pressure cell waste
CPC fast
tubing) manifold 1
connector
loop
vacuum
waste manifold cartridge sensor
Hb detector
2 module S8
S9
R
S15 S14 S10
B Blue internal waste
S16
bottle
check
external waste R Red valve liquid pump
G Green High pressure valve: High pressure valve: High pressure valve: plastic barbed fitting
load position inject position priming position
LUER fitting
6 5 6 5 6 5
or plastic knurled fitting
stainless steel tube
W White
1 7 4 1 7 4 1 7 4
hexagonal stainless
fast connector
steel fitting
Y Yellow
2 3 2 3 2 3


Electronic module D-10 : Electrical Block Diagram

sheet 1/2
Rear panel
LCD 320 x 240
with CCFL backligth RS232 rack
Ethernet keyboard mouse
port to VGA port feeder
Touch screen port port port
external port
Touch screen and display interface

board RS232
Port Ethernet keyboard mouse VGA
(COM4) Interface interface interface interface fan
CN16 (1/ CN15 CN11 CN11 CN12
4)
LCD port
main input
CN9 IDE
LCD/PC connection RS232 Interface hard disk
board Port CN5
(COM1)
EMC main input filter CN16 (1/
fuses holder 4) FDD
Floppy
Mother board Interface
disk drive
K6-2e processor CN17
64 Mo
RS232
ON/OFF bipolar port
switch power supply RS422 port Thermal
(COM3)
input (COM2) printer to external
CN16
CN8 CN16 (2/4) (3/4) CD reader
(service)
power power power

RS422 port power to rack
DC power supply 1 DC low supply supply supply
(A16) supply feeder
board voltage output to output to output to
(5VDC, 12VDC, power mother output to module
floppy disk hard disk
26 VDC, -12VDC) input board fan (A8) (A14)
(A3 or A4) (A3 or A4)
(A1) (A2) interface board
DC power supply 2 to thermal and high

board to waste and reserve reserve reserve
pressure module to degasser to detector to X module
(24 VDC) syringe module supply 2 supply supply
(A9 + A10) module (A11) module (A12) (A15)
(A13) (A7) (A6) (A5)
see sheet 2/2 see sheet 2/2 see sheet 2/2 see sheet 2/2 see sheet 2/2
ON/OFF unipolar
switch
(front cover)
electronic board sub assembly

B - 10 Service Manual 200:155

RS422 to PC mother board

liquid pump CN6 Syringe
pump Sampling CN4 X stepper motor sample
pinch valve (dilution) CN7 and waste arm (X mvt)
arm
module A16 connection
solenoid board
CN11 X home sensor module
pinch valve (probe wash ) CN8 connection drivers (5) with INTERFACE BOARD
sy board (X part)
current CN10 X axis sensor
rin sensing
pinch valve 3 CN9
ge Stepper motor
Vacuum sensor driver with
Syringe stepper motor CN3
interface current sensing rack
mo CN3 Rack positionning DC motor
CN4
A13
du Syringe Home sensor CN2 Stepper motor Optosensor
mo
CN1
driver interface (6)
CN8 Rack input sensor
le du
Syringe 3 way valve CN5 (microsteps)
with current Hall effect
CN9 Rack output sensor le
Vacuum sensing sensor interface
Internal Waste bottle sensor
Optosensor Solenoid and
DC motor CN5 CN2 Solenoid for door locking (rack input)
interface (1)
drivers with
Vacuum sensor Vacuum sensor current sensing CN6
CN7 Closed door sensor (rack door) rack
de Aux. vacuum
Aux. vacuum sensor (option) CN12 Open door sensor (rack door) door
gas- sensor A11 vacuum sensor MC:
interface (2)
ser Vacuum pump CN8
DC motor µ-controller Stepper motor
A11
CN4
mo Bubble detector 1 (buffer 1) CN1 driver + RAM driver with CN4 CN1 adapter sensor (Hall effect)
A15
current sensing
du Bubble detector 2 (buffer 2) CN3 Degasser + ROM CN10
optosensor
+ I/O CN11 Z stepper motor
le connection interface (3) Optosensor
Bubble detector 3 (wash sol.) CN6 board interface (2)
CN2 Z home sensor
Sampling sample
CN13 Z axis sensor
High Pressure Pump motor CN16 arm arm
(Z mvt) module
Proportioning valve CN15 DC motor RS 232 port and CN6 Barcode reader (RS232 link)
driver w. Tube Holder
HP valve (V) stepper motor CN14 current sensing Stepper motor connection (Z and
CN12
driver with board CN7 TH stepper motor TH
Peltier module 1 CN13 Solenoid driver
current sensing
(2 levels) part)
high w. current sensing CN12 TH home sensor
Peltier module 2 CN11 Optosensor
pres Stepper motor interface (3)
TH axis sensor
A10
Thermal contact CN10 CN5
- driver w. current
sure sensing
Cam flag sensor CN9 CN8 Tube heigth sensor
mo Peltier element
driver w. current
du HP pump encoder CN8
sensing
le
CN5
HP valve sensors (3) CN7 Solenoid driver I/O interface to Rear
A14
w. current to optional rack feeder board
high pressure sensor CN6 sensing
rackfeeder unit panel
Pt 100 Ohm sensor (1) CN4 Optosensor

interface (3)
Pt 100 Ohm sensor(2) (opt.) CN3
Optosensor CN2 Si Photodetector: reference
interface (4)
high pressure
A9
A12
CN4
connection high pressure
CN1 Si Photodetector: absorbance Detector
board sensor interface module
CN3 Hight brightness LED
front CN1 temperature Detector
Front door locking sensor sensor interface
door circuit board
locking Front door locking (solenoid) CN2
HPPC:
TC:
µ-controller
ucontroller for + RAM
heater and + ROM D-10: Electrical Block Diagram
electronic board sensor temperature
sensor interface + I/O sheet 2/2
motor or solenoid sub assembly
200:155 Service Manual B - 11

B - 12 Service Manual 200:155

Appendix C: Electronic Diagrams
Table of Contents:
Detector Board: List of Components C-9
Sampling Arm Connection Board Z C-13
Sampling Arm Connection Board X C-15
High-Pressure Connection Board C-17
Syringe Connection Board C-19
Degasser Connection Board C-21
LCD Internal Board and LCD Interface Board C-23
200:155 Service Manual C-i

C - ii Service Manual 200:155

L1 L
P
PT10
VDD IC9 PT13
M R46 IC8 D1
8 1 1 2
R48 IDC ISWC VIN VOUT 3
PT11 7 R44 VOUT 6
IPK VOUT 5VANA
ADJ
5 7
6 COMP VOUT
3 VCC
TCAP
4
+ R47 +
4
+ 2 GND R45 C21 C24 C23 C27
ISWE
C26 C25 C22
R43
DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND N
PT12
AGND
5VANA
5VANA
K C18
AGND
R41 P9 8
R40 IC5B
5 +
Vref
7
V0
6
-
IC7 R38
C19 4
AGND AGND AGND

AGND
CN4
1 DADY
2
3 /RESET
4 SD1
5
6 SD0
7
8 SCLK
9 CS0
10 CS1
11 CS2
12 CS3
13 DSYNC
14 DSYNC
15 VDD
16
DGND
AD IL I NST RUM ENTS
Title
DETECTOR BOARD
Size Document Number Rev

DAE011E/3 3
Date: Monday, September 08, 2003 Sheet 1 of 4
200:155 Service Manual C-1

C-2 Service Manual 200:155

V0
V0
B +
R1
CN1 R8 PT1 C2
IC2A
1 3 +
2 1 AGND AGND
3 2
-
ABS
R5 R2
5VANA
R3 R11
C3
V0
V0 8 C
R14 IC2B
5 + PT2
7
6 +
-
D
4 C5 AIN0
Vref PT3 R4
V0
R13
R15 R12 AGND R6

-
V0
C6 V0
C10 R7
A
AGND
PT0
V0
V0
E
CN2
R25 PT4
1 IC3A
2 3 +
3 1
4 2
-
REF
R20 R16
G
PT6
5VANA
R17 R26
C11
V0
V0 8 IC .3 A2 IC .4 W2
R29 IC2B
5 + R18
7
6
-
H
4 C12 +
Vref PT7
V0
R28
AIN1
R30 R27 AGND R23 R19
V0
C13 -
C15 R24 V0
AGND
V0
Title
DETECTOR BOARD

DAE011E/3 3


F
IC4
PT5
7
PDWN VDD
1
11 DV 2 C14
AIN1 +
-
12 Ain0
Ain1
DGND
DGND
8
C9 DGND
13 3
AIN0 +
-
14 Ain2
Ain3
Xin
Y1 C8
9 4
Vref Vref+ Xout
10
16 Vref- 6
AGND AGND DSYNC DSYNC
15 21
V0 Aincom Dout SD0
17 20
5VANA AVdd Din SD1
22
SCLK SCLK
5
RST /RESET
19
CS CS1
DRDY
Ain3
BUF
R31
R21
18
24
23
VDD
P6 DGND
R33
P5
VDD
P4 VDD R32
P3 DGND
R34
P2 IC1
P1 VDD 7 R22
PDWN VDD
1
11 DV 2 C4
AIN0 +
-
12 Ain0
Ain1
DGND
DGND
8
DGND
C1 13 3
14 Ain2 Xin
AGND Ain3
9 4
Vref Vref+ Xout VDD
10
16 Vref- 6
AGND AGND DSYNC
15 21
V0 Aincom Dout
17 20
5VANA AVdd Din 22 R9
SCLK 5
RST 19
CS CS0
DRDY
Ain3
BUF
C7
AGND
18
24
23
R10
DADY
Title
DETECTOR BOARD

DAE011E/3 3


CN3
Vref
1
AGND 2
R
5VANA 3
PT14 4
R35 5
A1
IC5A LED
3
3 + R37
W1
1 2 Q1
B1
2
-
J
R39
1
PT8
R36
C16 C17
AGND
AGND AGND
VDD
C20
DGND
16
IC6
23
VCC
A1 A1
22
W1 W1
24
B1 B1
12 21
SD1 SDI ADGN1
13
SD0 SDO
14 3
SCLK CLK A2 IC .3 A2
4
W2 IC .4 W2
2
B2 1
ADGN2
11 19
CS2 CS A3
15 18
/RESET RS W3 20
B3 17
ADGN3
7
R42 A4 8
10 W4 6
VDD SHDN B4 5
ADGN4
GND
VDD
AD8403AR-10 AGND
9
DGND
Title
DETECTOR BOARD

DAE011E/3 3


Detector Board: List of Components

REPERE Qté DESIGNATION VALEUR Révision 2 VALEUR Révision 4
R1 1 RESISTANCE 0805 1K 1K
R5 1 RESISTANCE MINIMELF 2M2 2M2
R8 1 RESISTANCE 0805 8K2 8K2
R9 1 RESISTANCE 0805 NC NC
R11 1 RESISTANCE 0805 0 0
R12 1 RESISTANCE 0805 1M 1M
R14 1 POTENTIOMETRE 3224G 20K 20K
R20 1 RESISTANCE MINIMELF 1M 1M
R27 1 RESISTANCE 0805 1M 1M
R28 1 RESISTANCE 0805 10K 6K8
R44 1 RESISTANCE 0805 5K1 5K1
R46 1 RESISTANCE 0805 180 180
NOMENCLATURE: DAE011/2+4 PAGE 1 / 3


R48 1 RESISTANCE 2512 1.8 1,8
C1 1 CONDENSATEUR 0805 100nF 50V 100nF 50V

C2 1 CONDENSATEUR TANTAL 10µF 10V TANTAL 10µF 10V
C8 1 CONDENSATEUR 0805 10pF 10pF
C13 1 CONDENSATEUR 0805 68nF 68nF
C21 1 CONDENSATEUR 47µF 16V BOITIER / D 47µF 16V BOITIER / D
C22 1 CONDENSATEUR 0805 470pF 50V 470pF 50V
C25 1 CONDENSATEUR 47µF 16V BOITIER / D 47µF 16V BOITIER / D
C27 1 CONDENSATEUR 22µF 6V3 BOITIER / C 22µF 6V3 BOITIER / C
C28 1 CONDENSATEUR 1nF 50V 100nF 50V
IC1 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE ADS 1240 E ADS 1240 E

IC2 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE AD 8572 AR AD 8572 AR
IC3 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE AD 8572 AR AD 8572 AR
IC4 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE ADS 1240 E ADS 1240 E
IC5 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE LM 358 D LM 358 D
IC6 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE AD 8403 AR10 AD 8403 AR10
IC7 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE LM 4040 CIM3-2.5 / LM 4040 CIM3-2.5 /
ZRA 250 F01 ZRA 250 F01
IC8 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE MC 34063 A MC 34063 A
IC9 1 CIRCUIT INTEGRE LM 317 LD LM 317 LD
Y1 1 QUARTZ 86 SMX 4.9152 MHz 4.9152 MHz

D1 1 DIODE 10 MQ 090 10 MQ 090
C - 10 Service Manual 200:155


Q1 1 TRANSISTOR BC 817-25 BC 817-25
L1 1 SELF 470µH HM 7610471 J HM 7610471 J
CN1 CONNECTEUR B 3B-PH-SM3-TB B 3B-PH-SM3-TB

CN4 CONNECTEUR HE10 16pts DROIT / HE10 16pts DROIT /
M M
PT-V0 1 PLOT TEST

PT12 1 PLOT TEST
PT7 1 BARRETTE 2 pts M / M 2 pts M / M
200:155 Service Manual C - 11


V CC
C21 C17 C8 C6
100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF
CN11 Moteur Z
CN7 Moteur TH 2A
2A OUT1A _Z 2A 1
R10 R11 C26 C25
hall se nsor is moun t OUT1A _TH 2A 1 OUT2A _Z 2
2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
OUT2A _TH 2 3
3 2A 4
AD 4 SENSE1_Z 5
CN1 2A 2A
1.2mm SENSE1_TH 5 SENSE2_Z 6
adapter sensor 2A
1 SENSE2_TH 6
1
(Hall e ffect). C9 C13 JST B6B-EH-A
2 C22 C23 100pF 100pF
JST B6B-EH-A
3 100pF 100pF
4
A DAPTATOR_SENSOR 5
C24 JST B5B-PH-K- S
100pF
V CC
V CC
NC
NC R4 R1 C1 C2
R17 R16 C33 C34 if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
CN4 if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
2A
1 OUT1A _Z ZP
2A CN13 Z posit ion sensor
2 OUT2A _Z THP 1.2mm
2A CN5
3 SENSE1_Z 1.2mm 1
1
2A TH posi tion sensor
4 2A SENSE2_Z 1 2
1
5 2A OUT1A _TH 2 3
6 2A OUT2A _TH 3 4
7 2A SENSE1_TH 4 Z_POS_SENSOR 5
8 SENSE2_TH V CC TH_POS_SENSOR 5
1.2mm C7 JST B5B-PH-K- S
HE14 8cts C35 JST B5B-PH-K- S 100pF
1
100pF
CN10
1A V CC
1
2 Z_POS_SENSOR
V CC
3 Z_HOME_SENSOR
GND C36 V CC
4 TH_POS_SENSOR
1.2mm + 10µF/10V C37
5 TH_HOME_SENSOR
100nF
6 TH_HIGHT_ SENSOR
1
NC
7 A DAPTATOR_SENSOR NC R12 R13 C29 C28
8 BA RCODE_RxD if hall sensor is m ount
R2 R3 C5 C4 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
9 1A BA RCODE_Tx D if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
10
11 TH_RES_SENSOR THH ZH
1.2mm CN12 1.2mm CN2
12 Z_RES_SENSOR TH home sensor Z home sensor
1 1
1
HE14 12cts
2 2
3 3
4 4
TH_HOME_SENSOR 5 Z_HOME_SENSOR 5
C3 JST B5B-PH-K- S JST B5B-PH-K- S
100pF C27
100pF
V CC
V CC NC NC NC NC
R14 R15 C32 C31
if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
NC
ZR
R7 R8 C16 C15 1.2mm CN3 NC
if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
1
1
THT 2
1.2mm CN8
TH high t sensor 3
1 4
1
2 Z_RES_SENSOR NC 5
3 C30 JST B5B-PH-K- S
4 100pF
TH_HIGHT_ SENSOR 5
C14 JST 05FE-ST- V K-N
100pF
V CC V CC
TX
1.2mm
1
V CC C20 R9 C19 C18 NC NC NC NC

NFM40R01C101 100pF 10K 100pF 100pF R5 R6 C12 C11
2
L2 if hall sensor is m ount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF

CN6 THR
GND
1 3 1.2mm CN9 NC
BA RCODE_Tx D OUT IN 1 TH sens or
2 1
1
reserve d
3 2
4 3 Modification :
L1
3 1 5 4 Ajout du condensateur C36 de 10µF/10 V en boitier B.
GND
BA RCODE_RxD IN OUT 6 TH_RES_SENSOR NC 5 Ajout du condensateur C37 de 100nF en boitier 0805.

NFM40R01C101 8 100pF
9 ADIL INSTRUMENTS
2
10 Title
1
JST B10B-PH- K-S DIA90 4 SA MPLING A RM CONNECTION BOA RD Z

1.2mm
RX Size Document Number Rev
A3 DA E 001 E/3 3
Date: Friday, June 0 7, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1


V CC
CN1 Découplage des signaux des connecteurs

2A
1 2A SOL_POS NC
CN5 et CN6
2 2A SOL_POS
R1 R4 C7 C4
3 2A SOL_NEG
2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF C35 100pF
4 2A SOL_NEG
5 2A MOT_POS OUT1A _Z
6 2A MOT_NEG
XP CN10 C33 100pF
7 2A OUT1A_X
1.2mm
8 2A OUT1A_X 1 OUT2A _Z
1
9 2A SENSE1_X 2 X posit ion sensor C30 100pF
10 2A SENSE1_X 3
11 2A OUT2A_X 4 SENSE1_Z
12 2A OUT2A_X X_POS_SENSOR 5 C28 100pF
13 2A SENSE2_X
C1 JST B5B-PH-K- S
14 2A SENSE2_X SENSE2_Z
TPA 100pF
15 2A OUT1A_Z
1.2mm C26 100pF
16 2A OUT1A_Z
1
V CC
17 2A SENSE1_Z OUT1A _TH
SENSE1_Z U1F
18 2A C24 100pF
19 2A OUT2A_Z
12 13
20 2A OUT2A_Z A DAPTATOR_SENSOR_TRIGGERED ADAPTATOR_SENSOR NC OUT2A _TH
21 2A SENSE2_Z
R2 R5 C8 C5 C22 100pF
22 2A SENSE2_Z
74HC14A /SO 2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF
23 2A OUT1A_TH SENSE1_TH
24 2A OUT1A_TH
XH CN11 C20 100pF
25 2A SENSE1_TH
VCC 1.2mm
26 2A SENSE1_TH 1 SENSE2_TH
1.2mm
1
27 2A OUT2A_TH 2 X home sensor
1
U1E C37 100pF
28 2A OUT2A_TH 3 V CC
29 2A SENSE2_TH 4
10 11
30 1A SENSE2_TH X_HOME_SENSOR 5
V CC C36 100pF
31 1A C2 CN5
JST B5B-PH-K- S Z_POS_SENSOR
32 100pF 2A
X_POS_SENSOR 74HC14A /SO OUT1A_Z
33 + C48 C49 1 2A C34 100pF
34 X_HOME_SENSOR 10µF/10V 2 2A OUT2A_Z
100nF V CC
35 OPEN_DOOR_SENSOR 3 2A SENSE1_Z Z_HOME_SENSOR
36 Z_POS_SENSOR 4 2A SENSE2_Z
C32 100pF
37 1A Z_HOME_SENSOR 5 2A OUT1A_TH
38 6 2A OUT2A_TH TH_POS_SENSOR
39 TH_POS_SENSOR 7 2A SENSE1_TH
R3 R6 C9 C6 C31 100pF
40 TH_HOME_SENSOR 8 SENSE2_TH
2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF
41 TH_HEIGHT_SENSOR TH_HOME_SENSOR
HE14 8cts
42 1A ADAPTATOR_SENSOR_TRIGGERED
C29 100pF
43 DL CN12
44 BA RCODE_RxD TH_HEIGHT_SENSOR
GND 1.2mm
45 1A BA RCODE_Tx D 1
1.2mm
1
C27 100pF
46 2 Door lo cking
1
CLOSED_DOOR_SENSOR U1D A DAPTATOR_SENSOR

47 3 sensor
48 RA CK_IN_SENSOR_TRIGGERED 4
8 9 C25 100pF
49 1A RA CK_OUT_SENSOR_TRIGGERED OPEN_DOOR_SENSOR 5
50 BA RCODE_RxD
C3 JST B5B-PH-K- S
74HC14A /SO 100pF C23 100pF
HE10 50cts
BA RCODE_Tx D
V CC
C47 C45 CN6 C21 100pF
100pF 100pF VCC
1 RA CK_OUT_SENSOR
CN4 Z_POS_SENSOR
2A NC 2 C19 100pF
OUT1A _X 2A 1 3 Z_HOME_SENSOR
R7 R13 C16 C13
OUT2A _X 2 4 TH_POS_SENSOR RA CK_IN_SENSOR
2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF
3 Moteur X 5 TH_HOME_SENSOR
2A 4 6 TH_HIGHT_SENSOR
RP CN7
SENSE1_X 2A 5 7 A DAPTATOR_SENSOR
1.2mm
SENSE2_X 6 1 Rack 8 BARCODE_RxD
1
2 9 BARCODE_Tx D
C38 C39 JST B6B-EH-A U1C positio n
100pF 100pF 3 10
sensor
6 5 4 11 R17 NC
CLOSED_DOOR_SENSOR 5 12 RA CK_OUT_SENSOR
RA CK_IN_SENSOR
C10 R10 NC JST B5B-PH-K- S HE14 12cts
2A 74HC14A /SO 100pF 4.7K 0R0
R16 NC
C42 V CC
100pF
CN2 0R0
SOL_POS
C44 1 Solenoi d for door l ocking
D1 47nF (2220 ) p lastique 2 R8 R14 C17 C14
SMBJ33A 3 2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF
SOL_NEG JST B3B-PH-K- S
RI CN8
C40 1.2mm
100pF 2A 1
1
U1A 2 Rack in put

3 sensor
2 1 4
RA CK_IN_SENSOR_TRIGGERED 5
C43 C11 R11 NC JST B5B-PH-K- S
100pF 74HC14A /SO 100pF 4.7K
CN3
MOT_POS 2A V CC
NC 2A 1 Rack po sitionning D C motor RA CK_IN_SENSOR
C46
D2 47nF (2220 ) p lastique 2
SMBJ33A JST B2B-PH-K- S Modifications :
MOT_NEG
R9 R15 C18 C15 Ajout du condensateur C48 10µF/10Ven boitier B
C41 2.2K 150R 100pF 100pF Ajout du condensateur C49 100nF en boitier 0805
100pF Remplacement du connecteur CN2 JST B2B-PH-K-S par un
RO CN9
1.2mm JST B3B-PH-K-S
1
1
2 DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR replaced by OPEN_DOOR_SENSOR

U1B Rack ou tput
3 sensor RACK_POS_SENSOR replaced by CLOSED_DOOR_SENSOR
4 3 4
RACK_OUT_SENSOR_TRIGGERED 5 ADIL INSTRUMENTS
C12 R12 NC JST B5B-PH-K- S
74HC14A /SO 100pF 4.7K Title
DIA 904 SAMPLING ARM CONNECTION BOARD X
RA CK_OUT_SENSOR Size Document Number Rev
A3 DA E 002 E/3 3
Date: Friday, October 25, 200 2 Sheet 1 of 1


V CC
V CC GND CN4 CN3
1.2mm 1.2mm
PT100_HEA T_S1 1 PT100_EXT_S1 1
1
PT100_HEA T_S2 2 PT100_EXT_S2 2
C19 PT100_HEA T_S3 3 PT100_EXT_S3 3
R2 R1 C17 C22
NC 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF 4 4
V CC
C39 C41 C44 JST B4B-EH-A C38 C40 C43 JST B4B-EH-A
+
CN5 CA MO CA MI 100pF 100pF 100pF HEAT S 100pF 100pF 100pF EXT S
10µF/10V 1.2mm 1.2mm CN9
1
1
2 1
3 CA M_ FLAG 2
U1A
4 3
5 TA CKY_ A 4
2 1
6 CA M_ FLAG 5 TA O TA I
7 TA CKY_ B
C24 JST B5B-PH-K- S 1.2mm 1.2mm C20
8 100pF CAM S
1
74HC14A /SO C21 100pF
9 SENSOR_0
U1B 100pF CN8
10 SENSOR_1
11 SENSOR_2 V CC 1
4 3
12 FRONT_DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR TA CKY_ A 2
13 3
HP_SENSOR_SUPPLY U1C
14 V CC C23 4
74HC14A /SO
15 6 5 100pF JST B4B-PH-K- S
16 HP_SENSOR_POS TA CKY_ B HPP E
17
18 HP_SENSOR_NEG
74HC14A /SO
19 R10 R9 C45 C48
HP_SENSOR_GND
1
20 20K 150 100pF 100pF
21 1.2mm 1.2mm
22 PT100_HEA T_S1
TBO TBI
23 FDL CN1
24 PT100_HEA T_S2
1.2mm
25 1
1
26 PT100_HEA T_S3 2 C31 C27
27 3 100pF R3 100pF
28 PT100_EXT_S1 4 0R0 CN6
29 FRONT_DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR 5
2
L1
30 PT100_EXT_S2 HP_SENSOR_SUPPLY 1
C47 JST B5B-PH-K- S
GND
31 100pF F DOOR S 1 3 2
32 PT100_EXT_S3 HP_SENSOR_NEG OUT IN 3
33 NFM40R01C101 4
34 V CC 5
NFM40R01C101 6
HE10 34 CTS
1 3 JST B6B-PH-K- S
GND
HP_SENSOR_POS OUT IN HP S
V CC
HP_SENSOR_GND
L2 C34 C37
C18 100pF 100pF
2
S0I S1I S2I
V CC
S0O 1.2mm 1.2mm 1.2mm C26
1.2mm 100nF R4 R5 R6 R7
1
100pF
1
10K 10K 10K 10K

U1D CN7
V CC 1
8 9
SENSOR_0 2
S1O
1.2mm 3
4
1
74HC14A /SO
5
U1E
6
10 11 R8 Molex 7054 3
SENSOR_1 HPV S
S2O 0R0 C25 C29 C32 C35 C28 C30 C33 C36
1.2mm NC 100nf 100nF 100nF 100nF 100pF 100pf 100pf 100pf
1
74HC14A /SO
U1F
12 13
SENSOR_2
74HC14A /SO
FRONT_DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR
C5 C3
100pF 100pF HP VALV E
CN14
2A C13 C9
OUT1A _HPV 8 100pF 100pF
2A 7 CN11 1A
CN12 OUT2A _HPV MIXING_V ALV E_POS
6 2A CN15
1 HP_PUMP_POS 5 HEA TER_POS 1 C12
2 HP_PUMP_POS SENSE1_HPV 2A 4 C15 2 1
D2 47nF (2220 )
3 HP_PUMP_POS 3 2
Molex 5566 -02 SMBJ33A
4 HP_PUMP_POS SENSE2_HPV 2A 2
HP_PUMP_NEG MIXING_V ALV E_NEG JST B2B-PH-K- S
5 1 100pF 2A 1A LPM V
6 HP_PUMP_NEG HPV M
C8 C11 C10
7 HP_PUMP_NEG
100pF 100pF Molex 6373 8cts C14 100pF
8 HP_PUMP_NEG
9 MIXING_V ALV E_POS
CN10
10 MIXING_V ALV E_NEG
100pF Modification :
11 OUT1A _HPV 1
C2
12 OUT1A _HPV
100pF C16 2 4 Remplacement de la valeur de la résistance R10 elle passe
13 SENSE1_HPV
SENSE1_HPV Molex 5566 -02 de 2.2K a 20K
14 Imax = 4A HP PUMP
15 OUT2A _HPV HP_PUMP_POS
100pF C46
16 OUT2A _HPV 2A 3 Retournement du connecteur CN14, Les sorties sont sur
CN16 100pF
17 SENSE2_HPV 1A
D1 C4 1 2 CN2 les broches 1,3,5,7. La mise en série des bobines se fait sur
18 SENSE2_HPV + + C6 SOL_B_POS
SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) 3 4
19 HEA TER_POS + + C42 1 les broches 2 et 6, 4 et 8.
20 HEA TER_POS 2
21 HEA TER_NEG
Molex 5566-04
HPP M
CN13 D3 47nF (2220 )
3 ADIL INSTRUMENTS
100pF SMBJ33A
22 HEA TER_NEG HP_PUMP_NEG Imax = 4A 1 Title
SOL_B_POS HEA TER_NEG SOL_B_NEG JST B3B-PH-K- S
23 C1 2A 2 1A SOL DIA90 4 HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION BOA RD
24 SOL_B_NEG
100pF C7 Molex 5566 -02 C49
HE10 24 CTS 100pF 100pF Size Document Number Rev
A3 DA E003E/4 4
Date: Monday, December 16, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1


HE10 26cts
1 OUT1A _SYR
C14 C24 C18
2 OUT1A _SYR
100pF
3 SENSE1_SY R
100pF 100pF
4 SENSE1_SY R 1A
OUT2A _SYR SY RINGE_V A LV E_POS CN3
5 2A
OUT2A _SYR CN5 OUT1A _SYR
6 2A 1
7 SENSE2_SY R 1 SENSE1_SY R 2A 2 SYR M
D5 C16
8 SENSE2_SY R 2 SENSE2_SY R 3
SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) p lastique
9 SY RINGE_V A LV E_POS OUT2A _SYR 4
SY RINGE_V A LV E_NEG JST B2B-PH-K- S
10 3W V 2A
LIQUID_PUMP_POS Panduit idc 4 cts
11 1A C20 C22
12 LIQUID_PUMP_NEG SY RINGE_V A LV E_NEG
13 PINCH_VA LV E_1_POS
V CC C13 100pF 100pF
14 PINCH_VA LV E_1_NEG
1.2mm 100pF
1
19 V CC
20
21 SY R_HOME_SENSOR
C4
22 100pF
23 L_V A C_SENSOR_SUPPLY
A GND_V A C_SENSOR
1
24 GND 1A
25 L_V A C_SIGNA L PINCH_VA LV E_3_POS
1.2mm
26 C9
CN4 100pF CN9
D2 C6
1A SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) p lastique 1
LIQUID_PUMP_POS 2
JST B2B-PH-K- S
CN6 RED PV
D3 C11 1A
SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) p lastique
2 C2
JST B2B-PH-K- S 100pF
LIQ P
1A
LIQUID_PUMP_NEG
C7
100pF
C3
100pF
1A
PINCH_VA LV E_2_POS
CN8
D1 C5 1A
SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) p lastique 1A 1
2
JST B2B-PH-K- S
YELL PV
1A
PINCH_VA LV E_2_NEG
C1
V CC 100pF
if hall sensor is R1 R2 C27 C21

mount 2.2K 150 100pF 100pF
SY R CN2 C10
1.2mm 100pF
1 Syringe home
1
2 sensor 1A
4
SY R_HOME_SENSOR 5
CN7
C19 Panduit idc 5 cts D4 C12
100pF SYR M SMBJ33A 47nF (2220 ) p lastique 1
2
JST B2B-PH-K- S
GREEN P V
1A
PINCH_VA LV E_1_NEG
C8
100pF
A GND VAC
1.2mm 1.2mm
1
VACUUM SENSOR
U1
L_V A C_SIGNA L 1
A GND_V A C_SENSOR 2
L_V A C_SENSOR_SUPPLY 3
C17 4
5
6
1
V DD 100nF MPX5100 DP CA SE 8 67C-05 iss ue F

1.2mm
10µF/10V
+
C15 CN1
1 ADIL INSTRUMENTS
2 Title
3 DIA 904 SYRINGE CONNECTION BOARD
4
C26 C25 C23 JST B4B-PH-K- S Size Document Number Rev
100pF 100pF 100pF VAC S A3 DA E 004 E/2 2
Date: Friday, June 0 7, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1


C12 V CC
1.2mm
1
V CC
CN4 10µF/10V
1 D_VA C_ SENSOR_SUPPLY
2 D_VA C_ SIGNAL2
3 D_VA C_ SIGNAL1
R7 R9 C20 C18
4 A GND_V A C_SENSOR NC 2.2K 825R 100pF 100pF
5 VCC
6 BD1
7 BUB_DET_1 Bubble detector 1
1.2mm Grain de caf e CN1
8 BUB_DET_2
1
9 BUB_DET_3 1
1
10 JP3 2 2
11 D_V ACUUM_PUMP_POS 3
12 4
13 D_V ACUUM_PUMP_NEG BUB_DET_1 5
3
100pF R8
HE10 14 cts 1K NC
D_VA C_ SENSOR_SUPPLY
1
GND
1.2mm
V CC
U1
1
2
3 R4 R6 C14 C13
4 NC 2.2K 825R 100pF 100pF
5
A GND V A C1 6 BD2
1.2mm 1.2mm MPX5100DP CASE 867C-0 5 issue F 1.2mm Grain de caf e CN3 Bubble detector 2
1
1
1
JP2 2 2
3
CN2
4
V A CUUM_SIGNA L_1 1 BUB_DET_2 5
3
AGND_VA C_SENSOR 2 C11 JST B5B-PH-K- S
D_VA C_ SENSOR_SUPPLY 3 100pF R5
C15 4 1K NC
D_VA C_ SENSOR_SUPPLY
JST B4B-PH-K- S
C21 C19 C17
100pF 100pF 100pF 100nF
1
1.2mm
VDD
V CC
U2
R1 R3 C10 C9
1 NC 2.2K 825R 100pF 100pF
2
3 BD3
4 1.2mm Grain de caf e CN6 Bubble detector 3
5
1
6 1
1
V A C2 JP1 2 2
MPX5100DP CASE 867C-0 5 issue F
1.2mm 3
4
1
BUB_DET_3 5
3
C8 JST B5B-PH-K- S
100pF R2
CN5 1K NC
V ACUUM_SIGNA L_2 1 D_V AC_ SENSOR_SUPPLY
A GND_V A C_SENSOR 2
D_V A C_ SENSOR_SUPPLY 3
C7 4
JST B4B-PH-K- S
C3 C2 C1 100nF
100pF 100pF 100pF
C6 3 : Changement de valeurs des résistances

100pF Vaccum Pump
CN8 R3,R6,R9 442R -> 825R 1%
D_VA CUUM_PUMP_POS 2A 2 : Changement de valeur des résistances
C5 2A 1
2 R3, R6, R9 390R -> 442R 1%
D1 47nF (2220 ) p lastique
SMBJ33A JST B2B-PH-K- S ADIL instr uments
D_VA CUUM_PUMP_NEG Title
C4 CN7 DIA 904 DEGA SSER CONNECTION BOA RD
100pF
1 Size Document Number Rev
2 A3 DA E 005 E /3 3
Molex 5566 -02
Date: Thur sday, Febr uary 13, 2003 Sheet 1 of 1


R27
E
PSW0
10K VCCAFF
PSW1 VCCAFF VC CAFF
PSW2 R28 B Q2
PSW3 10K BC 857B
NFM41P11C204T1
15 CL2(SHFCLK)
+12LCD R34 D2 D3
F3 B1 PSW4 R21 VC CAFF
+ C11 20K BAT54S BAT54S
FLM(FLM)
E
+12LCD 1
C
C1 10uFCTT16V 10K
CL1(LP)
RXD
TXD
2 100nF R10 R14 GND1
GND GND B2 ANL0 B Q1
GND 3 8K2 1K C39 R22 10K BC857B
D0
D1
D2
15 D3
M
GND 4 NFM40R01C101T1 1 4,7nF NC
GND 680pF
+5LCD 5 +5LCD 2
12
12
DS90C 031TM RXD F4 C17 C21 MOLEX 52043-0410
4
6 3 GND1 GND1 GND1
C
F2 NFM41P11C204T1 + C12
C
U2 VC C R11 R15 B7
7 C2 10uFCTT16V 4
TXD ANL1 R23 GND1 TC1
GND 8 5 1
EN
EN
8K2 1K
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DO4+ EN1
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DO4+ EN1
D3 100nF NC B Q4 TC2
9 C3 C4 NFM40R01C101T1 F5 6 10K 2
D2 680pF 4,7nF C37 BC 847B TC3
10 7 C22 R24 3
D1 GND C18 VC CAFF TC4
DO1+
DO2+
DO3+
DO1+
DO2+
DO3+
100nF 100nF
DO1-
DO2-
DO3-
DO4-
DO1-
DO2-
DO3-
DO4-
11 8 GND1 GND1 10K GND1 4
E
D0 R12 R16 GND1
E
12 GND 9 10K R29
U1 GND ANL2 VC CAFF VC CAFF
13 10 8K2 1K R30 Q3
DS90C 031TM B
14 NFM41P11C204T1 4,7nF C40 10K BC857B
VCCPC HE10-10C 680pF
15
2
3
6
5
10
11
14
13
2
3
6
5
10
11
14
13
F6 C19 C23 NC D4
16 GND1 GND1 BAT54S
C
B5 R13 R17
17
C
+ C13 ANL3 R25
18 C5 10uFCTT16V 1 8K2 1K NC Q5 D1
B
19 100nF 2 4,7nF C38 10K BC 847B BAT54S
680pF
20 JST B 2B-PH-SM3-TB C24 GND1 R26
C20
21 GND1 GND1 10K GND1
GND B005
E
22
23 1
GND1 GND1 B007
RX
EEPCK
TX
EEPSO
EEPCS
24 2 GND1
EEPSI
TC1
25 NC JP3 JP4 1
TC2
26 R31 NC NC 2
TC3
27 VC CAFF R32 10K 3
VC CAFF VC CAFF TC4
28 10K GND1 4
29
NC
30
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
31 VC CAFF
U11
32
8
33
UC KI
UC KO
RXD
EROMSO
PnPCEL
VC C
EROMSI
EROMCS
V SS
OS0
OS1
TXD
EROMCK
NC
NC
NC
VC C U12
34
CL2(SHFCLK) +12LCD U5
35 +5LCD
VC C
FLM(FLM) NC 1 48 EEPCS 1
36 NC NC CS
M 2 47 EEPCK 2
NC U4 37 GND VC CAFF S/P NC SK
CL1(LP) U6 ANL0 3 46 EEPSO 3
38 NC VC CPC EMSR0 NC DI
U3 ANL1 4 45 EEPSI 4
GND
NC GND 39 EMSR1 NC DO
ANL2 5 44
40 EMSR2 NC
GND ANL3 6 43
41 B3 EMSR3 NC
7 42 PSW0 NC
42 NC PSW0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
70246-2621 8 41
43 NC NC
5
9 40
44 NC NC GND1
10 39
45 NC NC
11 38
46 VC CAFF AVCC NC VC CAFF
12 37
47 AVREF NC
C25 GND1 13 36
2
B4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
48 GND1 AVSS NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
70247-2601 14 35 U13
49 VC CAFF GND1 VC CAFF CSEL NC
VCCAFF 15 34
50 PINT NC
16
VC C
100nF RX 16 33 EEPCS 3
RXINT NC CS
HARWIN M22-6122522 VCCAFF EEPCK 4
PnPINT1
PnPINT0
R1 SK
MOD0
MOD1
VC CAFF 18 EEPSO 5
PSW4
PSW3
PSW2
PSW1
ON-OFF DI
14
GND
RST
VSS
0 EEPSI 6
NC
NC
NC
NC
X0
X1
GND
VC CAFF DO
U18A U18B U18C GND1 9 10 RX
D7 +12LCD1 R2IN R2OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 14 13 CTS MB89635R1120
BAS21LT1 GND1 R1IN R1OUT
74HC 14 74HC 14 74HC 14 S29390FAJ
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
C41 GND1 8 11 TX
U18D T2OUT T2IN
7
2.2uF 9 8 15 12
T1OUT T1IN GND1
7
PSW4
PSW3
PSW2
PSW1
GND1 74HC 14 GND1
GND1 GND1 6 C31 GND1 GND1
CTS
RES
C2- 100nF X1
C29 7
R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 GND1 100nF -9VOUT
5 8MHz 4HSMX VC CAFF VCCAFF
L2 C2+
4
C1-
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
VCCAFF C28 NC VEEAFF C30 3 C34 22uFCTT35V 22uFCTT35V
VC CAFF +9VOUT
VC C
100nF 2 C32 C33 22pF 22pF C35 + C36 +
C1+ C7 C15
L1 D6 100nF
NC 100nF 100nF
LQH3C100K34 220nF STPS340U
JP6
U15 GND1 GND1
SP310ECT INV2
5
17
D5 R36 3 GND1 GND1
STPS340U VC CAFF IN+
330K 1% 1
ON/OFF
VIN
VSW
2
GND
4 3
SHDN FB NC
U7
GND
GND
C27 VCCAFF NC INV1 B9
10
14
15
10
14
15
+ C26 22uFCTT35V U8 1 F10 2 1 3
2
1
6
7
2
1
6
7
R35 +12LCD1 NC 12 IN+ RTHV 4

U14 DS90C 032TM DS90C 032TM
+
22uFCTT35V 3
LT1617ES5 20K 1% U9 U10 NFM41P11C204T1 2 4
GND HV 2
RI1-
RI2-
RI3-
RI4-
RI1-
RI2-
RI3-
RI4-
2
3
RI1+
RI2+
RI3+
RI4+
RI1+
RI2+
RI3+
RI4+
VC CAFF VCCAFF 1 GND1

GND GND1 1
16 8 16 8 RES 2 NC
VC C GND VC C GND RESET
3 CAV4C
VC C VC CAFF
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
+ C16
EN1
EN1
GND1 GND1 GND1 U16 INV3

EN
EN
C10
B8 GND1 MAX809_EUR T 1 5
IN+ RTHV
1 R19 VC CAFF RES VC CAFF 100nF 10uFCTT16V OUT1
3
2 4
2 82K VCCAFF GND OUT2
3
11
13
4
12
11
13
4
12
JP1 FLM(FLM)A R20

3 R33
D
1K INVTDKCXAL10L
1
NC 4 10K
GND GND GND1 CL1(LP)A GND1 U17
1
U18E
GND
JP2 JST B 4B-PH-SM3-TB VOAFF
11 10 D3A CL2(SHFCLK)A CLR R37 VC CAFF
1 F11
VC C
NC D8 74HC 14 D2A RX 2 7 ICSPData BKLGT G Q6 2 B6
BAS21LT1 GP5 GP0 100 IRLR014 12
GND1 GND1 2 D1A TX 3 6 ICSPCLK NC
GP4 GP1 1
DISPOFF
CI26 NC VEEAFF CLR 4 5 BKLGT R38 + C14

R39 C6
GND
GND
GP3 GP2 2
3
PCB NC GND1 GND1
CI14 NC CI18 NC CI22 NC VC CAFF
P1 330K VOAFF NC NC
VC CAFF 1 2 NC
PCB PCB PCB NC
GND1
C42 13
U18F
12 D0A
GND1 PROG VC CAFF NC 12
F13 NC
CI15 NC CI19 NC CI23 NC 74HC 14 JP5 GND1
+
3
3
PCB PCB PCB R18 10uFCTT16V ICSPCLK GND1 GND1
3K9 5 C8 C9
CI16 NC CI20 NC CI24 NC ICSPData
CI1 NC CI3 NC CI5 NC CI7 NC 4
PCB PCB PCB 100nF 100nF GND1
3 GND1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
CI17 NC CI21 NC CI25 NC PCB PCB PCB PCB

CI2 NC CI4 NC CI6 NC CI8 NC 2 VC CAFF Title
PCB PCB PCB CLR GND1 LCD INTERNA L BOA RD an d LCD INTERFA CE BOA RD
MOLEX 52044-1445 1
VEEAFF PCB PCB PCB PCB
B10 NC Size Document Number Rev
A3 DA E012E/2 + DA E013E/2 2
Date: Thur sday, March 13, 2003 Sheet 1 of 1


A13 A12
OUT1A_SYR SPI_IN PE0MC PE0MC C169
1 1 GND
SPI_OUT 100pF
2 GND 2
SENSE1_SYR SPI_CLK RES RES C178
3 3
SPI_OUT 100pF
4 4
OUT2A_SYR Micro MC Commande Moteurs Commande solenoides SPI_OUT C170
5 GND 5
DIA904-3.Sch DIA904-1.Sch DIA904-2.Sch SPI_IN NC
6 6
SENSE2_SYR CSCANHP OUT1A_X LIQUID PUMP LIQUID PUMP+ SPI_IN C179
7 CSCANHP OUT1A_X LIQUID PUMP LIQUID PUMP+ GND 7
SENSE1_X PINCH VALVE1 LIQUID PUMP- SPI_CLK NC
8 SENSE1_X PINCH VALVE1 LIQUID PUMP- 8
SPI_IN
SPI_CLK
SPI_CLK
SYRINGE_VALVE+ IO1CPLD OUT2A_X PINCH VALVE2 CS0 SPI_CLK C188
SPI_OUT
SPI_OUT
9 IO1CPLD PH_1_X PH_1_X OUT2A_X PINCH VALVE2 9
MC D3 adr: 285 SYRINGE_VALVE- FAN_S SENSE2_X D_VACUUM_PUMP PINCH VALVE1+ CS1 NC
10 FAN_S PH_2_X PH_2_X SENSE2_X D_VACUUM_PUMP PINCH VALVE1+ 10
LIQUID PUMP+ SYRINGE_VALVE PINCH VALVE1- CS2 CS0 C187
11 DISABLE_X DISABLE_X SYRINGE_VALVE PINCH VALVE1- 11
MC PT3 LIQUID PUMP- BARCODE RXD VREF_X RESERVE_VALVE CS3 100pF
12 BARCODE RXD I0_1_X I0_1_X VREF_X RESERVE_VALVE 12
PINCH VALVE1+ BARCODE TXD PINCH VALVE3 PINCH VALVE2+ DSYNC CS1 C195
13 BARCODE TXD I1_1_X I1_1_X PINCH VALVE3 PINCH VALVE2+ 13
MC D0 adr: 285 PINCH VALVE1- TXDTCRS SOL PINCH VALVE2- CS5 100pF
14 TXDTCRS I2_1_X I2_1_X SOL PINCH VALVE2- 14
PINCH VALVE2+ RXD MOT1 CS2 C206
15 RXD I3_1_X I3_1_X MOT1 VCC 15
MC D1 adr: 285 PINCH VALVE2- TXD0_HP MOT2 D_VACUUM_PUMP+ 100pF
16 TXD0_HP I0_2_X I0_2_X MOT2 D_VACUUM_PUMP+ GND 16
PINCH VALVE3+ RTS_HP LP MIXING VALVE1 D_VACUUM_PUMP- CS3 C207
17 RTS_HP I1_2_X I1_2_X LP MIXING VALVE1 D_VACUUM_PUMP-
MC D5 adr: 285 PINCH VALVE3- TXD_TC LP MIXING VALVE2 HE10-16 100pF
18 TXD_TC I2_2_X I2_2_X LP MIXING VALVE2
RTS_TC HP PUMP SYRINGE_VALVE+ A15 DSYNC C212
19 VCC RTS_TC I3_2_X I3_2_X HP PUMP SYRINGE_VALVE+
FAN SYRINGE_VALVE- SOL+ 100pF
20 GND CSPOT_X CSPOT_X FAN SYRINGE_VALVE- 1
MC PD3 SYR_HOME_SENSOR R+ HEATER1 CS5 C210
21 R+ HEATER1 2
R- OUT1A_Z HEATER2 RESERVE_VALVE+ SOL- MC D6 adr: 285 100pF
22 GND R- OUT1A_Z HEATER2 RESERVE_VALVE+ 3
LV PT1 T+ SENSE1_Z RESERVE_VALVE-
23 VDDA T+ PH_1_Z PH_1_Z SENSE1_Z RESERVE_VALVE- 4
CAV1 T- OUT2A_Z LIQUID PUMP_S MOT+ MC D1 adr: 286 -> 0:+ ,1:-
24 GNDA T- PH_2_Z PH_2_Z OUT2A_Z LIQUID PUMP_S 5
MC PAD3 WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL SENSE2_Z PINCH VALVE1_S PINCH VALVE3+ MOT- MC D2 adr: 286 -> 0:OFF ,1:ON
25 DISABLE_Z DISABLE_Z SENSE2_Z PINCH VALVE1_S PINCH VALVE3+ 6
CSHPPC PINCH VALVE2_S PINCH VALVE3- OUT1A_X
26 GND CSHPPC I0_1_Z I0_1_Z PINCH VALVE2_S PINCH VALVE3- 7
CSTC D_VACUUM_PUMP_S
CSTC I1_1_Z I1_1_Z D_VACUUM_PUMP_S 8
HE10-26 CSRACK SYRINGE_VALVE_S SOL+ SENSE1_X
CSRACK I2_1_Z I2_1_Z SYRINGE_VALVE_S SOL+ 9
A10 CS0 RESERVE_VALVE_S SOL-
CS0 I3_1_Z I3_1_Z RESERVE_VALVE_S SOL- 10
HP PUMP+ CS1 PINCH VALVE3_S OUT2A_X
1 CS1 I0_2_Z I0_2_Z PINCH VALVE3_S 11
CS2 SOL_S MOT+
2 CS2 I1_2_Z I1_2_Z SOL_S MOT+ 12
CS3 MOT_S MOT- SENSE2_X
3 CS3 I2_2_Z I2_2_Z MOT_S MOT- 13
HPPC PT3 DSYNC LP MIXING VALVE_S
4 DSYNC I3_2_Z I3_2_Z LP MIXING VALVE_S 14
HP PUMP- CS5 HP PUMP_S LP MIXING VALVE+ OUT1A_Z
5 CS5 HP PUMP_S LP MIXING VALVE+ 15
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR OUT1A_TH FAN_S LP MIXING VALVE-
6 DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR OUT1A_TH FAN_S LP MIXING VALVE- 16
PE0MC SENSE1_TH HEATER_S SENSE1_Z
7 PE0MC PH_1_TH PH_1_TH SENSE1_TH HEATER_S 17
PE1MC OUT2A_TH HP PUMP+
8 PE1MC PH_2_TH PH_2_TH OUT2A_TH HP PUMP+ 18
HPPC PD0 (12v) LP MIXING VALVE+ PE3MC SENSE2_TH HP PUMP- OUT2A_Z
9 PE3MC DISABLE_TH DISABLE_TH SENSE2_TH HP PUMP- 19
HPPC PD1 (26v) LP MIXING VALVE- XTAL_MC
10 XTAL_MC I0_1_TH I0_1_TH 20
OUT1A_HPV RES SOLB1+ SENSE2_Z
11 RES I1_1_TH I1_1_TH SOLB1+ 21
VREF_X SOLB-
12 VREF_X I2_1_TH I2_1_TH SOLB- 22
SENSE1_HPV VAC_SIGNAL OUT1A_TH
13 VAC_SIGNAL I3_1_TH I3_1_TH 23
AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG HEATER+
14 AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG I0_2_TH I0_2_TH HEATER+ 24
OUT2A_HPV WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL HEATER- SENSE1_TH
15 WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL I1_2_TH I1_2_TH HEATER- 25
VREF_SYR
16 VREF_SYR I2_2_TH I2_2_TH 26
SENSE2_HPV LIQUID PUMP_S OUT2A_TH
17 LIQUID PUMP_S I3_2_TH I3_2_TH 27
PINCH VALVE1_S
18 PINCH VALVE1_S 28
HEATER+ PINCH VALVE2_S OUT1A_HPV SENSE2_TH
19 PINCH VALVE2_S OUT1A_HPV 29
TC RC1 D_VACUUM_PUMP_S SENSE1_HPV SPI_IN C236
20 D_VACUUM_PUMP_S PH_1_HPV PH_1_HPV SENSE1_HPV 30 GND
TC RC2 HEATER- SYRINGE_VALVE_S OUT2A_HPV 100pF
21 SYRINGE_VALVE_S PH_2_HPV PH_2_HPV OUT2A_HPV VCC 31
RESERVE_VALVE_S SENSE2_HPV Micro HPPC SPI_OUT C237
22 RESERVE_VALVE_S DISABLE_HPV DISABLE_HPV SENSE2_HPV GND 32
SOLB1+ PINCH VALVE3_S DIA904-4.Sch X_POS_SENSOR MC PD0 100pF
23 PINCH VALVE3_S I0_1_HPV I0_1_HPV 33
MC D4 adr: 285 SOLB- SOL_S X_HOME_SENSOR MC PD1 SPI_CLK C239
24 SOL_S I1_1_HPV I1_1_HPV 34
MOT_S CSHPPC HP PUMP DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR MC PE7 100pF
MOT_S I2_1_HPV I2_1_HPV CSHPPC HP PUMP 35
HE10-24 SPI_CLK Z_POS_SENSOR MC PD4 CSRACK C240
I3_1_HPV I3_1_HPV SPI_CLK 36
A9 HP_SENSOR SPI_IN LP MIXING VALVE1 Z_HOME_SENSOR MC PD5 100pF
HP_SENSOR I0_2_HPV I0_2_HPV SPI_IN LP MIXING VALVE1 37
LIQUID PUMP SPI_OUT LP MIXING VALVE2 TXDTCRS C241
1 VCC LIQUID PUMP I1_2_HPV I1_2_HPV SPI_OUT LP MIXING VALVE2 GND 38
PINCH VALVE1 TH_POS_SENSOR MC PAD4 100pF
2 GND PINCH VALVE1 I2_2_HPV I2_2_HPV 39
MC PT0 CAM FLAG IN PINCH VALVE2 XTAL_MC TH_HOME_SENSOR MC PAD5 PE1MC C242
3 PINCH VALVE2 I3_2_HPV I3_2_HPV XTAL_MC 40
D_VACUUM_PUMP RES TH_HIGHT_SENSOR MC PAD6 100pF
4 GND D_VACUUM_PUMP RES 41
TACHY A IN SYRINGE_VALVE OUT1A_SYR RXD ADAPTOR_SENSOR MC PD6 IO1CPLD C243
5 SYRINGE_VALVE OUT1A_SYR RXD 42
RESERVE_VALVE SENSE1_SYR TXD0_HP 100pF
6 GND RESERVE_VALVE PH_1_SYR PH_1_SYR SENSE1_SYR TXD0_HP NFM40R100pF GND 43 F1
TACHY B IN PINCH VALVE3 OUT2A_SYR PE3MC RTS_HP BARCODE RXD IO2CPLD C244
7 PINCH VALVE3 PH_2_SYR PH_2_SYR OUT2A_SYR PE3MC RTS_HP 44 F2
SOL SENSE2_SYR BARCODE TXD NFM40R100pF 100pF
8 GND SOL DISABLE_SYR DISABLE_SYR SENSE2_SYR 45
MC PT4 SENSOR IN 0 MOT1 IO3CPLD C245
9 MOT1 I0_1_SYR I0_1_SYR GND 46
MC PT5 SENSOR IN 1 MOT2 VREF_SYR HP_SENSOR RACK_POS_SENSOR MC PD2 100pF
10 MOT2 I1_1_SYR I1_1_SYR VREF_SYR HP_SENSOR 47
MC PT6 SENSOR IN 2 X_POS_SENSOR LP MIXING VALVE_S RACK_IN_SENSOR MC PD7
11 X_POS_SENSOR I2_1_SYR I2_1_SYR LP MIXING VALVE_S 48
MC PT7 FR D LOCK SENSOR X_HOME_SENSOR HP PUMP_S RACK_OUT_SENSOR MC PAD7
12 X_HOME_SENSOR I3_1_SYR I3_1_SYR HP PUMP_S 49
RACK_POS_SENSOR
13 GND RACK_POS_SENSOR I0_2_SYR I0_2_SYR 50
SYR_HOME_SENSOR CAM FLAG
14 VRef SYR_HOME_SENSOR I1_2_SYR I1_2_SYR CAM FLAG C233 C234 C235 C238
Z_POS_SENSOR TACHY A GND HE10-50
15 GND Z_POS_SENSOR I2_2_SYR I2_2_SYR TACHY A 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF
HP_SENSOR+ Z_HOME_SENSOR TACHY B A14
16 Z_HOME_SENSOR I3_2_SYR I3_2_SYR TACHY B
ADAPTOR_SENSOR R+
17 GND ADAPTOR_SENSOR CSPOT_SYR CSPOT_SYR 1
HP_SENSOR- RACK_IN_SENSOR R-
18 RACK_IN_SENSOR 2
TH_POS_SENSOR T+
19 GND TH_POS_SENSOR U1A 3 CI7 CI11
TH_HOME_SENSOR C265 Micro TC T-
20 GNDA TH_HOME_SENSOR 4
TH_HIGHT_SENSOR 1 2 CAM FLAG DIA904-5.Sch SPI_IN D I V E RS D I V E RS
21 GND TH_HIGHT_SENSOR 5
PT100HEAT1 RACK_OUT_SENSOR 74HC14SO R66 NC NC
22 RACK_OUT_SENSOR GND 6
SENSOR 0 10nF CAM FLAG IN CSTC HEATER1 SPI_OUT
23 GND SENSOR 0 U1F 10K CSTC HEATER1 7 CI8 CI10
PT100HEAT2 SENSOR 1 SPI_IN HEATER2
24 SENSOR 1 SPI_IN HEATER2 GND 8
SENSOR 2 13 12 TACHY A SPI_OUT FAN SPI_CLK D I V E RS D I V E RS
25 GND SENSOR 2 SPI_OUT FAN 9
FR D LOCK SENSOR 74HC14SO SPI_CLK NC NC
26 2V5 FR D LOCK SENSOR SPI_CLK GND 10
IO2CPLD TACHY A IN CSRACK
27 GND IO2CPLD U1B 11 CI6 CI12
PT100EXT1 IO3CPLD RXD PT100HEAT1 TXDTCRS
28 IO3CPLD RXD PT100HEAT1 12
GEN FAN_S 3 4 TACHY B TXD_TC PT100HEAT2 PE1MC MC PE1 D I V E RS D I V E RS
29 GND GEN FAN_S TXD_TC PT100HEAT2 13
PT100EXT2 BUB1 74HC14SO RTS_TC NC NC
30 BUB1 RTS_TC GND 14
BUB2 TACHY B IN PT100EXT1 IO1CPLD
31 GND BUB2 U1E PT100EXT1 15 CI9 CI13
BUB3 C266 XTAL_MC PT100EXT2
32 2V5 BUB3 XTAL_MC PT100EXT2 GND 16
CSPBUB1 11 10 SENSOR 0 RES IO2CPLD D I V E RS D I V E RS
33 GND CSPBUB1 RES 17
CSPBUB2 74HC14SO R165 NC NC
34 VCC CSPBUB2 GND 18
VCC +12 +24 +26 CSPBUB3 10nF SENSOR IN 0 FAN_S IO3CPLD
PT7 PT8 PT9 PT10 CSPBUB3 U1C 10K FAN_S 19 CI15 CI16
HE10-34 BUB_DET_1 C267 HEATER_S
BUB_DET_1 HEATER_S GND 20
NC 5V NC +12V NC 24V NC 26V A1 BUB_DET_2 5 6 SENSOR 1 D I V E RS D I V E RS
BUB_DET_2
+ + + + BUB_DET_3 74HC14SO R166 HE10-20 NC NC
1 GND BUB_DET_3
10nF SENSOR IN 1 13K pour INA122UA A16
2 U1D 10K 4K75 1% CI2 CI18
C268 GEN FAN- R-
3 1
9 8 SENSOR 2 R7 R9 D I V E RS D I V E RS
4 2
GND GND GND GND X_POS_SENSOR C262 74HC14SO R167 C1 T+ NC NC
C11 C10 C8 C9 5 GND GND 1 GND 3 CI3 CI17
100pF GND10nF SENSOR IN 2 100pF U4
ECEV1VA101UP ECEV1VA101UP 6 10K 4
8 1 R+ D I V E RS D I V E RS
ECEV1VA101UP ECEV1VA101UP 7 RG+ RG- 5
X_HOME_SENSOR C263 C232 WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL 7 2 HP_SENSOR- NC NC
8 GND GND VDDA VCC IN- 6
100pF C2 100pF 6 3 HP_SENSOR+ T-
9 +24 OUT IN+ 7 CI1 CI19
5 4
10 VCC GND 2V5 REF VEE 8
RACK_POS_SENSOR C92 C88 DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR D I V E RS D I V E RS
DE1 11 +26 GND GND GND 9
R1 100pF 100nF 100pF MAX4194ESA GNDA NC NC
12 -12 10
HP
GND 470 VCC 13 +12 CI20 CI4
SYR_HOME_SENSOR C230 C95 CAM FLAG IN PT2 C18 HE10-10
14 GND GND
CL150UR3000 100pF 100pF R12 CAV1 GND GNDA A6 D I V E RS D I V E RS
15 VDDA GNDA
16 VCC PT3 PT4 GND 1 NC NC
DE4 Z_POS_SENSOR C264 C98 TACHY A IN 12K1 1% 100nF
R3 GND GND CAV1 CAV1 2
MOLEX 39-28-1163 100pF 100pF CI21 CI14
GND 2K7 +24 GNDA 3
D I V E RS D I V E RS
+24 4
11
CL150UR3000 Z_HOME_SENSOR C86 C99 TACHY B IN 10K GND GNDA
GND GND R10 R11 +12 5 NC NC
100pF 100pF C12
DE5 100nF VCC 6
R4 A2 2 GND
2V5 10K 1% GNDA C61
ADAPTOR_SENSOR C89 C108 HP_SENSOR+ R15 1 HP_SENSOR MOLEX 39-28-1063
GND 3K3 +26 1 GND GND GND 10K 100pF
100pF 100pF 3 R14
2 10K 1% U5A
CL150UR3000 R20 R51 A18
3 C17
RACK_IN_SENSOR C93 C110 HP_SENSOR- TLV2374ID VCC
DE2 4 GND GND 2V5 1M 100nF VCC 150 1
R2 100pF Détecteurs de bulles 100pF C19 A17
5 +12 GND 2
4
DIA904-6.Sch R19 RESERVE_VALVE+
GND 1K2 +12 6 20K 1% GNDA VRef 1 R46 C59VCC 3
TH_POS_SENSOR C90 BUB_DET1 GNDA RESERVE_VALVE-
7 GND BUB_DET1 2 2K2 100pF GND 4
CL150UR3000 100pF BUB_DET2 VDDA 100nF V1 V2
8 VCC BUB_DET2 5
PT11 BUB_DET3 U6 PT5 PT6 NC
DE3 BUB_DET3 GND C54
R5 NC MOLEX 39-28-1083 TH_HOME_SENSOR C87 BUB1 CAV1 CAV1 A11 FR D LOCK SENSOR NC
GND BUB1 100pF
A3 A4 100pF BUB2 GNDA
GND NC -12 BUB2 VDDA 1
BUB3 CSCANHP 1 2 VAC_SIGNAL
1 GND 1 GND BUB3 CS CH0 2
NC -12V TH_HIGHT_SENSOR C91 SPI_CLK 7 3 AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG C146
2 2 GND CLK CH1 2V5 3 GND
100pF CSPBUB1 100pF
3 +12 3 +12 CSPBUB1 GNDA 4
CSPBUB2 SPI_IN 6 8 VAC_SIGNAL C147 GND
4 VCC 4 VCC CSPBUB2 DOUT VCC Vref VCC 5
RACK_OUT_SENSOR C94 CSPBUB3 SPI_OUT 5 4 100pF
GND CSPBUB3 DIN GND GNDA GND 6
MOLEX 39-28-1043 MOLEX 39-28-1043 100pF BUB_DET1 BUB_DET1 C155
7
A5 SPI_CLK BUB_DET2 100pF
SPI_CLK 8
SENSOR IN 0 C101 SPI_OUT BUB_DET3 BUB_DET2 C156
1 GND GND SPI_OUT GND 9
100pF LTC1288CS8 100pF
2 27K GND 10
BUB_DET_1 R45 D_VACUUM_PUMP+ BUB_DET3 C158
3 +12 BUB_DET_1 11
SENSOR IN 1 C102 BUB_DET_2 100pF
4 +24 GND BUB_DET_2 GND 12
CI5 100pF BUB_DET_3 D_VACUUM_PUMP-
5 BUB_DET_3 U21C 13
NC R39
6 VCC GND 14
SENSOR IN 2 C106 9 C52
+24 GND 100pF 1K GNDA
MOLEX 39-28-1063 100pF A9a GEN FAN_S 8 HE10-14
10 R6
1 VRef
A7 A8 FR D LOCK SENSOR C107 HP_SENSOR+ GEN FAN-
GND 2 1K
100pF HP_SENSOR- TLV2374ID
1 -12 1 +12 3 C3
GEN FAN- +
2 +12 2 4 GNDA 1uFCTT16V Title
3 GND PT15 5 GND INTERFA CE BOA RD
JST B2B-PH-SM3-TB NC GNDA
NC NC
A3 DA E 010 E/3 3


C208
GND VCC
100nF
8
R147
10 21 PU1 SENSE2_X
VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_X
VCC
C196
10nF C253
11 20 100pF
VCP2 SENSE2 GND
C197 12 C251
GND VBOOT 100pF
100nF 14 OUT2A_X
OUT2A OUT2A_X
C111
GND VCC
C209 7 35 SENSE1_X 100nF
GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_X
1nF
8
C252
R85
2 34 PU2 100pF 10 21 PU7 SENSE2_HPV
PH_1_X PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_HPV
VCC
4 C26
I0_1_X I0_1 R134
3 C249 10nF C154
I1_1_X I1_1 100pF 100pF
32 5 OUT1A_X 11 20
I2_1_X I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_X VCP2 SENSE2 GND
33
I3_1_X I3_1 C151
17 13 C114 12
PH_2_X PH_2 VS GND VBOOT 100pF
15 31 100nF 14 OUT2A_HPV
I0_2_X I0_2 VS +24 OUT2A OUT2A_HPV
16 VCCR62
I1_2_X I1_2
23 28
I2_2_X I2_2 VREF1 NC
22 26 VREF_X C23 7 35 SENSE1_HPV
I3_2_X I3_2 VREF2 VREF_X GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_HPV
6 1nF
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
DISABLE_X DISABLE R63
R59 C144
EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C171 NC 2 34 PU8 100pF
R157 100nF 51K PH_1_HPV PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND
U43 4 R78
2K2 I0_1_HPV I0_1 C145
L6258 U37 3
I1_1_HPV I1_1 100pF
GND 1 8 32 5 OUT1A_HPV
C67 L H I2_1_HPV I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_HPV
7 GND 33
VCC W I3_1_HPV I3_1 VCC
29
30
25
24
10nF GND 3 6 17 13
CS VDD VCC PH_2_HPV PH_2 VS R23
4 5 15 31
DIN SCLK I0_2_HPV I0_2 VS +24 12K
16
C70 I1_2_HPV I1_2
MAX5400EKA-T 23 28
R145 R146 100nF I2_2_HPV I2_2 VREF1
22 26
330K 330K I3_2_HPV I3_2 VREF2
6
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
C189 C190 DISABLE_HPV DISABLE R24
GND
EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C22 10K
R17 U13 100nF
470pF 470pF 2K2 L6258
GND
CSPOT_X C29 GND
SPI_OUT VCC
29
30
25
24
10nF
SPI_CLK
C199
GND VCC
100nF
R79 R81
8
330K 330K
R150
10 21 PU3 SENSE2_Z C109 C112
VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_Z
VCC
C200
10nF C257
11 20 100pF 470pF 470pF
VCP2 SENSE2 GND
C201 12 C255
GND VBOOT 100pF
100nF 14 OUT2A_Z
OUT2A OUT2A_Z
C198 7 35 SENSE1_Z
GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_Z
1nF
C256
2 34 PU4 100pF
PH_1_Z PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND
4 R135
I0_1_Z I0_1 C254
3
I1_1_Z I1_1 100pF
32 5 OUT1A_Z
I2_1_Z I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_Z
33
I3_1_Z I3_1 VCC
17 13 C182
PH_2_Z PH_2 VS R64 GND VCC
15 31 100nF
I0_2_Z I0_2 VS +24 12K
16
8
I1_2_Z I1_2
23 28 R123
I2_2_Z I2_2 VREF1
22 26 10 21 PU9 SENSE2_SYR
I3_2_Z I3_2 VREF2 VCP1 OUT2B 1.2 SENSE2_SYR
VCC
6 C184
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
DISABLE_Z DISABLE R60 10nF C220
EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C177 10K 11 20 100pF

R155 100nF VCP2 SENSE2 GND
U44
2K2 L6258 C185 12 C218
GND VBOOT 100pF
GND 100nF 14 OUT2A_SYR
C68 OUT2A OUT2A_SYR
GND
VCC
29
30
25
24
10nF
C183 7 35 SENSE1_SYR
GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_SYR
1nF
C219
R148 R149 2 34 PU10 100pF
330K 330K PH_1_SYR PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND
4 R122
C191 C192 I0_1_SYR I0_1 C217
3
I1_1_SYR I1_1 100pF
32 5 OUT1A_SYR
I2_1_SYR I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_SYR
33
470pF 470pF I3_1_SYR I3_1
17 13
PH_2_SYR PH_2 VS
15 31
I0_2_SYR I0_2 VS +24
16 VCCR55
I1_2_SYR I1_2
23 28
I2_2_SYR I2_2 VREF1 NC
22 26 VREF_SYR
I3_2_SYR I3_2 VREF2 VREF_SYR
C203 6
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
GND VCC DISABLE_SYR DISABLE R58
100nF R56
EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C168 NC
8
R136 U40 100nF 51K

R154
10 21 PU5 SENSE2_TH 2K2 L6258 U31
VCP1 OUT2B SENSE2_TH
VCC
C204 1.2 GND 1 8

10nF C261 C63 L H
7 GND
VCC W
29
30
25
24
11 20 100pF 10nF GND 3 6
VCP2 SENSE2 GND CS VDD VCC
4 5
C259 DIN SCLK
C205 12
GND VBOOT 100pF C66
100nF 14 OUT2A_TH MAX5400EKA-T
OUT2A OUT2A_TH R124 R125 100nF
330K 330K
C202 7 35 SENSE1_TH C173 C174 GND
GND TRI_CAP SENSE1 SENSE1_TH
1nF
C260
2 34 PU6 100pF 470pF 470pF
PH_1_TH PH_1 OUT1B 1.2 GND
4 R151
I0_1_TH I0_1 C258 CSPOT_SYR
3
I1_1_TH I1_1 100pF
32 5 OUT1A_TH
I2_1_TH I2_1 OUT1A OUT1A_TH
33
I3_1_TH I3_1 VCC
17 13
PH_2_TH PH_2 VS R65
15 31
I0_2_TH I0_2 VS +24 12K
16
I1_2_TH I1_2
23 28
I2_2_TH I2_2 VREF1
22 26
I3_2_TH I3_2 VREF2
6
EA_OUT1
EA_OUT2
DISABLE_TH DISABLE R61

EA_IN1
EA_IN2
C172 10K
R156 U45 100nF
2K2 L6258
GND
C69 GND
VCC
29
30
25
24
10nF
R152 R153
330K 330K
C193 C194
470pF 470pF
Title
INTERFA CE BOA RD

A3 DA E 010 E/3 3


C181
VDDA
27K GND +26
R129 NC
100nF D15 C223
0
C74 C44 GND GND
U42 100pF
U38D 100nF 100nF PINCH VALVE3 10 1 PINCH VALVE3+ LIQUID PUMP+
R128 PINCH VALVE3 IN1 OUT1 LIQUID PUMP+
VCC
13 C175 9 2 LIQUID PUMP-
100pF 1K GNDA GND IN2 OUT2 LIQUID PUMP-
LIQUID PUMP_S 14 GNDA SOL 8 3 SOL+ R159
LIQUID PUMP_S SOL IN3 OUT3
12 R69 7 4 C224 1 a la place de 0.47
GND IN4 OUT4 GND 1 GND
LIQUID PUMP- 100pF
10K 6
TLV2374ID DIAG NC
+ C79 5 D16 C225
1uFCTT16V GND GND GND GND
100pF
VN330SP PINCH VALVE1+
15K GNDA PINCH VALVE1+
R139 PINCH VALVE1-
PINCH VALVE1-
C180 R160
C226
U38C GND +26 GND 1 GND
R140 100pF
9 C186 100nF
0
1K GNDA NC
PINCH VALVE1_S 8 100pF U41 D17 C227
PINCH VALVE1_S GND GND
10 R70 SYRINGE_VALVE 10 1 SYRINGE_VALVE+ 100pF
SYRINGE_VALVE IN1 OUT1
VCC
PINCH VALVE1- LIQUID PUMP 9 2 LIQUID PUMP+ PINCH VALVE2+
1K LIQUID PUMP IN2 OUT2 PINCH VALVE2+
TLV2374ID PINCH VALVE1 8 3 PINCH VALVE1+ PINCH VALVE2-
C80 PINCH VALVE1 IN3 OUT3 PINCH VALVE2-
+ PINCH VALVE2 7 4 PINCH VALVE2+ R161
1uFCTT16V PINCH VALVE2 IN4 OUT4
C228
GND 1 GND
6 100pF
15K GNDA DIAG
R130 5 NC
GNDA GND GND D4 C163
GND GND
11
VN330SP 100pF
U39A D_VACUUM_PUMP+
R131 D_VACUUM_PUMP+
2 C72 D_VACUUM_PUMP-
100pF 1K GNDA D_VACUUM_PUMP-
PINCH VALVE2_S 1 C128 R121
PINCH VALVE2_S
3 R71 C164 1 a la place de 0.47
GND +26 GND 1 GND
PINCH VALVE2- 100pF
1K 100nF
0
TLV2374ID NC
+ C81 U20 D3 D14 C221
GND GND
4
1uFCTT16V RESERVE_VALVE 10 1 SMBYW02-200 RESERVE_VALVE+ 100pF
VDDA RESERVE_VALVE IN1 OUT1
VCC
LP MIXING VALVE1 9 2 LPM LP MIXING VALVE+ SYRINGE_VALVE+
15K GNDA LP MIXING VALVE1 IN2 OUT2 SYRINGE_VALVE+
R88 8 3 SYRINGE_VALVE-
GNDA IN3 OUT3 SYRINGE_VALVE-
D_VACUUM_PUMP 7 4 D_VACUUM_PUMP+ R158
D_VACUUM_PUMP IN4 OUT4
11
C222
U17A GND 1 GND
R89 6 100pF
DIAG
2 C40 5 SM6T30A
100pF 1K GNDA GND GND D6
D_VACUUM_PUMP_S 1 C141
D_VACUUM_PUMP_S D1 GND GND
3 R52 VN330SP 100pF
D_VACUUM_PUMP- C32 SMBYW02-200 RESERVE_VALVE+
10K RESERVE_VALVE+
TLV2374ID RESERVE_VALVE-
LPMV2+
C53 GND +12 RESERVE_VALVE-
+ R105
4
1uFCTT16V 100nF C142
0
VDDA GND 0.33 GND
U16 100pF
15K GNDA
R126 LP MIXING VALVE2 10 1 NC
GNDA LP MIXING VALVE2 IN1 OUT1
VCC
FAN 9 2 SOLB+ D18 C231
FAN IN2 OUT2 GND GND
11
8 3 100pF
U38A IN3 OUT3
R127 7 4 PINCH VALVE3+
GND IN4 OUT4 PINCH VALVE3+
2 C71 PINCH VALVE3-
100pF 1K GNDA PINCH VALVE3-
SYRINGE_VALVE_S 1 6 R162
SYRINGE_VALVE_S DIAG
3 R68 5 C229
GND GND GND GND 1 GND
SYRINGE_VALVE- 100pF
1K C271 VN330SP
TLV2374ID NC
+ C78 220nF D13 C246
GND GND
4
1uFCTT16V MOT2 100pF
VDDA MOT2
MOT- SOL+
10K GNDA SOL+
R137 U32 SOL-
C270 SOL-
20 1 SMOT R163
U22D 22nF VREF SENSE
19 2 C247
U38B BOOT2 ENABLE GND 0.33 GND
R138 9 8 18 100pF
IN2
6 C75 17 4 R164
100pF 1K GNDA GND GND 1
RESERVE_VALVE_S 7 74HC14SO 16 5 C250
RESERVE_VALVE_S GND GND GND
5 R43 15 6 100pF
GND GND GND GND
RESERVE_VALVE- 14 7 MOT+
1K GND GND MOT+
TLV2374ID MOT1 13
C55 MOT1 IN1
+ 12 9 GND
1uFCTT16V BOOT1 OUT2
11 10 MOT-
C269 OUT1 VS +26 MOT-
15K GNDA 22nF C64
R141 L6201
100nF GND
C248
U39B GND MOT+ 100pF
R142
6 C76
100pF 1K GNDA
PINCH VALVE3_S 7 +12 C49 NC
PINCH VALVE3_S D5
5 R72 C139
GND GND GND
PINCH VALVE3- 100pF
1K R42 100nF LP MIXING VALVE+
TLV2374ID LP MIXING VALVE+
+ C82 1K LP MIXING VALVE-
1uFCTT16V LP MIXING VALVE-
S
R101
G C140
10K GNDA Q2 GND 1 GND
R143 100pF
R41 IRFR9014
220
U39C HP PUMP+
R144
D
9 C77 NC
100pF 1K GNDA D2
C
SOL_S 8 C136
SOL_S GND GND
10 R67 R36 100pF
SOL- HP PUMP B HP PUMP+
1K HP PUMP 1K Q1 HP PUMP+
TLV2374ID HP PUMP-
C83 R37 BC847B HP PUMP-
+ R103
1uFCTT16V 10K C138
GND GND
E
0.01 100pF
GNDA
27K
R132 NC
GND D12 C161
GND GND
100pF
U39D SOLB1+
R133 SOLB1+
13 C73 SOLB1+ SOLB-
100pF 1K GNDA SOLB-
MOT_S 14 R120
MOT_S
12 R73 CI23 C162
GND 0.33 GND
SMOT R91 NC SOLB+ 100pF
10K
TLV2374ID
+ C84 100K
1uFCTT16V CI22
R97
NC RESERVE_VALVE+
15K U17D
GNDA R90 D7 D8
13 C41
100pF 1K GNDA
HEATER_S 14
U17B HEATER_S +12 GND
R98 12 R35
6 C43 PU11 SM6T15A SM6T15A
100pF 1K GNDA 1K
LP MIXING VALVE_S 7 TLV2374ID
LP MIXING VALVE_S C46
5 R95 + C157
1uFCTT16V GND
LP MIXING VALVE- 100pF
1K
TLV2374ID GNDA
+ C37 HEATER+ HEATER+
1uFCTT16V HEATER+
R99 HEATER- HEATER-
HEATER-
100K GNDA
+12 U19 C159
C124 GND
0 20 100pF
GND GND 22nF
1
U17C C122 GND D9
R100 GND
9 C45 100nF GND 4 17
100pF 1K GNDA OUT2 ENABLE +12 GND
HP PUMP_S 8 5 16 C123
HP PUMP_S +12 VS SENSE D11
10 R94 GND 6 15 SM6T15A
OUT1 VREF GND
HP PUMP- 7 14 SM6T15A
10K BOOT1 BOOT2
TLV2374ID 8 13 220nF
C42 IN1 IN2
+
1uFCTT16V C39 10 11 R96
GND GND 0.01
R44 22nF
GNDA
GND L6201PS GND 0.01 a la place de 0.022
10K U22B
3 4
HEATER1
GND
U21D U21B 74HC14SO
R38
13 6 C50
100pF 1K GNDA HEATER2
14 FAN_S 7
FAN_S
12 5 R54
GNDA
SOLB-
1K
TLV2374ID TLV2374ID
+ C65
1uFCTT16V
Title
GNDA INTERFA CE BOA RD

A3 DA E 010 E/3 3


VDDA
LIQUID PUMP
4
U21A LIQUID PUMP
PINCH VALVE1
PINCH VALVE1
3 R102 C131 A16_MC 2 PINCH VALVE2
A16 SU1 PINCH VALVE2
1 MUX XFC_MC XTAL_MC A17_MC 30 12 A0_MC D_VACUUM_PUMP
100 GND GND A17 A0 D_VACUUM_PUMP
2 A18_MC 1 11 A1_MC SU P SYRINGE_VALVE
IO3CPLD
I1_2_TH
I0_2_TH
I3_2_TH
I2_2_TH
I2_1_TH
I3_1_TH
I0_1_TH
I1_1_TH
R31 X2 A18 A1 SYRINGE_VALVE
C132 100nF C34 10 A2_MC NC RESERVE_VALVE
I1_2_Z
I0_2_Z
I3_2_Z
I2_2_Z
I2_1_Z
I3_1_Z
I0_1_Z
CLK_MC
RST_MC
A2 RESERVE_VALVE
10M
22pF 16MHz L108E (IQD) D8_MC 13 9 A3_MC PINCH VALVE3
TXD
TLV2374ID
RTS
GND DQ0 A3 PINCH VALVE3
D9_MC 14 8 A4_MC SOL
DQ1 A4 SOL
11
100nF EXTAL_MC D10_MC 15 7 A5_MC SU23 MOT1
GNDA GND DQ2 A5 MOT1
C35 D11_MC 17 6 A6_MC SU P MOT2
DQ3 A6 MOT2
22pF D12_MC 18 5 A7_MC 822498-1
C47 DQ4 A7
D13_MC 19 27 A8_MC PH_1_X
100
DQ5 A8 PH_1_X
99
98
97
96
94
93
92
90
89
87
85
84
83
81
80
79
78
77
76
100pF D14_MC 20 26 A9_MC I0_1_X
DQ6 A9 I0_1_X
U34 U25 D15_MC 21 23 A10_MC U33 I1_1_X
DQ7 A10 I1_1_X
BUB1 13 3 25 A11_MC I2_1_X
BUB1 X0 X A11 I2_1_X
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
BUB2 14 X_POS_SENSOR 20 52 A0_MC CSROM_MC 22 4 A12_MC I3_1_X
BUB2 X1 DATA0/KWD0/PD0 ADDR0/ PB0 CE A12 I3_1_X
VREF_SYR 15 X_HOME_SENSOR 21 53 A1_MC OE_MC 24 28 A13_MC PH_2_X
VREF_SYR X2 DATA1/KWD1/PD1 ADDR1/ PB1 OE A13 PH_2_X
BUB3 12 RACK_POS_SENSOR 22 54 A2_MC RW_MC 31 29 A14_MC RES 1 75 I0_2_X
BUB3 X3 DATA2/KWD2/PD2 ADDR2/ PB2 WE A14 I/O I/O I0_2_X
SYRINGE_VALVE_S 1 SYR_HOME_SENSOR 23 55 A3_MC U23 3 A15_MC 2 I1_2_X
SYRINGE_VALVE_S X4 DATA3/KWD3/PD3 ADDR3/ PB3 A15 I/O I1_2_X
PINCH VALVE1_S 5 VDDA Z_POS_SENSOR 24 56 A4_MC MBM29F040C-90JC 73 TDO I2_2_X
PINCH VALVE1_S X5 DATA4/KWD4/PD4 ADDR4/ PB4 TDO I2_2_X
RESERVE_VALVE_S 2 16 Z_HOME_SENSOR 25 57 A5_MC TDI 4 72 I1_1_Z I3_2_X
RESERVE_VALVE_S X6 VDD DATA5/KWD5/PD5 PB5/ADDR5 TDI I/O I3_2_X
LIQUID PUMP_S 4 ADAPTOR_SENSOR 26 58 A6_MC D8_MC 11 10 A0_MC D8_MC 5 71 I0_1_X DISABLE_X
LIQUID PUMP_S X7 DATA6/KWD6/PD6 PB6/ADDR6 O0 A0 I/O I/O DISABLE_X
8 RACK_IN_SENSOR 27 59 A7_MC D9_MC 12 9 A1_MC D9_MC 6 70 I3_2_X PH_1_Z
VSS DATA7/KWD7/PD7 PB7/ADDR7 O1 A1 I/O I/O PH_1_Z
6 D10_MC 13 8 A2_MC D10_MC 7 69 I1_1_X I0_1_Z
INH O2 A2 I/O I/O I0_1_Z
VDDA 11 7 D8_MC 28 60 A8_MC D11_MC 15 7 A3_MC D11_MC 8 68 I0_2_X I1_1_Z
A VEE DATA8/PC0 PA0/ADDR8 O3 A3 I/O I/O I1_1_Z
10 D9_MC 29 61 A9_MC D12_MC 16 6 A4_MC D12_MC 9 67 I3_1_X I2_1_Z
B DATA9/ PC1 PA1/ADDR9 O4 A4 I/O I/O I2_1_Z
C166 9 GNDA D10_MC 30 62 A10_MC D13_MC 17 5 A5_MC D13_MC 10 I3_1_Z
C DATA10/ PC2 PA2/ADDR10 O5 A5 I/O I3_1_Z
D11_MC 31 63 A11_MC D14_MC 18 4 A6_MC 65 I2_1_X PH_2_Z
DATA11/ PC3 PA3/ADDR11 O6 A6 I/O PH_2_Z
HEF4051BM1 D12_MC 32 64 A12_MC D15_MC 19 3 A7_MC D14_MC 12 64 I1_2_X I0_2_Z
DATA12/ PC4 PA4/ADDR12 O7 A7 I/O I/O I0_2_Z
100nF IO_A2 D13_MC 33 65 A13_MC 25 A8_MC D15_MC 13 63 I2_2_X I1_2_Z
DATA13/ PC5 PA5/ADDR13 A8 I/O I/O I1_2_Z
C165 IO_A1 D14_MC 34 66 A14_MC U24 24 A9_MC TXD0_MC 14 62 TCK I2_2_Z
DATA14/ PC6 PA6/ADDR14 A9 I/O TCK I2_2_Z
IO_A0 D15_MC 35 67 A15_MC CY62256L-70SNC 21 A10_MC TMS 15 61 I3_1_SYR I3_2_Z
DATA15/ PC7 PA7/ADDR15 A10 TMS I/O I3_2_Z
CS_MUX1 23 A11_MC IO1CPLD 16 60 I2_1_SYR DISABLE_Z
A11 I/O I/O DISABLE_Z
100nF CS_MUX2 BKGD_MC 19 11 A16_MC 2 A12_MC A0_MC 17 PH_1_TH
BKGD / TAGHI ADDR16/PG0 A12 I/O PH_1_TH
C51 12 A17_MC 26 A13_MC 58 I2_2_SYR I0_1_TH
ADDR17/PG1 A13 I/O I0_1_TH
U35 RST_MC 40 13 A18_MC VCC 1 A14_MC A1_MC 19 57 I3_2_SYR I1_1_TH
RST ADDR18/PG2 A14 I/O I/O I1_1_TH
9 VCC 16 28 A2_MC 20 56 I0_2_SYR I2_1_TH
C ADDR19/PG3 C129 VCC I/O I/O I2_1_TH
100nF 10 GNDA XTAL_MC 47 17 CS_MUX1 20 CSRAM_MC RW_MC 21 55 I1_2_SYR I3_1_TH
B XTAL ADDR20/PG4 100nF CS I/O I/O I3_1_TH
11 7 EXTAL_MC 46 18 CS_MUX2 22 OE_MC CSPLD 22 54 I0_1_SYR PH_2_TH
A VEE R104 EXTAL ADDR21/PG5 OE I/O I/O PH_2_TH
GNDA 6 14 27 RW_MC IO2CPLD 23 53 I1_1_SYR I0_2_TH
INH 10K GND GND WE I/O I/O I0_2_TH
8 XFC_MC 44 RTS_HP 24 52 MOT2 I1_2_TH
VSS XFC I/O I/O I1_2_TH
SOL_S 4 87 MUX TXD0_HP 25 I2_2_TH
SOL_S X7 PAD0/ AN0 I/O I2_2_TH
PINCH VALVE3_S 2 16 PE0MC PE0MC 36 88 VAC_SIGNAL I3_2_TH
PINCH VALVE3_S X6 VDD XIRQ /PE0 PAD1/ AN1 I3_2_TH
MOT_S 5 PE1MC 37 89 AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG DISABLE_TH
MOT_S X5 IRQ /VPP/ PE1 PAD2/ AN2 DISABLE_TH
PINCH VALVE2_S 1 VDDA RW_MC 38 90 WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL VCC PH_1_HPV
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
PINCH VALVE2_S X4 R/ W/ PE2 PAD3/ AN3 PH_1_HPV
VREF_X 12 PE3MC 39 91 TH_POS_SENSOR I0_1_HPV
VREF_X X3 LSTRB /TAGLO/ PE3 PAD4/ AN4 I0_1_HPV
D_VACUUM_PUMP_S 15 CLK_MC 48 92 TH_HOME_SENSOR I1_1_HPV
D_VACUUM_PUMP_S X2 ECLK/ PE4 PAD5/ AN5 C167 C153 C150 C160 I1_1_HPV
GEN FAN_S 14 MODA_MC 49 93 TH_HIGHT_SENSOR I2_1_HPV
GEN FAN_S X1 MODA/ IPIPE0/ PE5 PAD6/ AN6 I2_1_HPV
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
40
41
42
44
SYRINGE_VALVE45
RESERVE_VALVE46
PINCH VALVE147
PINCH VALVE248
PINCH VALVE3 49
50
D_VACUUM_PUMP
FAN_S 13 3 MODB_MC 50 94 RACK_OUT_SENSOR 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF EPM7128STC100 I3_1_HPV
FAN_S X0 X MODB/ IPIPE1/ PE6 PAD7/ AN7 I3_1_HPV
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR 51 PH_2_HPV
ARST/ PE7 PH_2_HPV
I2_2_HPV
I1_2_HPV
I0_2_HPV
I3_1_HPV
I2_1_HPV
I1_1_HPV
I0_1_HPV
I3_2_HPV
HEF4051BM1 SPI_CLK 74 CS_SPI2 GND I0_2_HPV
SOL
TXD_TC
SPI_CLK PF6/CSP1 I0_2_HPV
RTS_TC
LEDMC
VTXTC
SPI_OUT 73 CSROM_MC I1_2_HPV
MOT1
SPI_OUT PF5/CSP0 U22E I1_2_HPV
SPI_IN RXD 97 72 CSRAM_MC I2_2_HPV
SPI_IN PS0/ RxD0 PF4/CSD I2_2_HPV
U18 TXD0_MC 98 71 CSPLD RW_MC 11 10 OE_MC I3_2_HPV
PS1/ TxD0 PF3/CS3 I3_2_HPV
CSPOT_X 15 1 IO_A0 70 IO_A2 DISABLE_HPV
CSPOT_X Y0 A PF2/CS2 DISABLE_HPV
CSPBUB1 14 2 IO_A1 RXD1_MC 99 69 IO_A1 74HC14SO PH_1_SYR
CSPBUB1 Y1 B PS2/ RxD1 PF1/CS1 PH_1_SYR
CSPBUB2 13 3 IO_A2 TXD1_MC 100 68 IO_A0 I0_1_SYR
CSPBUB2 Y2 C PS3/ TxD1 PF0/CS0 I0_1_SYR
CSPBUB3 12 B4 I1_1_SYR
CSPBUB3 Y3 I1_1_SYR
CSPOT_SYR 11 VCC SS_MC 104 75 DISABLE_X TCK I2_1_SYR
CSPOT_SYR Y4 PS7/ SS PH0/KWH0 1 2 GND J I2_1_SYR
CSHPPC 10 6 SPI_CLK 103 76 DISABLE_Z TDO I3_1_SYR
CSHPPC Y5 G1 PS6/ SCK PH1/KWH1 U22C DE7 3 4 VCC I3_1_SYR
CSTC 9 4 CS_SPI1 SPI_OUT 102 77 DISABLE_TH R40 VCC TMS PH_2_SYR
CSTC Y6 G2A PS5/ SDO/ MOSI PH2/KWH2 5 6 PH_2_SYR
CSRACK 7 5 SS_MC SPI_IN 101 78 DISABLE_HPV LEDMC 5 6 I0_2_SYR
CSRACK Y7 G2B PS4/ SDI/ MISO PH3/KWH3 470 7 8 I0_2_SYR
81 DISABLE_SYR TDI I1_2_SYR
PH4/KWH4 9 10 I1_2_SYR
C120 74HC138SO 82 PH_1_X 74HC14SO CL150UR3000 I2_2_SYR
VCC GND R47 PH5/KWH5 I2_2_SYR
22nF 85 83 PH_2_X CAV10 GND I3_2_SYR
10K VRef V RH PH6/KWH6 I3_2_SYR
U46 86 84 BUB_DET_3 DISABLE_SYR
GNDA V RL PH7/KWH7 DISABLE_SYR
CS5 15 1 IO_A0
CS5 Y0 A
DSYNC 14 2 IO_A1 42 105 BUB_DET_1 R115
DSYNC Y1 B VCC VDDX1 PT0/ IOC0
CS3 13 3 IO_A2 41 106 BUB_DET_2 VTXTC
CS3 Y2 C GND VSSX1 PT1/ IOC1 10K VCC
CS2 12 VCC 107 CS_SPI1
CS2 Y3 PT2/ IOC2
CS1 11 VCC 79 108 LIQUID PUMP JP4
CS1 Y4 VCC VDDX2 PT3/ IOC3
CS0 10 6 80 109 SENSOR 0 CAV2 C85
CS0 Y5 G1 GND VSSX2 PT4/ IOC4
CSCANHP 9 4 CS_SPI2 110 SENSOR 1 XTAL_MC
CSCANHP Y6 G2A PT5/ IOC5 VCC GND XTAL_MC
7 5 SS_MC 2 111 SENSOR 2 RES
Y7 G2B VCC VDDX3 PT6/ IOC6 RES
1 112 FR D LOCK SENSOR GND
GND VSSX3 PT7/ IOC7/ PAI 100nF
C211 74HC138SO VRef
VCC GND
22nF 14 3 PH_1_Z U47
VCC VDD KWJ0/PJ0
15 4 PH_2_Z 18
PE0MC C125 GND VSS KWJ1/PJ1
5 PH_1_TH
VCC ON-OFF
PE0MC 100nF KWJ2/PJ2
PE1MC 43 6 PH_2_TH RXD1_MC 10 9 BARCODE TXD
PE1MC GNDA VCC VDDPLL KWJ3/PJ3 R2OUT R2IN BARCODE TXD
PE3MC 45 7 PH_1_HPV 13 14
PE3MC GND VSSPLL KWJ4/PJ4 R1OUT R1IN GND
IO1CPLD VDDA 8 PH_2_HPV
IO1CPLD KWJ5/PJ5
95 9 PH_1_SYR TXD1_MC 11 8 BARCODE RXD
VDDA KWJ6/PJ6 T2IN T2OUT BARCODE RXD
96 10 PH_2_SYR TXD_TC 12 15 TXDTCRS
GNDA VSSA KWJ7/PJ7 T1IN T1OUT TXDTCRS
+
TXD0_HP C130 C215 6 C216
TXD0_HP C33 100nF C2-
RTS_HP 7
RTS_HP 1uFCTT16V 100nF -9VOUT 100nF GND
68HC812A4PV8 5
C2+
TXD_TC GNDA GNDA 4 C214
TXD_TC VCC C1- 100nF
RTS_TC C213 3
RTS_TC C143 C133 C119 +9VOUT GND
2
100nF 100nF 100nF C1+
RXD
RXD GND 100nF ST232CW
VCC
X_POS_SENSOR R29 U26

X_POS_SENSOR NC
X_HOME_SENSOR RXD 2 12 R+
X_HOME_SENSOR R A R+
RACK_POS_SENSOR R30 3
RACK_POS_SENSOR GND RE
SYR_HOME_SENSOR RST_MC 11 R-
SYR_HOME_SENSOR 470 B R-
Z_POS_SENSOR R33
Z_POS_SENSOR JP2
Z_HOME_SENSOR MODA_MC VCC U15 TXD 5 9 T+
Z_HOME_SENSOR 10K VCC CAV2 D Y T+
ADAPTOR_SENSOR R92 RTS 4
ADAPTOR_SENSOR DE
RACK_IN_SENSOR MODB_MC 2 10 T-
RACK_IN_SENSOR 100K C36 RESET Z T-
R93 100nF
TH_POS_SENSOR R34 GND SP491ECN
TH_POS_SENSOR 4K7 GND 100K C127 C134 C135 C126
TH_HOME_SENSOR R114 MAX809_EUR-T C48
TH_HOME_SENSOR 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF
TH_HIGHT_SENSOR GND
TH_HIGHT_SENSOR 10K VCC VCC GND
RACK_OUT_SENSOR
RACK_OUT_SENSOR
SENSOR 0 B3 100nF GND
SENSOR 0
SENSOR 1 BKGD_MC GND
SENSOR 1 1
SENSOR 2
SENSOR 2 GND 2
FR D LOCK SENSOR
FR D LOCK SENSOR 3 B
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR RST_MC
DOOR_LOCK_SENSOR 4
5
WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL
WASTE_VAC_SIGNAL VCC 6
VAC_SIGNAL CAV6
VAC_SIGNAL
AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG
AUX_DEG_VAC_SIG
IO2CPLD
IO2CPLD
IO3CPLD
IO3CPLD
BUB_DET_1
BUB_DET_1
BUB_DET_2
BUB_DET_2
BUB_DET_3
BUB_DET_3
Title
INTERFA CE BOA RD

A3 DAE 010 E/3 3


TACHY B
HP PUMP
RES
CLK HP
R77 C103
XFC_HP
100 GND
IT2
GND
C104 100nF
100
GND
99
98
97
96
94
93
92
90
89
87
85
84
83
81
80
79
78
77
76
100nF U9
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
U12
LP MIXING VALVE2b 20 52 A0_HP LP MIXING VALVE1 1 75

DATA0/KWD0/PD0 ADDR0/ PB0 I/O I/O
LP MIXING VALVE1b 21 53 A1_HP LP MIXING VALVE2 2
DATA1/KWD1/PD1 ADDR1/ PB1 I/O
RTS_HP 22 54 A2_HP 73 TDOHP
DATA2/KWD2/PD2 ADDR2/ PB2 TDO
23 55 A3_HP TDIHP 4 72
DATA3/KWD3/PD3 ADDR3/ PB3 TDI I/O
24 56 A4_HP CAM FLAG 5 71
DATA4/KWD4/PD4 ADDR4/ PB4 I/O I/O
25 57 A5_HP 6 70
DATA5/KWD5/PD5 PB5/ADDR5 I/O I/O
26 58 A6_HP 7 69
27 59 A7_HP 8 68
9 67
I/O I/O
XTAL_MC D8_HP 28 60 A8_HP 10
DATA8/PC0 PA0/ADDR8 I/O
JP1 D9_HP 29 61 A9_HP 65
NC DATA9/ PC1 PA1/ADDR9 I/O
EXTAL_HP D10_HP 30 62 A10_HP 12 64 LP MIXING VALVE2b
DATA10/ PC2 PA2/ADDR10 I/O I/O
D11_HP 31 63 A11_HP 13 63
DATA11/ PC3 PA3/ADDR11 I/O I/O
D12_HP 32 64 A12_HP LP MIXING VALVE1b 14 62 TCKHP
GND DATA12/ PC4 PA4/ADDR12 I/O TCK
D13_HP 33 65 A13_HP TMSHP 15 61
R8 X1 DATA13/ PC5 PA5/ADDR13 TMS I/O
C5 D14_HP 34 66 A14_HP DIR 16 60
NC DATA14/ PC6 PA6/ADDR14 I/O I/O
NC D15_HP 35 67 A15_HP 17
NC
DATA15/ PC7 PA7/ADDR15 I/O

58
I/O
XTAL_HP BKGD_HP 19 11 A16_HP 19 57
GND BKGD / TAGHI ADDR16/PG0 I/O I/O
C4 R28 12 A17_HP 20 56
ADDR17/PG1 I/O I/O
NC RES 40 13 A18_HP RW_HP 21 55 IRQHP
470 RST ADDR18/PG2 I/O I/O
RSTHP 16 CSPLDHP 22 54 IT1
ADDR19/PG3 I/O I/O
XTAL_HP 47 17 TACHY A 23 53
XTAL ADDR20/PG4 I/O I/O
RXD EXTAL_HP 46 18 TACHYAXORB 24 52
RXD EXTAL ADDR21/PG5 I/O I/O
TXD0_HP HP PUMPb 25
TXD0_HP I/O
RTS_HP XFC_HP 44
RTS_HP XFC
87
VCC 10K PAD0/ AN0
36 88 HP_SENSOR
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
R82 XIRQ /PE0 PAD1/ AN1
IRQHP 37 89 LP MIXING VALVE_S
IRQ /VPP/ PE1 PAD2/ AN2
RW_HP 38 90 HP PUMP_S
R/ W/ PE2 PAD3/ AN3
39 91 C137
LSTRB /TAGLO/ PE3 PAD4/ AN4
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CLK HP 48 92 SU2 100nF EPM7128STC100
ECLK/ PE4 PAD5/ AN5 SU7
MODA_HP 49 93 SU P
MODA/ IPIPE0/ PE5 PAD6/ AN6 VCC GND
D15_HP
D14_HP
D13_HP
D12_HP
D10_HP
D11_HP
TACHY
MODB_HP 50 94 NC SU P
A3_HP
A2_HP
A1_HP
A0_HP
D8_HP
D9_HP
MODB/ IPIPE1/ PE6 PAD7/ AN7
51 822498-1
ARST/ PE7
XTAL_MC 74
XTAL_MC PF6/CSP1
RES GND 73 CSROM_HP A16_HP 2
RES PF5/CSP0 A16
RXD 97 72 CSRAM_HP A17_HP 30 12 A0_HP
PS0/ RxD0 PF4/CSD A17 A0
CSHPPC TXD0_HP 98 71 CSPLDHP A18_HP 1 11 A1_HP
CSHPPC PS1/ TxD0 PF3/CS3 A18 A1
SPI_CLK 70 10 A2_HP
SPI_CLK PF2/CS2 A2
SPI_IN 99 69 D8_HP 13 9 A3_HP
SPI_IN PS2/ RxD1 PF1/CS1 DQ0 A3
SPI_OUT 100 68 D9_HP 14 8 A4_HP B2
SPI_OUT PS3/ TxD1 PF0/CS0 DQ1 A4
D10_HP 15 7 A5_HP TCKHP
DQ2 A5 1 2 GND JTAG
CSHPPC 104 75 D11_HP 17 6 A6_HP TDOHP
PS7/ SS PH0/KWH0 DQ3 A6 3 4 VCC
SPI_CLK 103 76 D12_HP 18 5 A7_HP TMSHP
PS6/ SCK PH1/KWH1 DQ4 A7 5 6
SPI_OUT 102 77 D13_HP 19 27 A8_HP
PS5/ SDO/ MOSI PH2/KWH2 DQ5 A8 7 8
SPI_IN 101 78 D14_HP 20 26 A9_HP TDIHP
PS4/ SDI/ MISO PH3/KWH3 DQ6 A9 9 10
81 D15_HP 21 23 A10_HP
PH4/KWH4 DQ7 A10
CAM FLAG 82 25 A11_HP CAV10 GND
CAM FLAG PH5/KWH5 A11
TACHY A 85 83 CSROM_HP 22 4 A12_HP
TACHY A VRef V RH PH6/KWH6 CE A12
TACHY B 86 84 OE_HP 24 28 A13_HP
TACHY B GNDA V RL PH7/KWH7 OE A13
RW_HP 31 29 A14_HP HP PUMP
WE A14 HP PUMP
42 105 CAM FLAG U7 3 A15_HP LP MIXING VALVE1
VCC VDDX1 PT0/ IOC0 A15 LP MIXING VALVE1
41 106 TACHY A MBM29F040C-90JC LP MIXING VALVE2
GND VSSX1 PT1/ IOC1 LP MIXING VALVE2
107 TACHY B
PT2/ IOC2
HP_SENSOR 79 108 HP PUMPb D8_HP 11 10 A0_HP
HP_SENSOR VCC VDDX2 PT3/ IOC3 O0 A0 U22F DE6
LP MIXING VALVE_S 80 109 IT1 D9_HP 12 9 A1_HP R18 VCC
LP MIXING VALVE_S GND VSSX2 PT4/ IOC4 O1 A1
HP PUMP_S 110 TACHYAXORB D10_HP 13 8 A2_HP LEDHPPC 13 12
HP PUMP_S PT5/ IOC5 O2 A2 470
2 111 IT2 D11_HP 15 7 A3_HP
VCC VDDX3 PT6/ IOC6 O3 A3
PE3MC 1 112 TACHY D12_HP 16 6 A4_HP 74HC14SO CL150UR3000
PE3MC GND VSSX3 PT7/ IOC7/ PAI O4 A4
VRef D13_HP 17 5 A5_HP R74
O5 A5
14 3 PE3MC D14_HP 18 4 A6_HP MODA_HP
VCC VDD KWJ0/PJ0 O6 A6 10K VCC
15 4 DIR D15_HP 19 3 A7_HP R75
C96 GND VSS KWJ1/PJ1 O7 A7
5 LEDHPPC 25 A8_HP MODB_HP
100nF KWJ2/PJ2 A8 100K
43 6 U8 24 A9_HP R76
VCC VDDPLL KWJ3/PJ3 A9
45 7 CY62256L-70SNC 21 A10_HP
GND VSSPLL KWJ4/PJ4 A10 4K7 GND
GNDA 8 23 A11_HP R83
KWJ5/PJ5 A11
VDDA 95 9 2 A12_HP
VDDA VDDA KWJ6/PJ6 A12 10K VCC
96 10 26 A13_HP
GNDA VSSA KWJ7/PJ7 A13
VCC 1 A14_HP B1
A14
+ BKGD_HP
C16 C100 1 BDM
20 CSRAM_HP
C13 100nF 100nF CS GND 2
68HC812A4PV8 22 OE_HP
1uFCTT16V OE 3
27 RW_HP RSTHP
WE 4
GNDA GNDA
VCC 5
GND
C116 C117 C105 C97 U22A VCC 6
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF RW_HP 1 2 OE_HP CAV6
GND
74HC14SO
Title
INTERFA CE BOARD

A3 DA E010E+3 3
Date: Thursday, March 13, 2003 Sheet 5 of 7


L3 VDDA
LQH3C100K34 U3 PT12
L78M05CDT VDDA NC
1 3
+26 IN OUT
GND
L1 +
LQH3C100K34 +
C24 C21
XTAL_MC C20 10uFCTT35V 100nF C25
2
JP3 100nF 10uFCTT35V
NC EXTAL_TC
GNDA
GND VRef
GND L2 U2 PT13
C148 X3 LQH3C100K34 LT1019CS8-5
NC NC
NC 2 6
+26 IN OUT VRef
GND
XTAL_TC
GND C7
C149 + + 560 pour INA122UA
NC 10uFCTT35V C15 C14
R21
100nF 100nF
4
B5 150 1%
NC
CLR GNDA C6 R25 R84
1 10uFCTT16V 10K 0.1% 113 0.1%
GND U10
2 VCC
8 1
3 GND RG+ RG-
ICSPData R22 7 2 GND
4 VDDA VCC IN-
ICSPCLK 6 3
5 100K OUT IN+ Vref
5 4
2V5 REF VEE C115
C27
2.2uF MAX4194ESA GNDA R80 100pF PT100HEAT2
10K 0.1% PT100HEAT2
C152
GNDA C38
VCC GND
PT100HEAT1
VDDA GNDA PT100HEAT1
100nF
100nF C113
U30 U11 100pF
R27
EXTAL_TC 9 21 RTS_TC 560 pour INA122UA
OSC1 RB0 150 1%
22 CSCAN GND
RB1
23 CKCAN CSCAN 1 2 E1
RB2 CS CH0 R32 R87
24 OUTCAN CKCAN 7 3 E2
RB3 CLK CH1 10K 0.1% 113 0.1%
XTAL_TC 10 25 INCAN U14
OSC2 RB4
26 RB5 OUTCAN 6 8 8 1
RB5 DOUT VCC Vref RG+ RG-
FAN_S 2 27 ICSPCLK INCAN 5 4 R26 7 2 GND
RA0 RB6 DIN GND GNDA VDDA VCC IN-
HEATER_S 3 28 ICSPData 6 3
RA1 RB7 100K OUT IN+ Vref
XTAL_MC LEDTC 4 5 4
XTAL_MC RA2 2V5 REF VEE C121
RES RA3 5 11 HEATER1 C30
RES RA3 RC0 GND R86 100pF
RA4 6 12 HEATER2 LTC1288CS8 2.2uF MAX4194ESA GNDA PT100EXT2
RA4 RC1 10K 0.1% PT100EXT2
CSTC 7 13 FAN C28
RA5 RC2
CSTC 14 SPI_CLK GNDA C31
CSTC RC3 GNDA VRef
SPI_CLK CLR 1 15 SPI_OUT PT100EXT1
SPI_CLK MCLR RC4 VDDA GNDA PT100EXT1
SPI_IN 16 SPI_IN 100nF
SPI_IN VCC RC5 C118
SPI_OUT 17 TXD_TC 100nF
SPI_OUT D10 RC6 100pF
18 RXD
BAS21LT1 RC7
RXD
RXD
TXD_TC R53 16F876-20SP GND
TXD_TC
RTS_TC RES
RTS_TC 1K SU36
SU P
110-97-328-41-001
FAN_S U36
FAN_S
HEATER_S EXTAL_TC 9 21 RTS_TC
HEATER_S OSC1 RB0
22 CSCAN HEATER1
RB1 HEATER1
23 CKCAN HEATER2
RB2 HEATER2
24 OUTCAN
RB3
XTAL_TC 10 25 INCAN FAN VRef
OSC2 RB4 FAN
26 RB5
RB5
FAN_S 2 27 ICSPCLK 2V5
RA0 RB6 R13
HEATER_S 3 28 ICSPData
RA1 RB7 10K 1%
LEDTC 4
RA2
RA3 5 11 HEATER1 2V5
RA3 RC0
RA4 6 12 HEATER2 13
RA4 RC1 PT14
CSTC 7 13 FAN 14
RA5 RC2
14 SPI_CLK 12 NC
RC3 U5D
CLR 1 15 SPI_OUT
MCLR RC4
16 SPI_IN TLV2374ID
RC5 R16
17 TXD_TC
RC6 C176 10K 1%
18 RXD
RC7 100nF
NC
GNDA
DE8 VCC 6
R57
LEDTC 7
470 5
GNDA U5B
CL150UR3000
TLV2374ID
9
8
10
GNDA U5C
TLV2374ID
Title
INTERFACE BOARD

A3 DA E010E+3 3
Date: Thursday, March 13, 2003 Sheet 6 of 7


VDDA R108
6
7 BUB1
BUB1 R110 10M
5
BUB_DET1 U48B NC VDDA
4
TLV2374ID
R49 C60 U49A
4K7 100nF R107
BUB1 3
51K
1 BUB_DET_1
BUB_DET_1
2
GNDA
GNDA TLV2374ID
11
R109
11
NC
2
1 BUB2 GNDA
BUB2
3
BUB_DET2 U48A U27 VDDA GNDA
TLV2374ID 1 8
R48 C58 GNDA L H
7
W
4
4K7 100nF CSPBUB1 3 6
VDDA CS VDD VCC
SPI_OUT 4 5
DIN SCLK
MAX5400EKA-T C57
GNDA SPI_CLK 100nF
GND
13
14 BUB3 VDDA R112
BUB3
12
BUB_DET3 U48D
R111 10M
TLV2374ID
R50 C62 NC
4K7 100nF
U49B
R106
BUB2 5
51K
7 BUB_DET_2
BUB_DET_2
GNDA 6
9
8 TLV2374ID
10 R113
GNDA U48C NC
TLV2374ID
U28 VDDA GNDA

1 8
GNDA L H
7
W
CSPBUB1 CSPBUB2 3 6
CSPBUB1 CS VDD VCC
CSPBUB2 SPI_OUT 4 5
CSPBUB2 DIN SCLK
CSPBUB3
CSPBUB3 C56
MAX5400EKA-T
SPI_CLK SPI_CLK 100nF
SPI_CLK
SPI_OUT
SPI_OUT
GND
VDDA R119
R118 10M
NC
U49C
R116
BUB3 10
51K
8 BUB_DET_3
BUB_DET_3
9
TLV2374ID
R117
NC
U29 VDDA GNDA

1 8
GNDA L H
7
W
CSPBUB3 3 6
CS VDD VCC
SPI_OUT 4 5
DIN SCLK
MAX5400EKA-T
SPI_CLK
U49D
12
GNDA
14
13
TLV2374ID
Title
INTERFA CE BOA RD

A3 DA E010E+3 3


Bio Rad D-10 Hemoglobin Tester

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bio Rad D-10 Hemoglobin Tester

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Technical Assistance Contact Information:

(e.g. safety glasses, laboratory coat and gloves)

TRADEMARKS AND REFERENCES

D-10 is a trademark of Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc.

ii Service Manual 200:155

1.1. General Description 1-1

200:155 Service Manual iii

1.5 Safety Symbols 1-27

2.1 Physical Specifications 2-1

3.1. System Overview 3-1

iv Service Manual 200:155

3.3.12 Rack Door Module 3-40

4.1 Installation Requirements 4-1

5.1 D-10 Application 5-1

200:155 Service Manual v

5.8 Shutdown Sequence of the D-10 5-6

6.1 List of Procedures 6-1

vi Service Manual 200:155

6.6 Electronic Module 6-8

7.1 List of Procedures 7-1

200:155 Service Manual vii

7.3 WC/FC Verification 7-5

viii Service Manual 200:155

8.1 Error Messages 8-1

9.1 Materials 9-1

10 Spare Parts 10-1

200:155 Service Manual ix

Appendix A: File Examples

D-10: Sample Preparation Circuit (HP valve in load position) B-1

Appendix C: Electronic Diagrams

Detector Board, Sheet 1 C-1

x Service Manual 200:155

200:155 Service Manual xi

Figure 3-24: Sampling Arm Module Location and Fastening 3-16

xii Service Manual 200:155

Figure 5-1: Numeric Keyboard 5-9

200:155 Service Manual xiii

Figure 5-44: D-10 HP module: pump, valve (14/16) 5-43

xiv Service Manual 200:155

Figure 9-1: Z macro movement Parameters 9-4

200:155 Service Manual xv

xvi Service Manual 200:155

About this manual:

In addition to the determination of relative percent of specific hemoglobins, the system

200:155 Service Manual 1-1

1.2 High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC)

1.2.2 General Principle

1.3 HPLC Applied to the D-10

1.3.1 General Principle

Ion-exchange HPLC operates on the basis of selective exchange of ions in the

1-2 Service Manual 200:155

Figure 1-1: Sample Elution in Cartridge

1.3.2 Stationary Phase: The Cartridge

200:155 Service Manual 1-3

Figure 1-2: Cartridge Material

1.3.3 Mobile Phase: The Buffers

The buffers have the following approximate pH:

1.3.5 Bio-Rad D-10 Hemoglobin A1c

1-4 Service Manual 200:155

Elution gradient: HbA1c

Figure 1-3: HbA1c Gradient

1.3.6 Bio-Rad D-10 Dual Program

Elution gradient: Dual